Civilbe PDF

Department of Civil Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech.
| Regulation 2011| Revision 2013 1
B. E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
(Minimum credits to be earned: 193)
First Semester
Objectives &
Code
Course Outcomes L T P C
No.
PEOs POs
11O101 Engineering Mathematics I* II a 3 1 0 3.5
11O102 Engineering Physics* II a 3 0 0 3.0
11O103 Engineering Chemistry* II a 3 0 0 3.0
Language Elective I‡ 3 0 0 3.0
Basics of Mechanical II a, d
11C105 3 0 0 3.0
Engineering
11C106 Computer Programming† II a, d 2 0 2 3.0
11C107 Building Materials III a 3 0 0 3.0
11O208 Engineering Graphics$ II a 2 0 2 3.0
Engineering Chemistry II a
11O109 0 0 2 1.0
Laboratory#
Total 22 1 6 25.5
Second Semester
Objectives &
Code
No.
PEOs POs
11O201 Engineering Mathematics II* II a 3 1 0 3.5
11O202 Environmental Science* II a 3 0 0 3.0
Language Elective II‡ 3 1 0 3.5
11C204 Applied Material Science II a 3 0 0 3.0
Basics of Electrical and II a, d
11O205 4 0 0 4.0
Electronics Engineering+
11C206 Applied Geology II, III a 3 0 2 4.0
11C207 Engineering Mechanics II, III a, e 3 1 0 3.5
11C209 Workshop Practice II a 0 0 2 1.0
Engineering Physics II a
11O108 0 0 2 1.0
Laboratory#
Total 22 3 6 26.5
*
Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech.
‡
Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech. (Continuous Assessment)
†
Common to CE, TT & FT
$
Common to CE, CSE, AE, ECE & EIE (II Semester), ME, EE , BT, IT, TT & FT (I Semester)
+
Common to CSE, IT, FT & ME (first semester) and to CE, AE, EIE, TT & BT
#
Common to CE, CSE, AE, ECE & EIE (I Semester) and to ME, EEE , BT, IT, TT & FT (II Semester)
Department of Civil Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech. | Regulation 2011| Revision 2013 2
Third Semester
Code Objectives & Outcomes

Course L T P C
No. PEOs POs
11O301 Engineering Mathematics III* II a 3 1 0 3.5
Mechanics of Deformable
11C302 III a 3 1 0 3.5
Bodies I
11C303 Survey I III c 3 1 0 3.5
11C304 Fluid Mechanics III c 3 1 0 3.5
Design of Timber and
11C305 I, III c 3 0 0 3.0
Masonry Structures
Architecture and Urban
11C306 III c, l 3 0 0 3.0
Planning
Strength of Materials
11C307 III b 0 0 3 1.5
Laboratory
Computer Aided Building
11C308 III g 0 0 3 1.5
Plan and Drawing
11C309 Survey Practical I III b, c 0 0 4 2.0
Total 18 4 10 25.0
Fourth Semester
Course L T P C
No. PEOs POs
11C401 Numerical Methods II a 3 1 0 3.5
Mechanics of Deformable
11C402 III a 3 1 0 3.5
Bodies – II
11C403 Survey II III c 3 1 0 3.5
11C404 Soil Mechanics III c 3 1 0 3.5
Applied Hydraulics and
11C405 III c 3 0 0 3.0
Hydraulic Machinery
11C406 Hydrology III c 3 0 0 3.0
11C407 Soil Mechanics Laboratory III b 0 0 3 1.5
11C408 Fluid Mechanics Laboratory III b 0 0 3 1.5
11C409 Survey Practical II III b, c 0 0 3 1.5
Total 18 4 9 24.5
*
Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech. except BT & CSE
Fifth Semester

Course L T P C
No. PEOs POs
Water Supply
11C501 III c 3 0 0 3.0
Engineering
11C502 Structural Analysis I II, III a, e 3 1 0 3.5
11C503 Foundation Engineering II, III c 3 1 0 3.5
11C504 Concrete Technology III c 3 0 0 3.0
Design of R.C.C.
11C505 II, III c 3 0 0 3.0
Elements
Elective I - - - 3.0
Concrete Technology
11C507 III b 0 0 3 1.5
Laboratory
11C508 Design Studio III b, c, d, g 0 0 3 1.5
11C509 Survey Camp III b, c, d, f, g 0 0 3 1.5
11C510 Technical Seminar I I g, i - - - 1.0
Total 15 2 9 24.5
Sixth Semester

Course L T P C
No. PEOs POs
Design of R.C.C.
11C601 II, III c 3 0 0 3.0
Structures
11C602 Structural Analysis II II, III a, e 3 1 0 3.5
11C603 Waste Water Treatment III c 3 0 0 3.0
11C604 Irrigation Engineering III c 3 0 0 3.0
Design of Steel
11C605 II, III c 3 1 0 3.5
Structures
Elective II - - - 3.0
Irrigation and Public
11C607 Health Engineering III g 0 0 3 1.5
Drawing
Computer Aided
11C608 Estimation, Costing and III g, l, m 0 0 3 1.5
Valuation
11C609 Technical Seminar II I g, i - - - 1.0
Total 15 2 6 23.0

Minimum credits to be earned. The maximum number of credits as well as the total number of L T P hours may
vary depending upon the electives offered
Seventh Semester
Objectives &
Code Outcomes
Course L T P C
No.
PEOs POs
11O701 Engineering Economics* I, IV f, g 3 0 0 3.0
11C702 Highway Engineering III c 3 0 0 3.0
Basics of Structural Dynamics
11C703 and Aseismic Design of II, V a, c, e, g ,l 3 0 0 3.0
Structures
Construction Technology and
11C704 III l, m 3 0 0 3.0
Management
Elective III - - - 3.0
Elective IV - - - 3.0
Computer Aided Analysis,
11C707 Design and Drawing and III b, c, g 0 0 3 1.5
Detailing of Structures
Environmental Engineering
11C708 III b 0 0 3 1.5
Laboratory
11C709 Project Work Phase I I, III c, d, e, f, g - - - 3.0
Total 12 0 6 24.0
Eighth Semester
Objectives &
Code
No.
PEOs POs
11O801 Professional Ethics* IV f, h 2 0 0 2.0
Elective V - - - 3.0
Elective VI - - - 3.0
11C804 Project Work Phase II I, III c, d, e, f, g - - - 12.0
Total 2 0 0 20.0
*
Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech.

Minimum credits to be earned. The maximum number of credits as well as the total number of L T P hours may
vary depending upon the electives chosen
ELECTIVES
LANGUAGE ELECTIVES
Code No. Course Objectives & Outcomes L T P C
PEOs POs
Language Elective I
11O10B Basic English I IV g 3 0 0 3.0
11O10C Communicative English IV g 3 0 0 3.0
Language Elective II
11O20B Basic English II IV g 3 1 0 3.5
11O20C Advanced Communicative I, IV g 3 1 0 3.5
English
11O20G German I, IV g 3 1 0 3.5
11O20J Japanese I, IV g 3 1 0 3.5
11020F French I, IV g 3 1 0 3.5
11O20H Hindi I, IV g 3 1 0 3.5
DISCIPLINE ELECTIVES
Environmental Engineering & Project Management
11C001 Municipal Solid Waste III e, f 3 0 0 3.0
Management
11C002 Solid and Liquid Industrial III e, f 3 0 0 3.0
Waste Management
11C003 Hazardous Waste III e, h, j 3 0 0 3.0
Management and Site
Remediation
11C004 Environmental Impact I, III e, f, h, j, m 3 0 0 3.0
Assessment
Geotechnical Engineering
11C005 Ground Improvement III b, c, k 3 0 0 3.0
Techniques
11C006 Earth Retaining Structures III c, j 3 0 0 3.0
11C007 Machine Foundation III a, c, e 3 0 0 3.0
Water Resources & Transportation Engineering

11C008 Open Channel Flow III a, c 3 0 0 3.0
Water Resources Planning III c, f 3 0 0 3.0
11C009
and Management
Transportation Planning and III c 3 0 0 3.0
11C010
Mass Transportation System
Railways, Airports and III c 3 0 0 3.0
11C011
Harbours
Structural Engineering
Design of Prestressed III c 3 0 0 3.0
11C012
Concrete Structures
11C013 Bridge Engineering III c 3 0 0 3.0
Design of Industrial III c
11C014 3 0 0 3.0
Structures
11C015 Advanced RC Design III c 3 1 0 3.5
11C016 Tall Structures III k 3 0 0 3.0
Repair and Rehabilitation of III e
11C017 3 0 0 3.0
Structures
11C018 Finite Element Method II, III a, e, k, l 3 1 0 3.5
11C019 Advanced Steel Design III a, c, k 3 1 0 3.5
General
11C020 Building Services III c 3 0 0 3.0
11C021 Disaster Management I, III h, k 3 0 0 3.0
Concepts of Engineering I, III c 3 0 0 3.0
11C022
Design
11C023 Creativity and Innovations I, IV k 3 0 0 3.0
11C024 Remote Sensing and GIS III a, d, j, k 3 0 0 3.0
11C025 Green Buildings III c, d, h, j, k 3 0 0 3.0
11C026 Prefabricated Structures III c, j 3 1 0 3.5
Landscape Architecture - I
11C027 Contemporary Landscapes III d, j 3 0 0 3.0
Sustainable Landscapes and I, III d, j 3 0 0 3.0
11C028
Green Building Designs
Ecological Landscape I, III d, j 3 0 0 3.0
11C029
Planning
11C030 Landscape Construction I I, III d, j 3 1 0 3.5
Landscape Architecture - II
11C031 Landscape Planting Design III d, j 3 0 0 3.0
Advanced Landscape I, III d, j 3 1 0 3.5
11C032
Construction II
Landscape Planting and I, III d, j 3 0 0 3.0
11C033
Horticultural Practices
11C034 Urban Landscape Design I, III d, j 3 0 0 3.0
PHYSICS ELECTIVES
Nano Science and II a 3 0 0 3.0
11O0PA
Technology
11O0PB Laser Technology II a 3 0 0 3.0
11O0PC Electro-Optic Materials II a 3 0 0 3.0
Vacuum Science and II a 3 0 0 3.0
11O0PD
Deposition Techniques
Semiconducting materials II a 3 0 0 3.0
11O0PE
and Devices
CHEMISTRY ELECTIVES
Polymer Chemistry and II a 3 0 0 3.0
11O0YA
Processing
Energy Storing Devices and II a 3 0 0 3.0
11O0YB
Fuel Cells
11O0YC Chemistry of Nanomaterials II a 3 0 0 3.0
Corrosion Science and II a 3 0 0 3.0
11O0YD
Engineering
ENTREPRENEURSHIP ELECTIVES
Entrepreneurship I, IV d, g, h, k 3 0 0 3.0
11O001
Development I
Entrepreneurship I, IV d, g, h, k 3 0 0 3.0
11O002
Development II€
ONE CREDIT COURSES*

11C0XA Air Pollution III c, h - - - 1.0
11C0XB E-waste Management III e, f, j - - - 1.0
Building Information III c, g, j, k, m - - - 1.0
11C0XC
Modelling
Advanced Computer Aided III a,e,k 1.0
11C0XD
Analysis And Design
11COXE Interior Design III c, g, j, k, m - - - 1.0
€ Pre-requisite for this course is Entrepreneurship Development Elective I

*
Classes to be conducted for 20 Hours duration
SPECIAL COURSES
Innovative Practices in III c
11C0RA Earthquake Resistant Design - - - 3.0
of Structures
Advanced Concrete III c
11C0RB - - - 3.0
Technology
11C0RC Composite Structures III c - - - 3.0
11C0RD Space Structures III c - - - 3.0
Case Studies on Failure of III b, c
11C0RE - - - 3.0
Structures
Advanced Transportation III c
11C0RF - - - 3.0
System
11C0RG Urban Transportation System III c - - - 3.0
Application of AI in Civil II, III a, e, k
11C0RH - - - 3.0
Engineering
11O101 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS I

(Common to all Branches)
3 1 0 3.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs)
 Acquire knowledge in matrix theory, a part of linear algebra, which has wider application in engineering
problems.
 To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series, their convergence and to solve first and
higher order differential equations using Laplace transform.
PROGRAMME OUTCOME (PO)
(a) an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering
COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)
1. Acquire more knowledge in basic concepts of engineering mathematics

2. To improve problem evaluation technique
3. Choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

S. No Test I1 Test II1
Examination1 Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 40 40 40 40
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze/ Evaluate 10 10 10 10
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State Cayley Hamilton theorem

2. Define Eigen value and Eigen vectors of the matrix
3. Write the definition of Convergence & Divergence of the sequence
4. State the necessary & sufficient condition for the differential equation to be exact
5. Write the Radius of curvature in cartesian coordinates
6. Define Evolute,Centre of curvature & Circle of curvature
7. Write the Leibneitz‘s form of linear equation in y and in x
8. Write the general form of Euler‘s & Legendre linear differential equation.
9. Define Convolution of two functions
10. State the existence conditions for Laplace transforms
1
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and model examination will be converted
to a maximum of 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, internal
assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.
UNDERSTAND
 2 2 0
 
1. Find the eigen values and eigen vectors of A =  3 5 1 
 8 1 3
 
2.
Find the radius of Curvature at ( a,0) on the curve xy2 = a3 – x3
3. Find the Circle of Curvature of the parabola Y2 = 12x at the point ( 3.6)
dy
4. Solve cos2 x + y = tanx
dx
5. Solve y (2xy + ex ) dx = ex dy.
6. Find evolute of the parabola x2 =4ay
7. Solve ( D2 + .4 ) y = x2
8. Solve ( D – 3 )2 y = x e-2x
9. Find the Laplace transform of e2t sin3t
10. Find the laplace transform of e2t cos4t
APPLY
3 1 1 
 
1. Diagonalise the matrix A= 1 3  1 by means of an orthogonal transformation
 
1  1 3 
1 3 7
 
2. Use Cayley Hamilton theorem find inverse of A =  4 2 3  .
1 2 1
 
3 3.4 3.4.5
3. Test the convergence of the series + + + .....
4 4.6 4.6.8
1
4. Use Convolution theorem find inverse Laplace transform of
( s  1)( s  2)
5. Use method of variation of parameters , solve (D2+4)y = tan 2x
6. Use Laplace transform solve ( D2 + 4D + 13) = e-t sint Y = 0 and DY = 0 at t = 0

x
7. Test for convergence of the series 1 x
dy
8. Use Bernoulli1 s equation solve xy ( 1 + xy2 ) =1
dx
dy
9. Use Leibnitz‘s linear equation ( x  1)
 y  e 2 x ( x  1) 2
dx
 t
e (sin 3t )
10. Use Laplace Transform to evaluate,  dt
0
t
ANALYZE / EVALUATE
2 2 2
1. Reduce the quadratic form 8x 1 +7x 2 +3x 3 -12x 1 x 2 -8x 2 x 3 +4x 3 x 1 to canonical form by
orthogonal transformation and find the rank, signature, index and the nature.
2 2 2
2. Reduce 3x +5y +3z -2yz+2zx-2xy to its canonical form through an orthogonal transformation and find
the rank, signature, index and the nature
3. Find the evolute of the cycloid : x = a(  +sin  ) ; y = a(1 - cos  )
a a
4. Find the circle of curvature of x  y   at  , 
4 4
5. Discuss the convergence of the series 1 / 3.4.5 + 2 / 4.5.6 + 3 / 5.6.7 +…...
 2 1 1 
6. Verify Cayley-Hamilton theorem for A=  1 2  1 . Hence find its inverse.
 
 1  1 2 
7. Using the method of variation of parameters, solve (D 2 + a 2)y = tan ax.
1
8. Solve [x2D2 + 4xD + 2]y = x2 + .
x2
x y
9. Find the envelope of the straight line   1 , here a and b are connected by the relation a2 + b2 = c2
a b
10. Find the Laplace transform of the following functions
11. (1). (t + 2t2)2 (2) sin2 2t (3). sin 3t cos 2t (4). Cos (at+b)
Unit I
Matrices
Characteristic equation - eigen values and eigen vectors of a real matrix - properties of eigen values - Cayley–
Hamilton theorem- Reduction of a real matrix to a diagonal form- Orthogonal matrices- Quadratic form -Reduction
of a quadratic form to a canonical form by orthogonal transformation-application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit II
Series and Differential Calculus
Series- Convergences and divergence- Comparison test– Ratio test - Curvature in Cartesian Coordinates- Centre and
radius of curvature - Circle of curvature – Evolutes –Envelopes – application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit III
Differential Equation of First Order
Linear differential equation of first order-exact-integrating factor- Euler‘s equation-Bernoulli‘s-modeling-
application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Differential Equations of Higher Order
Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant and variable coefficients - Cauchy‘s and
Legendre‘s linear differential equations - method of variation of parameters –application of engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit V
Laplace Transforms
Laplace Transform- conditions for existence(statement only) -Transforms of standard functions – properties
(statement only) - Transforms of derivatives and integrals - Initial and Final value theorems (statement only) -
Periodic functions - Inverse transforms - Convolution theorems(statement only) - Applications of Laplace
transforms for solving the ordinary differential equations up to second order with constant coefficients-application to
engineering problems.
9 Hours
Total: 45 + 15 Hours
Textbooks
1. B S Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publications , New Delhi 2000 .

2. K A Lakshminarayanan, K.Megalai, P.Geetha and D.Jayanthi, Mathematics for Engineers, Volume I,
Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 2008.
References
1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume I, S. Chand and

Co., New Delhi-2009.
2. T. Veerarajan , Engineering Mathematics , Tata McGraw Hill Publications , New Delhi 2008.
3. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, Singapore, 2008.
4. C. Ray Wylie and C. Louis Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, 2003
11O102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS

(Common to all branches)
3 0 0 3.0
 To impart fundamental knowledge in the areas of acoustics, crystallography and new engineering materials.
 To apply fundamental knowledge in the area of LASERS and fiber optics
 To use the principles of quantum physics in the respective fields
 At the end of the course the students are familiar with the basic principles and applications of physics in
various fields.
1. Making to learn modern techniques in sound.

2. Study the working and applications of different types of laser.
3. Understanding the Schrödinger wave equation and scattering of X-rays.
4. Utilization of concept of air wedge in determining the thickness of a thin wire.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Semester
S.No Test 1† Test 2† Model Examination† End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Give the classifications of sound.

2. Write a note on loudness.
3. Define decibel.
4. What is meant by reverberation time?
5. Define magnetostriction effect.
6. Give the classification of crystals.
7. Define Miller indices.
8. Define lattice and unit cells.
9. Mention the applications of X-ray diffraction.
10. Write a short note on air wedge.
11. List the applications of air wedge method.
12. Give the applications of LASER.
13. Give the classification of laser based on refractive index.
†
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and Model Examination will be
converted to a maximum of 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly
internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.
14. Write a note on holography.

15. Draw the block diagram of fiber optic communication system.
16. Define the term Compton effect.
17. What is the physical significance of wave function?
18. What are metallic glasses?
19. Write a note on shape memory alloys.
20. Mention the merits of nano materials.
21. List the advantages of ceramic materials.
UNDERSTAND
1. How Weber-Fechner law is formulated?

2. Explain the characteristics of loudness.
3. Elucidate the significance of timber.
4. How the magnetostriction effect is utilized in the production of ultrasonic waves?
5. What is the importance of reverberation time in the construction of building?
6. Give the importance of lattice and lattice planes in a crystal.
7. How do you measure the d-spacing?
8. How do you calculate the packing factor of BCC structure?
9. How air wedge is used in determining the flatness of a thin plate?
10. Give the importance of optical pumping in the production of LASER.
11. What are the various steps involved in holography?
12. How can you derive the acceptance angle in fiber?
13. Why the wave function is called as probability density?
14. Why the wave function is finite inside the potential well?
15. Why the particle is not escaping through the walls of the well?
16. How ceramic materials are prepared by slip casting technique?
APPLY
1. Discuss the factors affecting the acoustics of buildings.

2. Ultrasonic waves are electromagnetic waves. Justify.
3. Sketch the circuit diagram for piezo electric oscillator.
4. How can you determine the velocity of ultrasonic by acoustic grating?
5. Explain how Miller indices are used in crystal structures?
6. How do you calculate the packing factor for FCC structure?
7. Draw the crystal lattice for (110) plane.
8. Why does air wedge occur only in the flat glass plates?
9. Explain the various steps involved in holography techniques.
10. Discuss the particle in a one dimensional box by considering infinite length of well.
11. Explain how shape memory alloy change its shape?
12. How can you prepare the nano materials synthesized by sol gel technique?
ANALYZE/ EVALUATE
1. Compare magnetostriction and piezo-electric method in the production of ultrasonic waves.

2. Differentiate musical sound and noises.
3. Compare the packing factor of BCC, FCC and HCP structures.
4. Distinguish between photography and holography.
5. Compare slip casting and isostatic pressing.
Unit I
Acoustics and Ultrasonics
Acoustics: Classification of sound – characteristics of musical sound – loudness – Weber – Fechner law – decibel –
absorption coefficient – reverberation – reverberation time – Sabine‘s formula (growth & decay). Factors affecting
acoustics of buildings and their remedies. Ultrasonics: Ultrasonic production – magnetostriction - piezo electric
methods. Applications: Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves (acoustic grating) - SONAR.
The phenomenon of cavitation.

9 Hours
Unit II
Crystallography
Crystal Physics: Lattice – unit cell – Bravais lattices – lattice planes – Miller indices – ‗d‘ spacing in cubic lattice –
calculation of number of atoms per unit cell – atomic radius – coordination number – packing factor for SC, BCC,
FCC and HCP structures - X-ray Diffraction: Laue‘s method – powder crystal method.
Crystal defects.
9 Hours
Unit III
Waveoptics
Interference: Air wedge – theory – uses – testing of flat surfaces – thickness of a thin wire. LASER: Types of lasers
– Nd – YAG laser – CO2 laser – semiconductor laser (homojunction). Applications: Holography – construction –
reconstruction – uses. Fiber Optics: Principle of light transmission through fiber - expression for acceptance angle
and numerical aperture - types of optical fibers (refractive Index profile, mode) fiber optic communication system
(block diagram only)
Laser gas sensors .
9 Hours
Unit IV
Modern Physics
Quantum Physics: Development of quantum theory – de Broglie wavelength – Schrödinger‘s wave equation – time
dependent – time independent wave equations – physical significance – applications – particle in a box (1d). X-rays:
Scattering of X-rays – Compton Effect – theory and experimental verification.
Degenerate and non degenerate.
9 Hours
Unit V
New Engineering Materials
Metallic glasses: Manufacturing – properties – uses. Shape Memory Alloys: Working principle – shape memory
effect – applications. Nanomaterials: Preparation method – sol gel technique – mechanical – magnetic
characteristics – uses. Ceramics: Manufacturing methods – slip casting – isostatic pressing – thermal and electrical
properties - uses.
Carbon nano tubes and applications.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011.

2. P. K. Palanisami, Physics for Engineers, Vol. 1, Scitech Pub. (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2002.
References
1. M. N. Avadhanulu and P. G. Kshirsagar, A Textbook of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2005
2. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publication, New Delhi, 2006.
3. V. Rajendran and A. Marikani, Physics I, TMH, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Arthur Beiser, Concepts of Modern Physics, TMH, 2008.
5. R. K. Gaur and S. L. Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Rai Publishers, New Delhi, 2006
11O103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

3 0 0 3.0
 Imparting knowledge on the principles of water characterization, treatment methods and industrial
applications.
 Understanding the principles and application of electrochemistry and corrosion science.
 Basic information and application of polymer chemistry, nanotechnology and analytical techniques.
1. Understand the chemistry of water and its industrial & domestic application
2. Utilization of electrochemistry principle in corrosion control and industrial application
3. Understanding the various types of polymers and its industrial application
4. Applications of nanotechnology and analytical techniques in day to day life
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

S. No. Test I† Test II†
Examination† Examination
1 Remember 20 20 10 10
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Distinguish between alkaline and non alkaline hardness.

2. What is meant by priming? How it is prevented?
3. What is meant by caustic embrittlement?
4. What is the role of calgon conditioning in water treatment?
5. What is break point chlorination?
6. Write the significances of EMF series.
7. Define single electrode potential of an electrode.
8. Differentiate between electrochemical and electrolytic cells.
9. What are the advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell?
10. What are reference electrodes?
11. Mention the various factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
12. State Pilling-Bedworth rule.
13. What are the constituents of water repellant paints?
†
14. What is pitting corrosion?

15. Write any four applications of galvanic series.
16. Differentiate between nanocluster and nanocrystal.
17. List the monomers of nylon -6 and nylon-11.
18. Define functionality of a monomer.
19. What are the monomers of epoxy resin?
20. Differentiate between addition and condensation polymers.
21. What are auxochromes? Give examples.
22. Give any two applications of IR spectroscopy.
23. State Beer-Lambert‘s law.
24. Write any two applications of flame photometry.
25. What are the limitations of Beer-Lambert‘s law?
UNDERSTAND
1. Soft water is not demineralized water whereas demineralized water is soft water- Justify.
2. Why sodium carbonate conditioning is not advisable for high pressure boilers?
3. Boiling cannot give protection to water for all time – Reason out.
4. What are the significances of RO method of water treatment?
5. Compare reversible and irreversible cells?
6. Reason out why do the properties of materials change at nanoscale?
7. Why calomel electrode is called as secondary reference electrode?
8. A steel screw in a brass marine hardware corrodes. Why?
9. What is the action of brine solution on iron rod?
10. Why magnesium element is coupled with underground pipe line?
11. Which is the easier way to control corrosion?
12. Lithium battery is the cell of future- Justify.
13. Iron corrodes at a faster rate than aluminium- Give reason.
14. Differentiate between electro and elctroless platting.
15. How thermoplastics differ from thermosetting plastics?
16. TEFLON is superior to other addition polymers-Justify.
17. Write any two advantages of free radical polymerization.
18. Calculate the degree of freedom of water molecule.
19. Differentiate between AAS and flame photometry.
20. What is the role of thiocyanide solution in the estimation of iron by colorimetry?
APPLY
1. A water sample contains 204 mgs of CaSO4 and 73 mgs of Mg (HCO3)2 per litre. Calculate the total
hardness in terms of CaCO3 equivalence.
2. 100 ml of sample water has hardness equivalent to 12.5ml of 0.08N MgSO 4. Calculate hardness in ppm.
3. What is the single electrode potential of a half cell of zinc electrode dipped in a 0.01M ZnSO4 solution at
250C? E0Zn/Zn2+ = 0.763 V, R=8.314 JK-1Mol-1, F= 96500 Coulombs.
4. Calculate the reduction potential of Cu2+/Cu=0.5M at 250C. E0Cu2+/ Cu= +0.337V.
5. Mention the type of corrosion that takes place when a metal area is covered with water.
6. Bolt and nut made of the same metal is preferred in practice. Why?
7. Caustic embrittlement is stress corrosion- Justify.
8. Metals which are nearer in electrochemical series is preferred in practice. Why?
9. What are the disadvantages of NICAD battery?
10. What are the requirements of a good paint?
11. What information can you get from DP?
12. What is degree of polymerization? Calculate the degree of polymerization of polypropylene having
molecular weight of 25200.
13. How the functionality of monomer influences the structure of polymer?
14. Mention the commercial applications of epoxy resins.
15. On what basis polyamide is named as NYLON?
16. Why UV spectroscopy is called as electronic spectra?
17. IR spectrum is called as vibrational spectrum- Justify.
18. How absorption spectrum is differing from emission spectrum?
ANALYZE/EVALUATE
1. Distinguish between hardness and alkalinity.

2. Distinguish between battery and cell.
3. Corrosion phenomenon is known as thousand dollar thief - reason out.
4. What is the basic difference between polymers and oligomers?
5. How do you identify an organic molecule using IR spectrum?
Unit I
Chemistry of Water and its Industrial Applications
Hardness of water: Equivalents of calcium carbonate - Units of hardness - Degree of hardness and its estimation
(EDTA method) - Numerical problems on degree of hardness - pH value of water. Use of water for industrial
purposes: Boiler feed water-scale-sludge - caustic embrittlement. Softening of hard water: External conditioning –
zeolite - ion exchange methods - internal conditioning – calgon - phosphate methods. Desalination: Reverse osmosis
- electrodialysis. Use of water for domestic purposes: Domestic water treatment - Disinfection of water - break point
chlorination.
Characterization of your campus water
9 Hours
Unit II
Electrochemistry for Materials Processing
Introduction – emf - Single electrode potential - Hydrogen electrode - Calomel electrode - Glass electrode - pH
measurement using glass electrode - Electrochemical series. Cells: Electrochemical cells – Cell reactions- Daniel
cell – Reversible cells and irreversible cells - Difference between electrolytic cells and electrochemical cells.
Concept of electroplating: Electroplating of gold - electroless plating (Nickel). Batteries: Secondary batteries - lead
acid, nickel - cadmium and lithium batteries. Fuel cell: Hydrogen - oxygen fuel cell.
Electricity assisted painting.
9 Hours
Unit III
Chemistry of Corrosion and its Control
Corrosion: Mechanism of corrosion- – Chemical and electrochemical - Pilling-Bedworth rule - Oxygen absorption –
Hydrogen evolution - Galvanic series. Types of corrosion: Galvanic corrosion - Differential aeration corrosion -
Examples - Factors influencing corrosion. Methods of corrosion control: Sacrificial anodic protection - Impressed
current method. Protective coatings: Paints - Constituents and Functions. Special paints: Fire retardant - Water
repellant paints.
Applications of vapour phase inhibitors.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Introduction to Polymer and Nanotechnology
Polymers: Monomer - functionality - Degree of polymerization - Classification based on source - applications.
Types of polymerization: Addition, condensation and copolymerization. Mechanism of free radical polymerization.
Thermoplastic and thermosetting plastics - Preparation, properties and applications: Epoxy resins, TEFLON, nylon
and bakelite. Compounding of plastics. Moulding methods: Injection and extrusion. Nanomaterials: Introduction –
Nanoelectrodes - Carbon nanotubes - Nanopolymers - Application.
A detailed survey on application of polymer in day to day life.
9 Hours
Unit V
Instrumental Techniques of Chemical Analysis
Beer – Lambert‘s law - Problems. UV visible and IR spectroscopy: Principle- Instrumentation (block diagram only)
- Applications. Colorimetry: Principle – Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of iron by colorimetry.
Flame photometry: Principle - Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of sodium by flame photometry.
Atomic absorption spectroscopy: Principle - Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of nickel by atomic
absorption spectroscopy.
Applications of analytical instruments in medical field.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. P. C. Jain and M. Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications., New Delhi, 2009.
2. R. Sivakumar and N. Sivakumar, Engineering Chemistry, TMH, New Delhi, 2009.
3. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma and Madan S. Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Shoban Lal Nagin
Chand & Co., 2005.
References
1. Sashi Chawla, Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi, 2003.
2. B. S. Bahl, G. D. Tuli and Arun Bahl, Essentials of Physical Chemistry, S. Chand & Company, 2008.
3. J. C. Kuriacose and J. Rajaram, Chemistry in Engineering & Technology, Vol. 1&2, TMH, 2009.
4. C. P. Poole Jr., J. F. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley India Private Limited, 2007.
5. Andre Arsenault and Geoffrey A. Ozin, Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials, Royal
Society of Chemistry, London, 2005.
6. D. A. Skoog, D. M. West, F. James Holler &S. R. Crouch, Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry, Wiley,
2004.
LANGUAGE ELECTIVE I
3 0 0 3.0
11C105 BASICS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3.0
 To impart basic knowledge in the field of Mechanical Engineering focusing on generation of power from
various natural resources and to know about various types of Boilers and Turbines used for power
generation
 To impart basic knowledge in the field of Mechanical Engineering focusing IC Engines and Refrigeration.
 To gain knowledge in various types of Manufacturing Process and Engineering Materials
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

(d) an ability to function on multidisciplinary teams
1. Ability to understand the fundamental philosophy of Mechanical Engineering and enable them to work
together in a multidisciplinary technical team.
2. Ability to identify the nature of materials and manufacturing process.
3. Ability to demonstrate the working principle of boilers and turbines for power generation
4. Ability to demonstrate the physical processes like welding, lathe operations and drilling
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the sources of Energy Generation?

2. What are the accessories used in a boiler?
3. Define Turbine.
4. Compare and contrast fire tube and water tube boiler?
5. List the types of steam Turbines
6. Classify the I.C engine.
7. List out the Part of the I.C. Engine.
8. Define the terms: Top Dead Center, Bottom Dead Center.
9. Define the term: Compression Ratio.
10. What are the different sources of energy?
11. Name four non-renewable sources of energy.
12. Name some renewable sources of energy.
13. Name four solid/liquid/gaseous/ fuels.
†
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to a maximum of 20and that in Model Examination will be
internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks
14. Name two nuclear fuels.

15. What are the advantages of wind energy?
16. State some of the applications of steam boilers.
17. Classify different steam boilers.
18. What do you understand by Scavenging?
19. What do you understand by the term IC engine?
20. What are the operations performed on a Lathe?
21. What is impulse turbine? Give example.
22. What is Reaction turbine? Give example.
23. Define Boiler.
24. Classify Boilers.
25. List out the Boiler Mountings and Accessories.
26. Define Refrigeration.
27. Define refrigerant. Give some examples of refrigerant.
28. Define C.O.P.
29. Define ‗Green Sand Mould‘.
30. What are the applications of high carbon steel?
31. What is casting process?
32. List the defects in castings.
33. What is soldering?
34. What is Brazing?
35. What is forging process?
36. What is annealing process?
37. What is the use of cast iron?
38. What is the use of high speed steel?
39. What is composite material?
40. What is smart material?
UNDERSTAND
1. How Solar Energy is generated?

2. How Energy is Generated using steam Turbines?
3. How power plants are classified?
4. Compare and contrast reaction and impulse turbines.
5. How energy is generated from Diesel Power Plants?
6. What is the difference between renewable and non-renewable sources of energy?
7. Mention the applications of solar energy.
8. What is the function of a hydraulic turbine?
9. What is the function of a surge tank?
10. What is the function of a moderator?
11. What are the functions of a control rod?
12. Name of the important components of diesel power plant.
13. Compare Boring and Counter boring operations with sketch.
14. Name the important parts of gas turbine.
15. State the function of condenser in steam power plant.
16. What are the requirements of a good boiler?
17. What are the specific advantages of water-tube boilers?
18. What are the aims of pre-heating of air in a boiler?
19. State the function of economiser.
20. How does a fusible plug function as a safety device?
21. What is the function of a steam nozzle?
22. What is the function of flywheel?
23. What is the function of a spark plug?
24. What is the function of a fuel injector in diesel engine?
25. Why is cooling necessary in an IC engine?
26. Define compression ratio of an IC engine.
27. List the ports used in a 2-stroke engine
28. What are the requirements of a good boiler?
29. What is the difference between impulse and reaction turbine?

30. How energy is generated from Nuclear Power Plants?
31. How energy is generated from Hydro Power Plants?
32. Compare and contrast 4 stroke and 2 stroke engine.
33. What is the Purpose of a fusible Plug?
34. Differentiate petrol & diesel engines.
35. How Taper Turning is carried out in Lathes?
36. What are the various Mechanical properties of Cast Iron?
37. What are the various Mechanical properties of high carbon steel and high speed steel?
38. Differentiate between arc and gas welding.
39. What is the difference between rolling and drawing process?
40. Differentiate between tempering and hardening.
APPLY/EVALUATE
1. Apply the concept of power generation and saving from other energy sources.
2. Apply the concept of Refrigeration in Heat removal and Heat addition
3. Draw the pressure-velocity diagram for a single stage impulse turbine.
4. Draw a neat sketch of Vapour absorption system.
5. Explain the annealing process.
6. How does the Fuel system in a petrol engine works? \
7. How does the 2- stroke engine works?
8. How does the 4- stroke engine works?
9. How the nuclear power plant works. How Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR) plant is different from Boiling
Water Reactor plant (BWR).
10. Explain the Forward and Backward extrusion process.
ANALYZE
1. Construct a neat diagram of reaction turbine and describe the working principle. And also compare it with
impulse turbine.
2. Explain the working of 4 stroke petrol engine with neat sketch and explain how it differs from 2 stroke of
petrol engine.
3. What is smart material? How it reacts with change in temperature?
4. Explain how the material property changed after the annealing process
CREATE
1. Develop a model showing various parts involved in energy generation using different power plants.
2. Create charts showing various strokes involved in working of 4-stroke and 2-stroke, petrol and diesel
engines.
3. How the metal forming process is selected for manufacturing products?
4. Explain how the joining process is selected for different metals.
5. How the material properties changed after hardening process?
6. How the material properties changed after Normalizing process?
Unit I
Steam Boilers and Turbines
Types of Boilers - Boiler mountings and accessories - Cochran - Bobcock and Wilcox - Benson and Lamont boilers,
differences between fire tube and water tube boiler. Steam Turbines: Main parts of a steam turbine, types of
turbines, working of a single stage impulse turbine, (De-Laval turbine), working of Parsons Reaction turbine,
difference between impulse and reaction turbine.
- Biomass and Biofuels in power generation 9 Hours
Unit II
Power Plants
Classification of Power Plants - Steam, Nuclear, Diesel, Hydro, and Gas Turbine Power Plants. Alternate Sources of
Energy: Solar Energy, Wind Mills, Tidal Power, Geothermal Power, Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC). -
Maintenance of power plants 9 Hours
Unit III
IC Engines and Refrigeration
Classification of IC engines, Main components of IC engines, working of a 4 stroke & 2 stroke petrol & diesel
engine, differences between 4 stroke and 2 stroke engine & petrol and diesel Engines- Fuel system in a petrol
engine, Exhaust Gas emission - Green house effect.
Refrigeration: Working Principle of vapour compression & vapour absorption system, domestic refrigerator. -
Hybrid vehicle
9 Hours
Unit IV
Manufacturing Processes
Introduction to Manufacturing processes - Casting Process - Pattern, Mould, Moulding Sand - Types & Properties –
Melting of cast iron - Cupola Furnace - Fettling - Casting Defects. Metal Joining: Welding - Arc & Gas Welding,
Soldering & Brazing. Metal Forming: Extrusion, Forging, Rolling, & Drawing Processes. Lathe and Drilling -
Construction and working. -Milling Operation
9 Hours
Unit V
Engineering Materials and Heat Treatment
Mechanical properties of Materials - Engineering Materials: Classification, Composition, and uses of cast iron, mild
steel, high carbon steel and high speed steel. Introduction to Composite and smart materials
Heat Treatment – Annealing, Normalizing, Tempering and Hardening (elementary treatment only). – Hybrid
materials
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. S. R. J. Shantha Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Hi-tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai, 2000
References
1. B. K. Sarkar, Thermal Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi, 2008
2. N. Rao, Manufacturing Technology: Foundry, Forming and Welding, Tata McGraw Hill Company, New
Delhi, 2003
3. K. Venugopal and V. Prahu Raja, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Anuradha Publishers, 2000
4. G. Shanmugam and S. Ravindran, Basic Mechanical Engineering, TMH, New Delhi, 2010
5. Basant Agrawal and C. M. Agrawal, Basics of Mechanical Engineering, Wiley, 2008
6. http://www.tutorvista.co.in/content/science/science-ii/sources-energy/sources-energyindex.php
7. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-ROORKEE/MANUFACTURING-PROCESSES/
index.htm
11C106 / 11F106 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

(Common to CE & FT)
2 0 2 3.0
 To impart basic knowledge on computer programming using ‗C‘ programming

 To provide an overview of some of the fundamental concepts of Object Oriented Programming using C++

1. Apply the concept of computer programming to solve problems related to Civil Engineering
2. An ability to participate and succeed in competitive examinations
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

Sl. No. Test I† Test II†
1 Remember 30 30 30 30
Apply / Analyze /
3 40 40 40 40
Evaluate
4 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is a Computer?
2. List out the five programming languages commonly used.
3. Define Algorithm and Flowchart
4. What is structured programming?
5. What is the general structure of a C program?
6. List out the rules for defining a variable.
7. What are the I/O functions in C?
8. What is a header file?
9. State the associativity property of an operator.
10. Define a ternary operator
UNDERSTAND
1. Compare while loop with do – while Loop.

2. What are the advantages of using Macro?
3. Explain how recursive functions affect the run time efficiency.
4. Differentiate between Structure and Union in C.
5. How is memory managed in C?
6. How does garbage collection done in C?
†
APPLY
1. Write a recursive function to calculate the factorial of number.

2. Write a C program to check whether the given number is palindrome or not.
3. Write a program to check whether the given number is prime or not.
4. Write a C program to find the roots of quadratic equation ax2+bx+c=0.
5. Write a C program to find average of ‘n’ numbers.
6. Write a program to generate the pay slip of an employee using Structure.
7. Write a C program to search for a specified element in an array.
8. Write a program to compute Matrix Multiplication.
9. Write a program to perform swapping of two numbers using pointers.
10. Write a program to read the content of the file and copy it to another file
11. Create a structure to store the following details: Rollno, Name, Mark1, Mark2, Mark3, Total, Average,
Result and Class. Write a program to read Rollno, name and 3 subject marks. Find out the total, result and
class as follows:
a) Total is the addition of 3 subject marks.
b) Result is "Pass" if all subject marks are greater than or equal to 50 else "Fail".
c) Class will be awarded for students who have cleared 3 subjects
i. Class "Distinction" if average >=75
ii. Class "First" if average lies between 60 to 74 (both inclusive)
iii. Class "Second" if average lies between 50 & 59 (both inclusive)
d) Repeat the above program to manipulate 10 students' details and sort the structures as per rank obtained
by them
ANALYZE / EVALUATE
1. Explain the difference between while and do-while statements

2. Why are pointers so powerful? Analyze their efficiency giving an example?
3. Is there any advantage of using recursion over looping control structures? Give a suitable example.
4. Illustrate the Limitation of array of pointers to strings using a sample example.
5. Differentiate the keywords ‗break‘ and ‗continue‘.
6. Justify the need for Type Casting over Type Conversion.
7. Compare and contrast I/O mapped I/O with Memory mapped I/O.
8. Summarize the various built-in String functions
Unit I
Introduction to ‘C’ Programming
Components of computer – Difference between system and application software – Operating system – Role of
operating system in a computer – Types of programming: structured and object oriented – various programming
languages - Overview of compilers and interpreters - ANSI C standard – structure of ‗C‘ program –
Programming rules – Character set – Keywords – Identifiers – Constants – Variables – Rules for naming
variables – Data types – variable declaration – Initializing variables – Type conversion – Constant and volatile
variables
6 Hours
Unit II
Operators, Expressions and Statements
Operators and Expressions : Arithmetic operators – Relational operators – Logical operators – Bitwise operators
– Conditional operators – Comma operator - Priority of operators - Input and output in ‗C‘: Formatted and
Unformatted functions - Expression statements - Selection statements – Looping statements – Jump statements
6 Hours
Unit III
Arrays, Strings and Pointers
Arrays: Definition – Declaration – Initialization - Single Dimension – Two Dimensional – Multi-dimensional –
Strings: Overview of strings – Concept of a string literal – String functions: sprintf – strcpy – sscanf – strcat –
strlen – strcmp - Pointers: Concept – address operator – indirection operator – malloc – sizeof - Arrays of
pointers – pointers and strings 6 Hours
Unit IV
Functions and File Management
Functions: Definition – Built-in and user defined functions - Declaration – Function Call – Recursion – File
Management: Disks and files – File operations – File functions – Overview of Structures and Unions
6 Hours
Unit V
Introduction to Matlab Programming
Data types – Basic program components: Variables, Keywords, Operators, Special values, Expressions and
Regular expressions – Program control statements – Graphics – 2D and 3D – Matlab functions – M-file
functions – Built-in functions - Programming
6 Hours
List of Experiments
1. Simple Programs
(a) Sum of set of numbers (b) Fibonacci Series (c) Generation of prime numbers
2. Matrix: addition, multiplication and inverse
3. Sorting of names and numbers
4. String manipulation and Array of structures
5. Pointers to functions and pointers
6. File manipulations
(a) Read the file and display the contents of the file (b) Read the inputs from the user and write them to a file
Textbooks
1. Herbert Schidt, C- The Complete Reference, McGraw Hill, 2002

2. Herbert Schidt, C++- The Complete Reference, McGraw Hill, 2003
References
1. Yashavant Kanetkar, Let us C, BPB Publications, 2007

2. Byron S. Gottfried, Schaum's Outline of Programming with C, McGraw Hill, 1996
11C107 BUILDING MATERIALS

3 0 0 3.0
 To equip the students to have a clear understanding of building materials and their properties
 To introduce students to new topics such as Expansion joints and water proof materials
1. Understand the properties of Ferrous & Non-Ferrous Metals

2. Proportioning of materials for making concrete
3. Importance of joints in a structure.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 30 30
Apply / Analyze /
3 40 40 40 40
Evaluate
4 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1 List the objective of seasoning of timber.

2 Write the properties of an anti-corrosive paint?
3 What do you mean by creep?
4 Define: Alloy steel.
5 What are the various use of stones as a building material?
6 Recall the process of manufacturing of cement by wet process with neat flow diagram.
7 Define pigment volume concentration.
8 List the various process involved in fabrication of plastic articles.
9 Write the Characteristics of an Ideal Paint.
10 Classify the pig iron with its properties.
11 Classify the glass based on their constituents.
12 Define Puzolanas.
13 Name the different allotropic structures of iron.
14 List any five admixtures used in concrete
UNDERSTAND
1. What do you mean by dressing of Stones?

2. Why vulcanization process is essential for rubbers?
3. What is the use of base in an oil paint?
4. Plot a graph showing the stress-strain relationship for various types of plastics.
†
5. List the objective of seasoning of timber.

6. What are the tests to be carried out to determine the properties of bricks and briefly Explain any five of
them.
7. What do you mean by refractories? Classify the refractories and also give their properties.
8. What do you mean by compounding of rubber?
9. How will you fabricate the commercial articles from plastics?
APPLY / ANALYZE / EVALUATE
1. Evaluate the chief characteristics of clay as material for manufacture of bricks

2. Sketch and state the uses of hollow brick
3. Illustrate the polymorphism in ceramic materials
4. Discuss the characteristics of good aggregate
5. Illustrate seasoning of timber
6. Briefly describe the soundness tests of cement
7. Differentiate lime and cement
8. Differentiate between overburnt and under burnt bricks
9. Briefly describe the durability and crushing tests of stones
10. Give the classification of ceramic materials
11. Give the salient features of gypsum in cement
Unit I
Bricks, Stones and Wood
Structural Clay Products: Bricks – Classification of Bricks – Characteristics of Good Bricks – Ingredients of Good
Earth Bricks – Clay Tiles – Fire Clay Bricks Or Refractory Bricks – Terracotta. Rocks and Stones: Classification of
Rocks – Dressing of Stones – Uses of Stones – Characteristics of Good Building Stones. Wood and Wood Products:
Classification Of timbers – Structures of Timber – Characteristics of Good Timber – Seasoning Of timber – Defects
in Timber – Suitability of timber for specific uses – Wood Products
Applications of Wood and Wood Products
9 Hours
Unit II
Cement, Fine and Coarse Aggregates, Lime
Materials for making Concrete: Cement: Portland cement – Chemical Composition of raw materials – Composition
of Cement clinker – Hydration – Rate of Hydration – Water requirement for Hydration – Manufacture – Testing –
Types – Storage – Admixtures. Aggregates: Classification – Characteristics – Alkali Aggregate reaction. Water:
Quality of mixing Water – Water for washing Aggregates – Curing Water. Lime: Introduction – Impurities in Lime
stones –Classification – Lime Vs Cement. Pozzolans: Introduction –Classification – The activity of Pozzolans –Fly
ash – Calcined Clay Puzzolan
Effects of Natural Pozzolans
9 Hours
Unit III
Expansion joints and water proof materials
Introduction – Type of joints – Expansion joints – Isolation joints – Contraction joints – Construction joints –
Materials used for joints – Location of joints - Water proof materials: Introduction – Waterproofing of cement works
- Waterproofing materials and system – Waterproofing flat roof slabs – Sloped roof – Roof and parapet wall
junction – Wet area – Treatment of sunken floors in wet areas for leakage – Care in sanitary fitting.
Sliding joints
9 Hours
Unit IV
Other Materials
Ferrous Metals: Introduction – Structures of Ferrous Metal – Iron – Pig iron – Cast Iron – Wrought Iron – Alloy
Steel. Non Ferrous Metals: Introduction – Aluminum- Copper – Zinc – Lead - Tin – Nickel. Properties of Tar steel,
Stainless steel, Structural steel, Testing - Ceramic Materials: Introduction – Classification of Ceramics –
Refractories – Glass – Glass Wool – Polymorphism in Ceramic Materials – Mechanical Properties of Ceramic
Phases – Thermal Properties of Ceramic Phases – Electrical Properties of Ceramic Phases. Polymeric Materials:
Introduction - Rubbers – Plastics – Constituents of Plastics – Fabrication of Commercial Articles – Application of
Plastics - Properties of Plastics
Effect of Temperature on Mechanical Properties 9 Hours
Unit V
Paints and Enamels
Paints, Enamels and Varnishes: Introduction – Composition of Oil paints – Characteristics of an Ideal Paint –
Preparation of Paints – Covering power of paints – Pigment Volume Concentration – Painting Plastered Surfaces -
Painting Wood Surfaces - Painting Metal Surfaces – Defects – Enamels – Distempers – Water Wash and Colour
Wash – Varnish – French Polish – Wax Polish – Miscellaneous Paints. Tar, Bitumen and Asphalt: Introduction –
Bitumen – Tar – Asphalt – Application of Bituminous Materials. Thermo Cole – Heat Insulating Materials
Sound Insulating Materials
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. P. C. Varghese, Building Materials, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2010
References
1. S. K. Duggal, Building Materials, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2003

2. S. P. Arora and S. P. Bindra, Textbook of Building Construction, Dhanpat Rai Publications (P) Ltd., 2003
11O208 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS

(Common to ME, CSE, EE, BT, IT, TT & FT – [I Semester], CE, AE, ECE & EIE – [II Semester])
2 0 2 3.0
 Understand and appreciate the importance of Engineering Graphics in Engineering

 Understand the basic principles of Technical/Engineering Drawing
 Understand the different steps in producing drawings according to BIS conventions
1. Projection of various components according to BIS specifications.

2. Assembly of datas and information of various components in visualized way
3. Interpretation of technical graphics assemblies
4. 2D modeling by AutoCAD
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Internal Assessment Semester End Examination

Preparation 10 15
Observation and Results 15 25
Record 10 -
Mini-project/
Model examination/ 15 10
Viva-voce
Total 50 50
REMEMBER
1. Define Graphic communication or Drawing.

2. List the different drawing instruments.
3. What is blueprint?
4. What are the applications of engineering graphics?
5. What are the two types of drawings?
6. What are the different types of projections?
7. Define Orthographic projection.
8. What do you mean by I angle projection?
9. What is III angle projection?
10. Define Plan.
11. What is Elevation?
12. List the various types of lines.
13. What do you mean by a Plane?
14. Name the five standard sizes of drawing sheets that are specified by BIS.
15. Give the BIS codes for Lettering, Dimensioning and lines.
16. State few important dimensioning rules.
17. What are the two types of Solids?
18. What is Representative Fraction (RF)?
19. What is a Frustum?
20. Define Truncation.
21. Define Section Plane and give its types.
22. What do you mean by development of surfaces?
23. State the principle of Isometric projection.

24. What is Isometric View?
25. Define Isometric scale.
UNDERSTAND
1. When an object is said to be in III quadrant?

2. Why are the projectors perpendicular to the Projection Plane in the Orthographic projection?
3. What is the Shape of the section obtained when a cone is cut by a plane passing through the apex and center
of the base of the cone?
4. Why II and IV angle projections are not used in industries?
5. What are the differences between I angle and III angle projections?
6. Which method is suitable for developing a truncated prism?
7. Why is a hexagonal headed bolt and nut more common in use as compared to square headed bolt and nut?
8. Which is the most suitable method for drawing the Perspective Projection?
9. What are the prerequisites for Free hand sketching?
10. What are the two methods used to obtain the Isometric view of a circle?
11. Why CAD is preferred over Conventional drafting?
APPLY/EVALUATE
1. How will you project a point which is above HP and in front of VP?
2. How will you project a point which is below HP and behind VP?
3. What is the method used to determine the True length and inclination of a line inclined to both the planes?
4. How will you project a prism whose axis is inclined to HP and parallel to VP by Change of Position
method?
5. How will you project a cylinder when the axis is inclined to VP and parallel to HP by change of position
method?
6. How will you project a pyramid whose axis is inclined to HP and parallel to VP by Change of Position
method?
7. How will you project a cone when the axis is inclined to VP and parallel to HP by change of position
method?
8. How will you obtain the Sectional view of solids in simple vertical position cut by planes inclined to any
one reference plane?
9. How will you develop the lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids?
10. How will you develop the complete surfaces of Frustums?
11. A cricket ball thrown from the ground level reaches the wicket keeper‘s gloves. Maximum height reached
by the ball is 5m. The ball travels a horizontal distance of 11m from the point of projection. Trace the path
of the ball.
12. The Pictorial view of an object is shown below. Draw the following views to full size scale.
a) Elevation in the direction of arrow
b) Left end elevation
c) Plan
13. Read the dimensioned drawing shown below. Redraw the figure to full size and dimension it as per Indian
Standards.
Q. No. 12 Q.No. 13
Unit I
Concepts and Conventions
Use of drafting instruments – BIS conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets –
Lettering and dimensioning. General principles of orthographic projection – First angle projection – Layout of views
– Projection of points, located in all quadrant and straight lines located in the first quadrant – Determination of true
lengths and true inclinations.
6 Hours
Unit II
Projection of Solids
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one reference plane
by change of position method.
6 Hours
Unit III
Section of Solids and Development of Surfaces
Sectioning of solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to
one Reference: plane – Obtaining the true shape of section. Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids –
prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones.
6 Hours
Unit IV
Isometric Projection and Perspective Projection
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale – isometric projections of simple solids, pyramids, cylinders and
cones. Orthographic projection - Systems of orthographic projection - First angle orthographic projection -
Conversion of pictorial to orthographic views (Free hand).
6 Hours
Unit V
Introduction to AutoCAD and 2D Modeling
Starting AutoCAD – Interfaces – Menus – Tool bars – Coordinates – Limits – Units – 2D commands – Drawing
Commands - Creating a Point, Construction of Lines, Polyline, Multiline, Circles, Arcs, Rectangle, Polygon,
Ellipse, Hatch, Text, Mtext, Linetypes – Edit and Modify commands - Copy, Move, Erase, Mirror, Zoom, Pan,
Arrays, Trim, Break, Fillet, Chamfer, Redraw, Regen, Dimensioning, Colors, Layers – Exercises
6 Hours
Total: 30 Hours
Textbook
1. K. V. Natarajan, A Textbook: of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2006
References
1. S. Julyes Jaisingh, Engineering Graphics, Tri Sea Publishers, 2010

2. V. Rameshbabu, Engineering Graphics, VRB Publishers Pvt Ltd., 2009
3. K. Venugopal, Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002
4. N. D. Bhatt, Engineering Drawing, Charotar publishing House 2003
5. K. L. Narayana and P. Kannaiah, Engineering Graphics, Scitech Publications (Pvt) Limited-2002
List of Experiments
1. Projection of points located in all quadrants.

2. Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both the planes.
3. Determination of true lengths and true inclinations of Straight lines.
4. Projection of Solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one reference
plane by change of position method.
5. Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one reference plane and
obtaining true shape of section.
6. Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids like prisms, pyramids cylinder and cone.
7. Isometric Projections / Views of Solids like prisms, pyramids and Cylinders.
8. Orthographic Projection of various components from pictorial views.
9. Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using AutoCAD.
10. Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid and cylinder using AutoCAD.
Practical Schedule
Sl. No Experiment Hours

1 Projection of points located in all quadrants 3
2 Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both the
3
planes.
3 Determination of true lengths and true inclinations of Straight lines 3
4 Projection of Solids when the axis is inclined to one reference plane by
3
change of position method.
5 Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to
3
one reference plane and obtaining true shape of section
6 Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids. 3
7 Isometric Projections / Views of Solids like prisms, pyramids and Cylinders. 3
8 Orthographic Projection of various components from pictorial views. 3
9 Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using
3
AutoCAD.
10 Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid and cylinder using AutoCAD. 3
11O109 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

0 0 2 1.0
 Imparting knowledge on basic concepts and its applications of chemical analysis

 Training in chemical and instrumental methods
 Develop skills in estimation of a given sample by chemical and instrumental methods
1. Estimate the strength of solution by chemical and instrumental methods

2. Analyze the water quality parameters of given water samples
3. Measurement of corrosion rate of a given sample
4. Knowledge of various components used in analytical instruments
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Internal Assessment
Preparation 10
Observation & Results 15
Record 10
Model Examination & Viva Voce 15
Total 50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Preparation of molar and normal solutions of the following substances – oxalic acid, sodium carbonate, sodium
hydroxide, hydrochloric acid.
2. Determination of alkalinity in a water sample.
3. Determination of molecular weight of a polymer by viscometry method.
4. Determination of total, temporary and permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
5. Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.
6. Determination of strength of iron by potentiometric method using potassium dichromate.
7. Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophotometric method.
8. Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid by sodium hydroxide using pH meter.
9. Determination of sodium and potassium ions in water sample by flame photometric method.
10. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss measurements.
11. Comparison of alkalinities of the given water samples.
12. Comparison of total dissolved solids (TDS) and hardness of water in Bhavani river and Bannari
Amman Institute of Technology campus.
Total: 30 Hours
11O201 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II

3 1 0 3.5
• Acquire knowledge to use multiple integrals to find area and volume of surface and solids respectively.
• Have a good grasp of analytic functions, complex integration and their interesting properties and its
applications.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Bloom’s Taxonomy Model Semester End

S. No Test I2 Test II1
(New Version) Examination1 Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Jacobian in two dimensions.

2. State Green‘s theorem.
3. Define directional derivative of a vector point function.
4. Define analytic function.
5. What is the formula for finding the residue of a double pole?
6. State Cauchy‘s integral formula.
7. Write the necessary condition for a function f (z) to be analytic.
8. Write the formula for unit normal vector?
9. Write all types of singularities.
10. State the sufficient conditions for a function of two variables to have an extremum at a point.
UNDERSTAND
(u, v)
1. If u  2 xy, v  x 2  y 2 , x  r cos  , y  r sin  compute .
( x, y)
†
yx zx u u u
2. If u f( , ) showthat x 2  y2  z2 0.
xy xz x y z
 y
3. Transform the integral   f ( x, y)dxdy to polar coordinates.
0 0
2 x
4. Change the order of integration in   f x, y dydx .

0 0
5. Find a, such that (3x-2y+z)i+(4x+ay-z)j+(x-y+2z)k is solenoidal.
What is the greatest rate of increase of   xyz at (1,0,3)?
2
6.
7. Test the analyticity of the function w = sin z.
dw
8. Find given w = tan z.
dz
dz
9. Evaluate  where c is the circle z  1
c ( z  3) 2
4
10. Find the residue of the function f ( z )  3 at its simple pole.
z ( z  2)
APPLY
u  x 4  y 4  2 x 2  4 xy  2 y 2 for extreme values.
1. Examine the function
x y xy
2. Check if u  ,v are functionally dependent. If so find the relationship between them.
x y x  y 2
   x 
 y 2  z 2 dxdydz taken over the
2
3. By transforming into cylindrical polar coordinates evaluate
region of space defined by x

2
 y 2  1 and 0  x  1 .
    
 F  nˆds where F  4 xz i  y j  yz k
2
4. Using Gauss divergence theorem evaluate and S is the
s
surface of the cube bounded by x=0,y=0,z=0,x=1,y=1,z=1.
5. When the function f(z) = u + iv is analytic, show that U = constant and V = constant are orthogonal.
1
6. Determine the image of 1 < x < 2 under the mapping w  .
z
7. Find the area of the cardiod r = 4 ( 1+ cos ) using double integral.
 (3x  8 y 2 )dx  (4 y  6 xy )dy , where C is the

2
8. Apply Green‘s theorem in the plane to evaluate
c
boundary of the region defined by x=0, y=0 and x + y =1.
9. If u  log( x 2  y 2 ) , find v and f (z) such that f (z) =u+iv is analytic.
e z dz
10. Using Cauchy‘s integral formula evaluate 
C ( z  2 ) ( z  1) 2
where C is the Circle z  3 .
ANALYZE / EVALUATE
u v w
x ,y ,z 
1. Prove that vw wu u v are functionally dependent.
2. If g ( x, y)  (u, v) where u  x 2  y 2 , v  2 xy prove that

2g 2g 2    2 
2
  4( x 2
 y ) 
 u 2 v 2  .
x 2 y 2  
3. Evaluate the integration    xyzdxdydz taken throughout the volume for which x, y, z  0 and
x2  y 2  z 2  9 .
4. Evaluate the following integral by changing to spherical coordinates
1 1 x 2 1 x 2  y 2
dxdydz
 
0 0

0 1  x2  y 2  z 2
   
5. Verify Gauss divergence theorem for F  x i  y 2 j  z 2 k where S is the surface of the cuboid formed
2
by the planes x=0, x=a, y=0, y=b, z=0 and z=c.
6. Determine the bilinear transformation that maps the points -1, 0, 1 in the z-plane onto the points
0, i, 3i in the w-plane.
2
cos 2
7. Evaluate  5  4 cos  d .
0

x2
8. Using contour integration, evaluate 
0

x2  9 x2  4
dx

z
9. Expand f ( z)  as Laurent‘s series valid in the regions:
z  1z  3
1  z  3 and 0  z  1  2
10. Show that F  (6 xy  z 3 )i  (3x 2  z ) j  (3xz 2  y)k is irrotational vector and find the
scalar potential function  such that F  
Unit I
Functions of Several Variables
Functions of two variables - Partial derivatives - Total differential - Derivative of implicit functions - Maxima and
minima - Constrained Maxima and Minima by Lagrangian Multiplier method - Jacobians-application to
engineering problems. 9 Hours
Unit II
Multiple Integrals
Double integration in cartesian and polar co-ordinates - Change of order of integration - change of variables- Area
and volume by multiple integrals- application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit III
Vector Calculus
Gradient - divergence - curl- line - surface and volume integrals - Green‘s - Gauss divergence and Stokes‘
theorems (statement only) - application to engineering problems. 9 Hours
Unit IV
Analytic Functions
Analytic functions- Necessary condition of analytic function-Sufficient condition of analytic function(statement
only)- properties - Determination of analytic function using Milne Thomson‘s method, conformal mappings -
Mappings of w= z + a, az, 1/z, ez- bilinear transformation - application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit V
Complex Integration
Cauchy‘s fundamental theorem (statement only)- and application of Cauchy‘s integral formula(statement only) –
Taylor‘s and Laurent‘s series- classification of singularities - Cauchy‘s residue theorem (statement only) – Contour
integration - circular and semi circular contours (excluding poles on the real axis)- application to engineering
problems 9 Hours
Textbooks
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 2000.

2. K. A. Lakshminarayanan, K. Megalai, P. Geetha and D. Jayanthi , Mathematics for Engineers, Volume II,
Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 2008.
References
1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume II, S. Chand & Co.,
New Delhi, 2009.
2. T. Veerarajan, Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2008.
3. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singapore, 2008.
4. C. Ray Wylie and Louis. C. Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill
Publications, 2003.
11O202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE

3 0 0 3.0
 Imparting knowledge on principles of environmental science and engineering.

 Understanding the concepts of ecosystem, biodiversity and impact of environmental pollution.
 Awareness on value education, population and social issues.
1. Awareness on natural resources and understanding environmental problems

2. Realize the benefits of ecology and biodiversity
3. Characterize and analyze different levels of pollution and its management techniques
4. List human activities that may be responsible for global warming and cooling of earth‘s atmosphere and
pave way for sustainable development
5. Classify and understand about the relation between human population and environment
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Semester
Model
S. No. Test I† Test II† End
Examination†
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 15 15
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Give the scope and importance of environmental studies.

2. Distinguish between renewable and non- renewable resources.
3. Explain the impacts of mining on forests.
4. Explain why fresh water is a precious resource and classification of different water pollutants?
5. What are the Impacts of modern agriculture?
6. State the two energy laws and give examples that demonstrate each law.
7. List the physical, chemical, and biological factors responsible for soil formation.
8. Give examples of point and nonpoint sources of pollution.
9. Draw a food web that includes ten or more aquatic organisms.
10. Distinguish between primary and secondary pollutants.
11. Identify the four parts of the atmosphere.
12. Describe secondary and primary succession with suitable examples.
13. Define the term extinction.
†
14. Relate the concept of food web and food chain to trophic levels.
15. Describe energy flow in a ecosystem.
16. Define the roles of producers, herbivore, carnivore, omnivore, scavenger, parasite and decomposer
17. List some of the components of an ecosystem.
18. Distinguish between the biotic and abiotic factors in an ecosystem.
19. Give some impacts of water pollution.
20. Explain the source and effects of e waste.
21. What is the loudest sound possible?
22. What are the laws regarding noise pollution?
23. What is rainwater harvesting?
24. Discuss the concept and reactions of acid rain.
25. Describe the salient features of Wildlife (protection) Act, 1972.
26. What is 3R approach?
27. Give the effects of nuclear fallout.
28. Differentiate between mortality and natality.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain why providing adequate food for all of the world's people is so difficult?
2. Rank the five major sources of energy used to produce electricity and classify the energy sources
as renewable or nonrenewable.
3. Describe the causes of desertification and its preventive measures.
4. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of the green revolution.
5. Explain the relationship between technology and global warming.
6. Describe any three health effects of air pollution.
7. Identify "greenhouse gases" and explain how they cause the "greenhouse effect".
8. Identify a few plants and animals with the various biomes.
9. Explain the importance of primary species.
10. Explain the five major types of species interactions and give examples of each.
11. Environmental problems involve social, political, and economic issues—Justify.
12. What problems does noise pollution cause to animals?
13. What type of pollution threatens wetlands?
14. What are the major measures to attain sustainability?
15. Why is urban energy requirement more than rural requirement?
16. What are the major limitations to successful implementation of our environmental legislation?
17. Explain the concept of Malthusian theory.
18. How age-structure pyramids serve as useful tools for predicting population growth trends of a nation?
19. Discuss various issues and measures for women and child welfare at international and national level.
APPLY
1. Compare the energy efficiencies of any two inventions.

2. Name some alternatives to pesticides.
3. Identify four different habitats found in bodies of water and give examples of organisms that live
in each habitat.
4. Explain how we could reduce air pollution?
5. What are the measures to be taken to reduce your own noise pollution?
6. List the top ten polluted countries in the world?
7. Identify the grants available for rain water harvesting in buildings?
8. What are the major implications of enhanced global warming?
9. Discuss the methods implemented by government to control HIV/AIDS.
10. What is the role of an individual in prevention of pollution?
ANALYZE/ EVALUATE
1. List reasons why it is important that we seek alternatives to fossil fuels.

2. Explain why fresh water is often in short supply?
3. Give examples of human-made sources of radiation and explain how human-made sources differ
from natural sources of radiation.
Unit I
Introduction to Environmental Studies and Natural Resources
Environment: Definition- scope - importance – need for public awareness. Forest resources: Use –over exploitation-
deforestation - case studies- mining - effects on forests and tribal people. Water resources: Use – over utilization of
surface and ground water- floods – drought - conflicts over water. Mineral resources: Use – exploitation -
environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources - case studies. Food resources: World food problems
- changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing - effects of modern agriculture- fertilizer-pesticide problems - water
logging - salinity -case studies. Energy resources: Growing energy needs - renewable and non renewable energy
sources. Land resources: Land as a resource - land degradation - soil erosion. Role of an individual in conservation
of natural resources.
Documentation of the effect of degradation of forest resource.
9 Hours
Unit II
Ecosystems and Biodiversity
Concept of an ecosystem: Structure and function of an ecosystem – producers - consumers -decomposers – energy
flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains - food webs and ecological pyramids. Types of
ecosystem: Introduction - characteristic features - forest ecosystem - grassland ecosystem - desert ecosystem -
aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries). Biodiversity: Introduction– definition (genetic -
species –ecosystem) diversity. Value of biodiversity: Consumptive use - productive use – social values – ethical
values - aesthetic values. Biodiversity level: Global - national - local levels- India as a mega diversity nation-
hotspots of biodiversity. Threats to biodiversity: Habitat loss - poaching of wildlife – man wildlife conflicts –
endangered and endemic species of India. Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of
biodiversity - field study.
Documentation of the endangered flora and fauna in your native place.
9 Hours
Unit III
Environmental Pollution
Pollution: Definition –air pollution - water pollution - soil pollution - marine pollution - noise pollution - thermal
pollution - nuclear hazards. Solid waste management: Causes - effects - control measures of urban and industrial
wastes. Role of an individual in prevention of pollution - pollution case studies. Disaster management: Floods –
earthquake - cyclone - landslides. Electronic wastes.
Investigation on the pollution status of Bhavani river.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Social Issues and Environment
Sustainable development : Unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy. Water
conservation - rain water harvesting - watershed management. Resettlement and rehabilitation of people.
Environmental ethics: Issues - possible solutions – climate change - global warming and its effects on flora and
fauna - acid rain - ozone layer depletion - nuclear accidents - nuclear holocaust - wasteland reclamation -
consumerism and waste products. Environment protection act: Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) act – water
(Prevention and control of Pollution) act – wildlife protection act – forest conservation act – issues involved in
enforcement of environmental legislation.
Analyze the recent steps taken by government of India to prevent pollution.
9 Hours
Unit V
Human Population and Environment
Human population: Population growth - variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare
programme and family planning – environment and human health – Human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS,
Swine flu – women and child welfare . Role of information technology in environment and human health.
Population explosion in India, China – the present and future scenario.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. T. G. Jr. Miller, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co., 2004.
2. Raman Sivakumar, Introduction to Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Education
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2010.
References
1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2010 .
2. S. Divan, Environmental Law and Policy in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2001.
3. K. D. Wager, Environmental Management, W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.
4. W. P. Cunningham, Environmental Encyclopedia, Jaico Publising House, Mumbai, 2004.
5. S. K. Garg, R. Garg, R. Garg, Ecological & Environmental Studies, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2006.
6. http://www.ipcc.ch/index.html
7. http://unfccc.int/2860.php
LANGUAGE ELECTIVE II
3 1 0 3.5
11C204 / 11A204 / 11M204 APPLIED MATERIALS SCIENCE

(Common to AE, CE, and ME)
3 0 0 3.0
 To make students familiar in the properties of conducting, semiconducting, magnetic and dielectric
materials.
 To acquire knowledge in thermal properties of materials used in construction and non-destructive
techniques.
1. Understanding the electrical properties of metals

2. Able to differentiate intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors
3. Realize the frequency and temperature dependence of various polarization mechanisms
4. The importance of good and bad conductors and their practical applications in their respective fields
5. Acquiring knowledge about the non-destructive technology
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Semester
Model
S.No Test 1 Test 2 End
Examination
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Mention the postulates of classical free electron theory.

2. State Wiedemann-Franz law.
3. Define the term Fermi energy and mention its importance.
4. Define drift velocity. How is it different from thermal velocity of an electron?
5. Explain the Fermi-Dirac distribution function of electrons. Illustrate graphically the effect of temperature
on the distribution.
6. Define mean free path.
7. Distinguish between the p-type and n-type semiconductors.
8. What are donors and acceptors?
9. What is the meaning of band gap of a semiconductor?

10. Discuss the variation of Fermi level with temperature in the case of p-type and n-type semiconductors.
11. Explain the different types of polarization mechanisms in dielectrics and sketch their dependence on the
frequency of applied electric field.
12. What is dielectric breakdown? Summarize the various factors contributing to breakdown in dielectrics.
13. Discuss the different modes of heat transfer and mention their special features.
14. Write a note on X-ray fluoroscopy.
15. Describe the construction and working of ultrasonic flaw detector. Also write the merits and demerits.
16. What is the basic principle of liquid penetrant method?
17. Briefly discuss the different stages involved in LP testing.
18. What are the characteristics of the LP testing materials?
UNDERSTAND
1. Mention the salient features of the ‗free electron gas‘ model. Obtain the Ohm‘s law based on it.
2. Mention the limitations of classical free electron theory.
3. Define density of states and also mention its uses.
4. Explain thermal conductivity and derive an expression for thermal conductivity of metals.
5. Derive an expression for density of states in a metal and hence obtain the Fermi energy in terms of density
of free electrons.
6. Distinguish between relaxation time and collision time.
7. Why do you prefer extrinsic semiconductor over intrinsic semiconductor?
8. What is Hall effect? What is its use in semiconductors?
9. Deduce the relation for the local field of a dielectric material which is in cubic structure.
10. Deduce Clausius-Mosotti relation and explain its use in predicting dielectric constants of solids.
11. Distinguish between thermal conductivity and thermal diffusivity.
12. Explain the heat flow through compound media in series and parallel.
13. Explain the principle behind radiography.
APPLY
1. Assuming the electron-lattice interaction to be responsible for scattering of conduction electrons in a metal,
obtain an expression for conductivity in terms of relaxation time and explain any three drawbacks of
classical free electron theory of metals.
2. Explain any two practical applications of conduction and convection.
3. Explain the thermal conductivity of rubber.
4. Elaborate how you will explore the defects in automotive parts?
ANALYZE/EVALUATE
1. State the relation between thermal conductivity and electrical conductivity. Does it hold good for all types
of materials?
2. Calculate the Fermi energy of copper at 0K. Atomic weight and density of copper are 63.54 and 8950
kg/m3 respectively.
3. By how many orders of magnitude is the mean free path reduced in a certain metal when temperature
increases from 0°C to 340°C? The temperature coefficient of resistivity α = 5x10 -3.
4. Why do you prefer silicon for transistors and GaAs for laser diodes?
5. Sketch the variation of conductivity with temperature in the case of intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.
6. How will you determine the type of charge carriers present in a semiconductor?
7. Mention the limitations of LP testing.
Unit I
Electrical Properties of Metals
Introduction- Derivation of microscopic form of Ohm‘s law- postulates of classical free electron theory- derivation
of electrical conductivity of metals (Drude- Lorentz theory)- merits and demerits. Derivation of thermal conductivity
– Wiedemann-Franz law- verification. Electron energies in metal and Fermi energy- Fermi-Dirac distribution
function and its variation with temperature- density of energy states- calculation of density of electron and fermi
energy at 0K- average energy of free electron at 0K- Importance of fermi energy- problems.
Quantum free electron theory and Band theory of solids. 9 Hours
Unit II
Semiconducting Materials & Devices
Introduction - elemental and compound semiconductors - Intrinsic semiconductors: density of electrons - density of
holes- determination of carrier concentration and position of Fermi energy- band gap energy determination
(quantitative treatment). Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration in p-type and n-type semiconductors. Hall
effect- theory of Hall effect- experimental determination of Hall voltage- applications. Semi conducting devices:
solar cells (Photovoltaic effect) – uses. Photo detectors: pin photo diodes – applications.
Variation of Fermi level with temperature and doping concentration in extrinsic semiconductors.
9 Hours
Unit III
Dielectrics
Introduction- fundamental definitions in dielectrics- expressions for electronic, ionic and orientation polarization
mechanisms- space charge polarization- Langevin- Debye equation- frequency and temperature effects on
polarization- dielectric loss- internal field- expression for internal field (cubic structure)- derivation of Clausius-
Mosotti equation – importance. Dielectric breakdown- various breakdown mechanisms with characteristics-
applications of dielectric materials and insulating materials - problems.
Charging and discharging of capacitors.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Thermal Physics
Mode of heat transfer-thermal conductivity-thermal diffusivity-thermal conduction through compound media
(bodies in series and parallel) - thermal conductivity of good conductor - Forbe‘s method-thermal conductivity of
bad conductor- Lee‘s disc-radial flow of heat-expression for thermal conductivity of rubber-experimental
determination-practical applications of conduction-problems.
Thermal and ventilation design of buildings .
9 Hours
Unit V
Non-Destructive Testing
Introduction - various steps involved in NDT process-X-ray radiographic technique -displacement method – merits,
demerits and applications of X-ray radiography - X-ray fluoroscopy – liquid penetrant method-advantages,
disadvantages and applications –ultrasonic flaw detector - block diagram - construction and working - merits and
demerits. Thermography: types-block diagram - recording of thermal images - merits, demerits and applications.
Fluoroscopy or Real-time Radiography.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text Books
1. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011.

2. M. Arumugam, Physics II, Anuradha Publications, Kumbakonam, 2005.
References
1. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2006.
2. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company
Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
3. V. Raghavan, Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009.
4. D.S Mathur, Elements of properties of matter, S.Chand Publications, New Delhi, Reprints 2010.
5. P.K. Palanisami, Physics For Engineers, Scitech Publications (India)Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 2002.
11O205 BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

(Common to all branches except EEE, ECE, EIE)
4 0 0 4.0
 To understand the basics concepts of electric circuits & magnetic circuits

 To learn the operations of electrical machines
 To impart knowledge in the concepts of Communication systems

1. Analyze the power in single phase AC systems

2. Derive an equation for self and mutual inductance
3. Determine the characteristics of Bipolar junction transistors
4. Diagnose the operation of half wave and full wave rectifier
5. Design of an operational amplifier
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
5 Create 5 5 5 5
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is an inductor?
2. State Ohm‘s law.
3. State the operating principle of a transformer.
4. Draw the circuit symbols of i] step up transformer ii] step down transformer.
5. What is resistor? Give its symbol.
6. What are impurities?
7. Draw the neat-labelled I-V characteristics of zener diode.
8. Draw circuit symbol of diode and zener diode,
9. Which process is used to convert the material into extrinsic?
10. What is junction barrier?
11. Define the term rectification and efficiency
12. What is done in the base region of a transistor to improve its operation.
13. What is BJT?
14. List the needs for modulation.
15. Draw symbol of 2-input NOR gate & write its truth table.
†
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain Ohm‘s law relating to (V), (I) and (R).

2. Explain the working principle of a transformer.
3. Explain the working principle of an induction motor.
4. Discuss intrinsic semiconductor are pure semiconductors.
5. Explain pentavalent impurities with example.
6. Explain trivalent impurities with example.
7. Explain in brief, knee voltage of diode.
8. Explain in brief, breakdown voltage of diode.
9. Explain the operation of P-N Junction diode when forward and reverse bias.
10. Explain the formation of depletion region in P-N Junction.
11. Explain Zener diode as voltage regulator.
12. With a neat circuit diagram explain the working of a half wave rectifier.
13. Derive an expression for the efficiency of a half wave rectifier.
14. With a neat circuit diagram, explain the working of full wave rectifier.
15. What is Ex-OR gate? Explain its working & tabulate the truth table.
APPLY
1. Why opamp is called as linear amplifier?

2. Why impurities are used?
3. Calculate the value of resistance having co lour code sequence Red , Yellow, orange and
Gold.
4. Why do we use transformer in rectifier circuit?
5. Which impurity play important role in formation of P type semiconductor?
6. Calculate the % ripple factior, if the dc output voltage 20 V and ac voltage 2V.
7. Three resistors are connected in series across a 12V battery. The first resistance has a value of 2 Ω, second
has a voltage drop of 4V and third has power dissipation of 12 W. Calculate the value of the circuit current.
8. A 25 Ω resistor is connected in parallel with a 50 Ω resistor. The current in 50 Ω resistor is 8A. What is
the value of third resistance to be added in parallel to make the total line current as 15A.
9. A toroidal air cored coil with 2000 turns has a mean radius of 25cm, diameter of each turn being 6cm. If the
current in the coil is 10A, find mmf, flux, reluctance, flux density and magnetizing force.
10. The self inductance of a coil of 500turns is 0.25H.If 60% of the flux is linked with a second coil of 10500
turns. Calculate a) the mutual inductance between the two coils and b) emf induced in the second coil when
current in the first coil changes at the rate of 100A/sec.
11. 2.An air cored toroidal coil has 480 turns, a mean length of 30cm and a cross-sectional area of 5
cm2.Calculate a)the inductance i\of the coil and b) the average induced emf, if a current of 4 A is reversed
in 60 milliseconds
ANALYZE / EVALUATE
1. Why inductor is referred as a choke?

2. Why single phase induction motor are not self starting?
3. How the barrier potential is developed across the P-N Junction, what are the approximate
values this potential for Germenium and Silicon?
4. Trivallent impurity is called as donor impurity, comment.
5. Distinguish with diagram, then solid material on the basis of band diagram.
6. How a zener diode can be used for voltage regulation in power supply?
7. How voltage source is converted into current source and vice versa?
8. Differentiate P type and N type semiconductor
9. Distinguish between metal, semiconductor and insulator. Give examples of each.
10. Distinguish between half wave and full wave rectifier
CREATE
1. Design a half wave uncontrolled rectifier and calculate the ripple factor
2. Design a full wave uncontrolled rectifier and calculate the efficiency
Unit I
Electric Circuits
Definition of Voltage, Current, Power & Energy, Ohm‘s law, Kirchoff‘s Law & its applications – simple problems,
division of current in series & parallel circuits, generation of alternating EMF, definition of RMS value, average
value, peak factor, form factor. Power in single phase AC – three phase system.
Star to delta and delta to star transformations, R-L and R-C series circuit
12 Hours
Unit II
Magnetic Circuits
Definition of MMF, Flux, Reluctance, Properties of Flux lines, Self & Mutual Inductance, Ampere Turns, Series &
parallel magnetic circuits, Comparison between Electric & magnetic circuits, Law of Electromagnetic induction,
Fleming‘s Right & Left hand rule.
Magnetic impedance, Effective resistance, Magnetic capacitivity
12 Hours
Unit III
Electrical Machines
Construction, Type, Principle of Operation & Working Principle of DC Generator, DC Motor, Transformer,
Induction Motor, Induction type single phase energy meter, Domestic wiring practice, Tube light circuit, Earthing &
earthing methods.
Characteristics of DC generators and DC motors
12 Hours
Unit IV
Electronics Engineering
PN Junction diode & Zener diode – Characteristics – Half wave and full wave rectifier – Bipolar junction transistors
– CB,CE, CC Configurations and characteristics – basic concepts of amplifiers and oscillators – Logic gates –
Inverting, Non inverting amplifiers and Operational amplifiers- Basic Computer organization – Block diagram of
Microprocessors (8085).
Semiconductor theory, Diode clippers, op-amp parameters and applications
12 Hours
Unit V
Communication Engineering
Introduction to communication systems – Need for modulation – Types- Block Diagram representation only – Block
diagram of TV system – Introduction to cellular & mobile telephony- Block diagram of Optical and Satellite
communication systems.
Analog and digital signals, Transmission medium, Digital communication
12 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. T. K. Nagsarkar and M. S. Sukhija, Basic of Electrical Engineering, Oxford Press, 2005

2. R. Muthusubramaninan, S. Salivahanan and K. A. Muraleedharan, Basic Electrical, Electronics and
Computer Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004
References
1. J. A. Edminister, Electric Circuits, Schaum‘s Series, McGraw Hill, 2005

2. Van Valkenbergm, Electric Circuits and Network Analysis, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2005
3. Smarjith Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2005
11C206 APPLIED GEOLOGY

2 0 2 3.0
 To impart basic knowledge on earth sciences and their applications in civil engineering
 To impart knowledge on rock mechanics and engineering
1. Identification of rocks and its structures

2. Analysis of rocks during the construction of tunnels, dams and road cuttings
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are Sand dunes?

2. Define water table.
3. What is meant by NIFE?
4. What are plates?
5. What are Barchans?
6. What is an aquifer?
7. What is an aquitard?
8. Distinguish the terms: Mesa, Butte, Hog back, and Cuesta.
9. Differentiate between weathering and erosion.
10. What are the symmetry elements of a crystal?
11. Define ―Plane of symmetry‖.
12. Define ―Axis of symmetry‖.
13. Define ―Centre of symmetry‖.
14. Differentiate between fracture and cleavage.
15. List out the occurrence of coal in India.
16. Write a note on ―Fracture‖.
17. What are the metamorphic agents?
18. Name any four mechanical structures in sedimentary rocks.
19. Define ―Metamorphism‖.
20. Define ―Cross bedding‖.
21. Name any two types of metamorphism.
22. What is granitic texture?
†
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and model examination will be
converted to a maximum of 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly,
23. Define ―Graded bedding‖.

24. What is meant by metasomatic ore deposit?
25. Write short note on dolerite.
26. What is meant by outcrop?
27. Write notes on ―Attitude of Beds‖.
28. What is Synclinal fold?
29. Name the device used in seismic survey.
30. What are dip and strike?
31. What is anticline?
32. What is an aquifuge?
33. What is an aquiclude?
34. What is a confined aquifer?
35. Define ―Porosity and permeability of rocks‖.
36. What is meant by joints in rocks?
37. What is Normal fault?
38. Differentiate between dip and strike?
39. What is Reverse Fault?
40. Define ―Stratification‖.
41. Define ―Subsidence‖.
42. Define ―Avalanche‖.
43. What is Remote sensing?
44. What are the factors responsible for sea erosion?
45. What is a tunnel?
46. What is meant by spectral signature?
47. What is meant by aerial mosaic?
48. What are the different types of aerial photography?
49. What are the types of seismic methods and give their uses?
50. Write the uses of remote sensing?
UNDERSTAND
1. Differentiate between cubic system and tetragonal system

2. Differentiate between ―Meander and Ox-bow lake‖.
3. How is marble formed?
4. Write the symmetry elements of normal class of Isometric system.
5. Explain in detail the axial relation, symmetry elements and forms present in the normal class of Isometric
system.
6. Explain in detail the seismic method and electrical method in geophysical survey.
7. Write the symmetry elements and forms present in any four of crystal system.
8. Explain in detail the electrical method useful in civil engineering investigation.
9. Explain the occurrence and movement of ground water and its importance in civil engineering.
10. Explain in detail, the seismic methods used in the civil engineering investigations.
11. Explain the various geological investigations for tunneling and the methods of tunnel excavation in rocks.
12. Explain in detail the various physical properties of the minerals.
13. What is meant by folds and faults? Discuss about their role in the design and construction of large
engineering structures.
14. Discuss the rock classification. Give an account on geological and engineering properties of any four
Igneous rocks.
15. What are fault structures? Give its classification and explain the importance of fault structure in Dam and
Tunnel constructions.
16. Discuss about the types of landslides and the causative factors. Add a note on the measures to prevent
landslides.
17. What are photo-interpretation elements? List them and explain their role in location suitable sites for civil
engineering investigation.
18. Write an essay on the geological work of wind.
19. Describe the geology of the ground water.
APPLY
1. Write an essay on the geological work of river.

2. Give a detailed account on types of aquifers, factors, formation and occurrence of groundwater.
3. Write the physical properties of Hornblende, Biotite mica, Augite and Hypersthene. Discuss its role in
rock strength analysis.
4. Write an essay on remote sensing techniques, its advantages and drawbacks.
5. Write the description, occurrence, engineering properties and distribution of diorite, conglomerate, phyllite
and schist.
6. Write the description, occurrence, engineering properties and distribution of syenite, shale, gneiss and
quartzite.
7. Describe the procedure of interpretation of geological maps for faults, folds, unconformities, attitudes and
order of superposition.
8. Write in detail the axial relation, symmetry elements and forms present in the normal class of orthorhombic
system.
EVALUATE/ANALYZE
1. Write the mechanism behind the movement of tectonic plates and its causes.
2. Can we predict earthquake? Analyze
3. What type of minerals could be used in civil engineering works? Why?
4. Why sedimentary terrain is not selected by the civil engineering in all his construction works?
5. How rock structures limit the design of structures?
6. Analyze the required geological conditions for construction of dams.
7. Analyze how properties of rocks limit the work of civil engineer in all his construction works?
8. What are the preliminary geological investigations to be carried out for construction of dam structures?
9. Discuss how weathering and tectonic forces impose slides in an area?
10. Comment on interrelationship between plate movements and the distribution of high intensity of earthquake
and active volcanic regions.
11. Write the importance and uses of Minerals – Rocks in civil engineering works.
12. Synthesis how the physical properties of rocks controls the mechanical properties of rocks and in turn how
it limits the design and execution works of civil engineer?
13. Explain how rock structures and geological conditions limit the design and execution works of civil
engineer?
14. What are the criteria‘s followed by the civil engineer for the site selection and how they overcome the
problems encountered if any in the field?
Unit I
General Geology
Geology in civil engineering – Branches of geology – Earth structures and composition - Earth processes –
Weathering – Work of rivers - Wind and their engineering importance – Earthquake belts in India –
Groundwater: Mode of occurrence – Prospecting - Importance in civil engineering.
Elementary knowledge on continental drift and plate tectonics
6 Hours
Unit II
Mineralogy
Elementary knowledge on symmetry elements of important crystallographic systems – Physical properties
of minerals – Study of the rock forming minerals – Quartz family - Feldspar family – Mica - Pyroxene
family minerals –- Fundamentals of process of formation of ore minerals
Coal and petroleum – Their origin and occurrence in India
6 Hours
Unit III
Petrology and Rock Mechanics
Rocks - Introduction - Rock cycle – Physical description of rock types - Igneous rocks – Granite –
Syenite and Basalt - Sedimentary rocks - Conglomerate – Sandstone – Shale and Limestone -
Metamorphic rocks - Schist – Gneiss - Quartzite and marble – Rock mechanics - Introduction - Study of
rock properties – Porosity – Permeability - Moisture content – Swelling – Durability.
Properties, behaviour and engineering significance of clay minerals 6 Hours
Unit IV
Structural Geology and Geophysical Investigations
Attitude of beds – Outcrops - Contours – Introduction to geological maps –Folds - Faults and joints –
Their bearing on engineering construction - Seismic and electrical methods for civil engineering
investigations.
Study of structures
6 Hours
Unit V
Geological Investigations in Civil Engineering
Study of air photos and satellite images – Interpretation for civil engineering projects – Geological
conditions necessary for construction of dams – Tunnels – Road cuttings - Land slides – Causes and
preventions - Sea erosion and coastal protection.
Remote sensing techniques
6 Hours
List of Experiments
1. Physical properties of minerals

2. Physical properties of rocks
3. Identification of minerals in hand specimen
4. Identification of rocks in hand specimen
Textbooks
1. Parbin Singh, Engineering and General Geology, Katson Publication House, 2001
2. B. P. Verma, Rock Mechanics for Engineers, Khanna Publishers, 1997
Reference
1. Legeet, Geology and Engineering, McGraw-Hill Book Company 1998

11C207 ENGINEERING MECHANICS

3 1 0 3.5
 At the end of the course, students will have knowledge of coplanar and space forces and the conditions for
the equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies
 The students will be able to apply Newton‘s second law of motion to the dynamics of particles
PROGRAMME OUTCOME (POs)

(e) an ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems
1. Determination of unknown reactions using free body diagram of particles and rigid bodies
2. Application of equations of statics/Dynamics to determine the unknown quantities.
3. Determine the properties of section that are needed for the design of structural elements.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Apply 40 40 40 40
5 Create
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State Lame‘s theorem

2. Write the equilibrium equations of solid body
3. State Parallelogram law of forces
4. Distinguish between scalar and vector
5. What is meant by resolution of forces
6. Define equilibrant
7. List out the various types of forces in plane.
8. Differentiate between coplanar and concurrent force system
9. List out the different types of supports.
10. State Varignon‘s theorem.
11. What is meant by free body diagram?
12. What is meant by moment?
13. Define friction
14. State the law of Coulomb friction.
15. What is meant by cone of friction?
16. What is wedge friction?
17. Define angle of friction.
18. Define centroid.
†
19. Differentiate between center of gravity and centroid

20. State parallel axis theorem.
21. State perpendicular axis theorem.
22. Define projectile.
23. Define relative velocity
24. State Newton‘s second law of motion.
25. Write the principle of impulse momentum equation..
26. State the theorems of Pappus and Guldinus to find out the surface area and the volume of a body.
27. State the Coulomb's laws of dry friction.
28. A belt embraces an angle of 200? over the surface of a pulley of 500 mm diameter. If the tight side tension
of the belt is 2.5 kN. Find out the slack side tension of the belt. The coefficient of friction between the belt
and the pulley can be taken as 0.3.
29. The motion of a particle in defined by the relation x = t3 – 15 t2 – 20, where 'x' is expressed in metres and
't' in seconds. Determine the acceleration of the particle at t = 3 seconds.
30. A mass of 50 kg. has an initial velocity of 15 m/s. horizontally on a smooth surface. Determine the value of
horizontal force that will bring the mass to rest in 4 seconds.
31. Define the term 'coefficient of restitution' of two bodies under impact.
32. State the principle of conservation of linear momentum of a particle.
33. State Transmissibility of Force.
UNDERSTAND
1. Write the difference between units and dimensions

2. State the theorem to solve the unknowns for the concurrent force system.
3. What is meant by composition of forces?
4. Write the equilibrium condition for a cantilever beam.
5. Determine the support reaction for a simply supported beam with UDL over the entire span (l).
6. Draw the free body diagram of a body rest on ground and is tied with vertical wall.
7. Discuss the transmission of power through belts
8. Two rollers of weight P and Q are connected by a flexible string AB. The rollers rest on two mutually
perpendicular planes DE and EF as shown in figure.
Calculate the tension in the string and the angle θ that it makes wit horizontal when the system is in
equilibrium.
9. A bullet of weight 50 gm is fired into a body of weight 5 kg, which is suspended by a string 1 m long. Due
to this impact, the 5 kg body swings through an angle of 30º from the vertical. Calculate the velocity of the
bullet.
10. Determine the unknown force ―P‖ required to move the block upwards using wedge of 30 0 with horizontal
APPLY/EVALUATE
1. Derive the expression between tensions on two sides of a belt and pulley system in terms of angle of wrap
and coefficient of friction.
2. What are perpendicular and parallel axis theorems? Discuss their application
3. Calculate the moment of inertia about the base of a rectangle 350 x 250 mm
4. Determine the centroid of hollow circular section of thickness 25mm and external diameter 300mm
5. A stone is dropped in to a well at a velocity of 100m/s. Calculate the height of the well if the height of
water in the well is 5m.
6. Calculate the friction between the ladder and the floor, the angle between the floor and the ladder is 60
degree. The length of the ladder is 3m and a man is standing at a height of 2m from bottom of the ladder.
Assume the vertical surface is smooth.
ANALYZE
1. What are the necessary and sufficient conditions for equilibrium for a concurrent force system?
2. Find the location of centroid of I section shown in figure.
3. Find the moment of inertia of channel section shown in figure about xx axis
Unit I
Basics and Statics of Particles
Introduction - Units and dimensions - Laws of mechanics – Parallelogram law of forces – Vectors – Vectorial
representation of forces -Coplanar forces – Resolution and composition of forces – Equilibrium of a particle under
coplanar forces – Forces in space - Equilibrium of a particle in space.
Principles of relativistic Mechanics
9 Hours
Unit II
Equilibrium of Rigid Bodies
Free body diagram – Types of supports and their reactions – Moments and couples – Vectorial representation of
moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment – Varignon‘s theorem – Resolution of a given force into a
force acting at a given point and a couple – Reduction of a system of coplanar forces acting on a rigid body into a
single force and a single couple - Equilibrium of rigid bodies in two dimensions – Equilibrium of rigid bodies in
three dimensions.
Equilibrium of Multiply Connected Rigid Bodies
9 Hours
Unit III
Friction
Frictional force – Laws of Coulomb friction – Angle of friction – Cone of friction - Simple contact friction – Ladder
friction - Belt friction –Transmission of power through belts – Wedge friction – Screw jack – Self locking - Rolling
resistance – Problems involving the equilibrium of rigid bodies with frictional forces.
Friction Offered by Thrust Bearing
9 Hours
Unit IV
Properties of Surfaces and Solids
Determination of areas and volumes – First moment of area and the determination of centroid of any cross section –
Moment of inertia of plane areas - Parallel axis theorem-Polar moment of inertia-Product of inertia-Principal
moments of inertia of plane areas - Mass centre of a body - Moment of inertia of mass of a body.
Principal Mass Moment of Inertia
9 Hours
Unit V
Dynamics of Particles
Kinematics of particles in rectilinear motion - Relationships between displacement - velocity and acceleration -
Uniform rectilinear motion and uniformly accelerated rectilinear motion - Curvilinear motion-projectile motion.
Newton‘s second law of motion - Work done by a force-kinetic energy and potential energy - Principle of work and
energy - Principle of impulse and momentum - Impact of elastic bodies
Equations of Motion in terms of Radial and Transverse Components
9 Hours
Textbook
1. M. S. Palanisamy and S. Nagan, Engineering Mechanics – Statics & Dynamics, TMH Publishing
Company, 2005
References
1. F. P. Beer and E. R. Johnston, Vector Mechanics for Engineers – Statics and Dynamics, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2005
2. R.C. Hibbeller, Engineering Mechanics – Statics (vol. I), Dynamics (vol. II), Pearson Education Asia Pvt.
Ltd., 2000.
3. Andrew Pytel and Jaan Kiusalaas, Engineering Mechanics – Statics (vol. I), Dynamics (vol. II), Brooks /
Cole Publishing Company, 1999
4. Irving H. Shames, Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2004
11C209 WORKSHOP PRACTICE

0 0 2 1.0
 To learn the use of basic hand tools and to know the need for safety in work place
 To gain hands on experience on Carpentry, Fitting, Sheet metal, Plumbing, Arc welding, Foundry and
Basic electrical circuits
 To have the basic knowledge on working of domestic appliances.
1. Perform basic Carpentry work

2. Perform basic Fitting work
3. Fabrication of Sheet metal objects
4. Plumbing work
5. Arc welding skill
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Internal Semester End

Assessment Examination
Preparation 10 20
Record 10 -
Mini-Project/
Model Examination /
20 20
Viva-Voce
Total 50 50
REMEMBER
1. What are the tools used in sheet metal work?

2. What are the types of joints in sheet metal work?
3. What is moulding?
4. What is green sand mould?
5. What is gas welding?
6. List out the types of flames in welding
7. What is meant by carpentry?
8. What is the use of Saw?
9. What are the types of joints in pipe connection?
10. What is staircase wiring?
11. What is the working principle of centrifugal pump?
12. What are the types of valves in plumbing and where it is used?
13. List out the cutting tools used in carpentry with specification
14. What are the necessary equipments used in Arc Welding?
15. What are the methods used in sheet metal work?
16. List out the types and components of Air- Conditioner
UNDERSTAND
1. Compare the Refrigeration system with air Condition system

2. How the refrigeration system works?
3. How will you select the suitable welding process for various materials?
4. How will make a V joint in the given MS flat?
5. How will you make a green sand mould using solid pattern? How gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone
stand by using welding joints?
6. How will make English letters from A to Z by using carpentry tools with screw, bolt and nut?
7. How metals are manufactured by using casting process?
8. How cavity is formed by using pattern?
9. How the wires are joined by soldering?
APPLY / EVALUATE
1. Sketch the line diagram of the plumbing work carried out in your house
2. Sketch the wiring diagram for a room consist of two fans ,three tubelights, and one plug point
3. Sketch all the wooden furniture present in your house in three dimensional view
4. How will make a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves an taps?
5. How will form Staircase and Godown wiring?
6. Prepare a hexagonal shape pen stand by using power tools
7. Prepare a cover with handle by using sheet metal to cover a motor
8. Prepare a small trolley to carry wastage by using welding work
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
MECHANICAL
1. Forming of simple objects using sheet metal

2. Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat
3. Preparing a half round joint from the given MS flat
4. Preparing a green sand mould using solid pattern
5. Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump
6. Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints
CIVIL
1. Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using power tools
2. Making English letters from A to Z by using carpentry tools with screw, bolt and nut
3. Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps
ELECTRICAL
1. Staircase and Godown wiring

2. Soldering practice.
3. Assembly and Disassembly of computer system/Television
4. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Mixie, Electric Iron/ Heater, Washing Machine/
Refrigerator and Window Air-Conditioner
Total: 30 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
SI. No. Experiments Hours

1 Forming of simple objects using sheet metal 2
2 Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat 2
3 Preparing a half round joint from the given MS flat 2
4 Preparing a green sand mould using solid pattern 2
5 Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump 2
Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using 2
6
welding joints
Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using 2
7
power tools
Making English letters from A to Z by using carpentry tools with screw, bolt 3
8
and nut
Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes 3
9
valves and taps.
10 Staircase and Godown wiring 2
11 Soldering practice 2
11 Assembly / Disassembly of computer system, TV 3
Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Mixie, Electric Iron, 3
12
Heater, Washing Machine, Refrigerator and Window Air-Conditioner
11O108 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LABORATORY

0 0 2 1.0
 To know how to execute experiments properly, presentation of observations and arrival of conclusions
 It is an integral part of any science and technology program
 To view and realize the theoretical knowledge acquired by the students through experiments
1. Observation and analytical skills are developed

2. Various properties of matter can be known
3. Different optical properties can be analyzed
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Internal Assessment
Preparation 10
Observation & Results 15
Record 10
Model Examination & Viva Voce 15
Total 50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of moment of inertia and rigidity modulus of wire using torsion pendulum (symmetrical
masses method).
2. Determination of Young‘s modulus by non-uniform bending.
3. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee‘s disc.
4. Determination of frequency of vibrating rod using Melde‘s apparatus.
5. Determination of viscosity of a liquid - Poiseulle‘s method.
6. Determination of thickness of a thin wire - air wedge method.
7. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – grating.
8. Determination of refractive index of a liquid and solid using traveling microscope.
9. Determination of energy band gap of a semiconductor diode.
10. Determination of wavelength of LASER and particle size of a given powder.
11. Measurement of numerical aperture and acceptance angle of a optical fiber.
12. Young‘s modulus – uniform bending (pin and microscope).
Total: 30 Hours
11O301 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS III

(Common to all branches Except CSE and Bio-Tech)
3 1 0 3.5
 To obtain the knowledge of expressing periodic functions as Fourier series, Fourier transform and Z
transform which is used to analyze signals in signal processing
 Ability to solve boundary value problems in heat and wave equation using partial differential equations

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

S. No Test I† Test II†
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
5 Create - - -- -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State the Dirichlet‘s Conditions

2. Define even and odd function graphically
3. Write down the complex Fourier transform pair
4. State convolution theorem in Fourier transform
5. Define unilateral and bilateral Z-transform of {f(n)}
6. State initial value theorem in Z-transform
7. Define complete solution of a partial differential equation
8. Write the complementary function of non homogeneous second order equations of distinct and repeated
roots
9. What does a2 represent in the equation ytt = a2yxx ?
10. Write any two solutions of the Laplace equation obtained by the method of separation of variables
UNDERSTAND
1. Find the general solution of x z  y 2 2

 p  y x 2
 
 z2 q  z y 2  x 2 . 
2.
Solve D 2 2

 2DD  D z  x y  e 2 x y
.
†
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and model examination will be converted
to a maximum of 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, internal
assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.
3. Find the half-range cosine series for the function f x   x, 0  x   and hence deduce the sum of the

1
4. series  2n  1
n 0
4
.
x 0  x 1
5. Find the Fourier series of period 2 for the function f ( x)  
 2  x  1 x  2

1
Deduce the sum of 
n 1, 3, 5,.. n
2
.
1  x for x  1
6. Find the Fourier transform of f x    .
 0 for | x |  1
 2  4
 sin x   sin x 
Hence evaluate    dx and   x  dx.
0
x  0

7. Solve the integral equation  f ( x) cos x dx = e  .

0
4z3
8. Find inverse  transform
2 z  12 z  1
2n  3
9. Find Z –transform of .
n  1n  2
8z 2
10. Use convolution theorem to find the inverse Z –transform of
2 z  14 z  1
11. Give a function which is self reciprocal under Fourier sine and cosine transform
APPLY
1. Find the PDE of all planes having equal intercepts on the x and y axis.
2. Form the PDE of all planes passing through the origin.
3. Expand the function f ( x )  cos x in (   ,  ) as a Fourier series of periodicity 2.
4. A taut string of length L is fastened at both ends. The midpoint of the string is taken to a height of b and
then released from rest in this position. Find the displacement of the string at any time t.
5. A string is stretched between two fixed points at a distance 2L apart and the points of the string are given
initial velocities v where v = cx /L 0 < x <L
a. v = c ( 2L - x) /L L < x < 2L . x being the distance from an end point.
b. Find the displacement of the string at any subsequent time.
6. A rod 30 cm long, has its ends A and B at 20ºC and 80ºC respectively, until steady state conditions prevail.
The temperature at the end B is then suddenly reduced to 60º C and at the end A is raised to 40º C and
maintained so. Find the resulting temperature u (x,t).
7. A rectangular plate with insulated surface is 10 cm wide so long compared to its width that it may be
x
considered infinite length .If the temperature along the short edge y=0 is given by 8 sin( ) , while the
10
two long edges x=0 and x=10 as well as the other short edge are kept at 0 0c . Find the steady state
temperature.
8. Solve the equation y n 2  7 y n1  12 y n  2 , given that y0  y1  0 .
n
ANALYZE/ EVALUATE
1. Solve (D2-5DD‘+6D‘2) z= y sinx.

2. Solve (4D2-4DD‘+D‘2) z = 16 log(x+2y).
3. Solve z = p x + q y + p2 q2.

dx
4. Evaluate  x
0
2

 a x2  b2
2

using transform method.
 
dx x 2 dx
5. Evaluate  x
0
2
 a2 2
and  x
0
2
 a2 
2
.
e  ax
6. Find Fourier sine transform of , a >0.
x
7. Find Fourier sine and cosine transform of e-ax , a > 0 and hence find Fourier sine and cosine transform of x
e-ax.
x2

 a2 x2 2
8. Find Fourier transform of e , a > 0 and hence find Fourier transform of e .
9. Find Fourier sine and cosine transform of X n-1.
4z3
10. Find inverse  transform .
2 z  12 z  1
Unit I
Fourier Series
Dirichlet‘s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range cosine and sine series –
Parseval‘s Identity - Harmonic Analysis- Application to engineering problems
9 Hours
Unit II
Fourier Transform
Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution
theorem - Parseval‘s Identity-Finite Fourier Transform- Application to engineering problems
9 Hours
Unit III
Z -Transform and Difference Equations
Z-transform - Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform – Convolution theorem -Formation of difference
equations – Solution of difference equations using Z- transform - Application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Partial Differential Equations
Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions – Solution of
standard types of first order partial differential equations (excluding reducible to standard forms ) – Lagrange‘s
linear equation – Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients
9 Hours
Unit V
Boundary value problems
Classification of second order quasi linear partial differential equations – Fourier series solutions of one dimensional
wave equation – One dimensional heat equation (Insulated ends excluded ) – Steady state solution of two-
dimensional heat equation (Insulated edges excluded ) – Fourier series solutions in Cartesian coordinates
9 Hours
Text Books
1. B. S .Grewal , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delhi ,2000.

2. K. Megalai, P. Geetha and D. Jayanthi , Mathematics for Engineers, Volume III, Vikas Publishing House,
New Delhi,2008.
Reference Books
1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics ,Volume III , S. Chand &
Co., New Delhi, 2008.
2. E. Kreyszig. Advanced Engineering Mathematics , 8th Edition , John Wiley & Sons, Inc,Singapore
(2008).
3. T. Veerarajan , Engineering Mathematics ,Tata McGraw Hill Publications , New Delhi, 2008.
11C302 MECHANICS OF DEFORMABLE BODIES I

3 1 0 3.5
 To impart knowledge on simple stresses, strains and elastic constants

 To determine the stresses, strains and displacement in structural components due to flexure and torsion
1. Determine the deflection of beams

2. Determine the critical bifurcation load of columns
3. Demonstrate the response of beams and columns subject to flexure and torsion
4. Diagnose the cause of failure of structural members
5. Design of weigh bridges
6. Design of metallic pipes
7. Design of shaft
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 60 60 60 60
4 Analyze / Evaluate - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define stress.
2. Define strain.
3. State Hooke‘s law.
4. Define Elasticity.
5. How many independent elastic constants are there in strength of materials approach?
6. Define Poisson‘s ratio.
7. What is the significance of Young‘s Modulus?
8. What is the significance of Shear Modulus?
9. What is the significance of Bulk Modulus?
10. What do you mean by volumetric strain?
11. What do you mean by hydrostatic pressure?
12. What do you mean by limit of proportionality of elastic constants?
13. Give the relationship between bulk modulus, young‘s modulus and poisson‘s ratio.
14. What is the necessity of calculating the values of thermal stresses in structural members?
15. What are the types of beams?
16. What are the different types of end conditions in a beam?
17. What are the different types of loads?
†
converted to to a maximum of 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly
18. Define shear force and bending moment

19. What do you mean by point of contraflexure?
20. What do you mean by positive or sagging bending moment?
21. What do you mean by negative or hogging bending moment?
22. Write down the relationship between load, shear force and bending moment.
23. State the assumptions made in the theory of simple bending
24. What is meant by section modulus?
25. Define modular ratio
26. What do you mean by flitched beam?
27. What is the necessity of calculating the values of shear stress distribution?
28. Write the general equation for simple bending
29. What is meant by proof load?
30. What are the various types of springs?
31. State any two major functions of a spring
32. List out the uses of leaf springs
33. What do you mean by the term strength of beam?
34. Define torsion
35. What are the assumptions made in torsion equation?
36. What is a composite shaft?
37. What is meant by polar moment of inertia?
38. What is polar modulus?
39. What is meant by torsional rigidity of a shaft?
40. What do you mean by strength of a shaft?
41. What are the stresses induced in the helical compression spring due to axial load?
42. What is called twisting moment?
43. What do you mean by principle stresses?
44. What is meant by principle plane?
45. What do you mean by state of stress?
46. Give the necessary condition for a pure state of shear
47. Distinguish between thick and thin cylinders
48. What is the radius of Mohr‘s circle?
49. What is the use of Mohr‘s circle?
50. What are the stresses developed in a thin cylinder subjected to internal fluid pressure?
51. Write the expression for change in volume of thin cylinder section
52. What is meant by strain rosette?
UNDERSTAND
1. Draw the stress strain curve of a ductile material.

2. Derive the equation that relates young‘s modulus and shear modulus.
3. Explain the different types of stress and strain.
4. Derive the equation for thermal stresses and strains.
5. What are the principles used to analyse a composite section?
6. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagram for a simply supported beam subjected to a
concentrated load at the centre.
7. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagram for a simply supported beam subjected to a uniformly
distributed load [u.d.l].
8. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagram for a simply supported beam subjected to a couple.
9. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagram for a cantilever beam subjected to a concentrated load
at the free end.
10. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagram for a cantilever beam subjected to a u.d.l over entire
span.
11. Derive the equation for the theory of simple bending.
12. Derive an expression for moment of resistance of rectangular section.
13. How to relate bending equation with maximum load carrying capacity of beam?
14. How will you derive the equation of strain energy for a semi-elliptical laminated spring?
15. Draw the bending stress variation of a simply supported beam.
16. Write the governing equation for torsion of circular shaft.
17. Derive an expression for the torque transmitted by hollow circular shaft of external diameter ‗D‘ and
internal diameter‗d‘.
18. Why hollow circular shafts are preferred over solid circular shafts?
19. What are the differences between closed coil and open coil helical springs?
20. What is the nature of stress induced in a member subjected to torsion?
21. Displacement can occur without deformation: True (or) False.
22. What are the various stresses induced in the open coil helical spring?
23. Explain the methods for determining stresses on oblique section.
24. Give the expression for principal stresses in thin cylinders.
25. Give the equation for maximum shear stress, circumferential strain and longitudinal strain
26. Write the expression for efficiency of joint of thin cylinder.
27. Derive the equation of principal stresses using rectangular rosette.
APPLY
1. Why the c/s area is more at the bottom of a lamp post?

2. Why the shoulder of a human body suffers pain when it is loaded with a bag with a long rope?
3. Why the bending moment is maximum at the bottom of a lamp post?
4. A rod of 150 cm long and diameter 2.0 cm is subjected to an axial pull of 20 kN. If the modulus of
elasticity of the material of the rod is 2 x 10 5 N/mm2. Determine i) Stress ii) Strain iii) the elongation of the
rod
5. Calculate the modulus of rigidity and bulk modulus of the cylindrical bar of diameter 25 mm and of length
1.5 m, if the longitudinal strain in the bar during a tensile test is 4 times the lateral strain. Take young‘s
modulus equal to 1.5 x 105 MPa
6. A simply supported beam 6 m span carries udl of 20 kN/m for left half of span and two point loads of
25 kN end 35 kN at 4 m and 5 m from left support. Find maximum SF and BM and their location.
Construct the shear force and bending moment diagram
7. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagram for a cantilever beam of 2 m length subjected to
2 kN/m over a length 1 m from free end. It also carries a point load of 4 kN at a distance of 0.5 m from the
free end
8. A beam 2.5 m long has rectangular section of 80 mm width and 120 mm depth. If the beam is carrying a
uniformly distributed load of 15 kN/m, find the maximum bending stress developed in the beam
9. A T-section beam with 100 mm x 15 mm flange and 150 mm x 10 mm web is subjected to a shear force of
15 kN at a section. Draw the shear stress variation across the depth of the beam and obtain the value of
maximum shear stress at the section
10. Determine the diameter of a solid shaft which will transmit 300 kN at 250 rpm. The maximum shear stress
should not exceed 30 N/mm2 and twist should not be more than 10 in a shaft length 2 m. Take modulus of
rigidity equal to 1x 105 N/mm2
11. It is required to design a closed coiled helical spring which shall deflect 1 mm under an axial load of 100 N
at a shear stress of 90 MPa. The spring is to be made of round wire having shear modulus of 0.8 x 10 5 MPa.
The mean diameter of the coil is 10 times that of the coil wire. Find the diameter and length of the wire.
12. The principal stresses at a point in a bar are 160 N/mm2 tensile and 80 N/mm2 compressive. Calculate the
resultant stress in magnitude and direction on a plane inclined at 60° the axis of major principal stress and
also calculate the maximum shear stress
13. A closed cylindrical vessel made of steel plates 5 mm thick with plane ends, carries fluid under pressure of
6 N/mm2. The diameter of the cylinder is 35 cm and length is 85 cm, calculate the longitudinal and hoop
stresses in the cylinder wall and also determine the change in diameter, length and volume of the cylinder.
Take E =2.1 x 105 N/mm2 and 1/m = 0.286
14. Formulate the relation between three elastic constant (E, G and k)
15. In what way is the solution of the equations of transformation of stresses resemble the equation of a circle
from which the Mohr‘s circle results?
Unit I
Simple Stresses and Strains
Stress and strain due to axial load – Elastic limit – Hooke‘s law – Stress – Strain diagram – Stresses in Composite
sections - Thermal stresses – Poisson‘s ratio – Shear stress and Shear strain – Rigidity modulus – Volumetric
strain – Bulk modulus – Relation between elastic constants – Strain energy due to axial force
Stresses and strain energy due to suddenly applied load and impact load 9 Hours
Unit II
Beams and Bending
Types of beams – Types of supports – Shear force and bending moment in beams – Sketching of shear force and
bending moment diagrams for cantilever, simply supported and over hanging beams for any type of loading –
Relationship between rate of loading, shear force and bending moment
9 Hours
Unit III
Stresses in Beams
Theory of simple bending – Assumptions – Analysis for bending stresses – Load carrying capacity of beams –
proportioning sections – Flitched beams – Leaf springs – Strain energy due to bending moment – Shear stress
distribution
Strain energy due to pure shear
9 Hours
Unit IV
Torsion of Circular Shafts and Springs
Derivation of torsion equation – Assumptions – Theory of torsion – Stresses in solid circular and hollow shafts –
Power transmitted by the shaft – Stepped shafts – Strain energy due to torsion – Deformations and stresses in
closed and open coiled helical springs
Composite shaft – Stress due to combined bending and torsion
9 Hours
Unit V
Two Dimensional State of Stress
Two dimensional state of stress at a point – Normal and shear stresses on any plane – Principal planes and
principal stresses – Maximum shear stress – Analytical methods and Mohr‘s circle method – Two dimensional
state of strains at a point - Principal strains and their directions- Stresses and deformations in thin walled cylinders
and spherical shells due to internal pressure
Strain rosettes
9 Hours
Textbooks
1. E. P. Popov, Mechanics of Solids, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1996

2. S. Rajput, Strength of Materials, S. Chand & Co., 2006
References
1. S. M. A. Kazimi, Solid Mechanics, Tata McGraw –Hill Book Co Ltd., 1998

2. B. C. Punmia, Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications, 1992
3. B. S. Basavarajaiah and P. Mahadevappa, Strength of Materials, Universities Press Pvt. Ltd., 2010
11C303 SURVEY I
3 1 0 3.5
 To impart knowledge on the basic principles of field surveying procedures

 To impart a clear understanding on the working principles and use of theodolite
(c) an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such
as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability
1. Demonstrate the various functional aspects of surveying instruments

2. Prepare topographic map including contours of any site
3. Become a registered building and land surveyor
4. Calculate the area and volume of earthwork
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 20 10 10
3 Apply 40 50 60 60
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What do you mean by triangulation?

2. Why triangle is preferred over quadrilateral in surveying?
3. What do you mean by Reconnaissance survey?
4. What is an index sketch?
5. What is ‗base line of survey‘?
6. How is the North line of chain survey map fixed?
7. What should be the maximum length of offset?
8. What is field book?
9. What is the use of field book?
10. What do you mean by strength of fix?
11. Where the datum for India is adopted?
12. Name the BM established by the survey of India?
13. Name the line along which the alignments of roads are taken.
14. What do you mean by overhanging cliff?
15. What do you mean by horizontal equivalent?
16. How the steep slope is indicated?
17. How is the line joining the top of the ordinates in the trapezoidal formula assumed?
18. What should be number of ordinates in the Simpsons formula?
19. What should be number of ordinates in the trapezoidal formula?
†
20. What is the name of the graph which is prepared to facilitate proper distribution of excavated earth?
21. What do you mean by non-transit theodolite?
22. What is the method used for measuring the included angle with improved accuracy?
23. How the included angle of a traverse is measured?
24. What is the main principle of surveying?
25. What do you mean by RF?
26. What is the difference between plane scale and diagonal scale?
27. What is the principle of plane table?
28. Define contour line
29. What are the properties of contour line?
30. What do you mean by ideal triangle?
31. What is the name of the line that intersects with contour line?
32. What is the instrument used for calculating the irregular area?
33. List out the different methods of levelling
34. What do you mean by zero circle?
35. What are the common errors that are encountered in levelling?
36. List out the instruments required for chain surveying.
37. What do you mean by offset?
38. Define Ranging
39. What are the different methods of ranging?
40. What are the different types of survey lines?
41. What are the limits of errors in chain surveying?
42. What do you mean by tape correction?
43. Define fore bearing and back bearing.
44. Define Meridian
45. Give the classifications of bearing.
46. What do you mean by local attraction?
47. What do you mean by closing error?
48. What do you mean by bench mark?
UNDERSTAND
1. What is the need of the reference sketch?

2. What is the fundamental difference between plane surveying and geodetic surveying?
3. What is the length of one link in a 20 m chain?
4. What is the disadvantage of using ill-conditional triangles?
5. What is the significance of indicating the scale in a map?
6. How inaccessible points are located?
7. How the surface of still water is considered?
8. What do you mean by horizontal surface?
9. What do you mean by contour interval?
10. How is the contour interval for a particular map kept?
11. What do you mean by vertical cliff?
12. What is contour?
13. Is the contour interval proportional to the steepness of the area?
14. How is the line joining the top of the ordinates in the Simpsons formula assumed?
15. What is the necessity of balancing the fore sight and back sight distances?
16. Compare the height of collimation and rise and fall method of reducing levels.
17. What are the different adjustments in a dumpy level?
18. What is the permissible limit of error in levelling?
19. Describe the method of check levelling
20. Draw a neat sketch showing various components of a box sextant.
21. What do you mean by interpolation of contours?
22. Differentiate between the simple and compound levelling
23. Explain the different methods of plotting a traverse.
24. Explain the dip of a magnetic needle
APPLY
1. What is the permissible angular error for important traverse survey?

2. How Simpson‘s and Trapezoidal formula are applied for surveying?
3. How the departure can be given if 0 be the RB of a line of length L?
4. What is the algebraic sum of departure and latitude in a closed traverse?
5. What is the deflection angle of line BC if lines AB and BC intersect at B and < B is measured by theodolite?
6. What is the smallest scale adopted for topographical surveys?
7. What is the representative fraction of 1/2500 mean?
8. What does the star cumulates in zenith?
9. If the linear error in a 50 m long traverse is .01 m, what would be the angular error considering the equal
precision?
10. What would be the specification for length to base line with reference to third order triangulation system?
11. What does the contour interval on a map sheet denote?
12. A passenger who is travelling in a ship stands on the deck of a ship and sees a light house which is 40 m
above the sea level. If the height of the passenger‘s eye above sea level is 8 m, find the distance of the
passenger from the light house.
13. What would be the length of AC if the coordinates of A are 100 N and 200 E and those of C are 100 S and
200 E?
14. What would be the length of transition curve if the defection angle between the tangents drawn at the end of
transition curve is 7 degree?
15. What is the standard error of the area of a circle if the radius is 7 m and standard error of .02 is on the
radius? The distance between two bench marks is 1000 m. If during levelling, the total error due to
collimation, curvature and refraction is found to be +.020 m, then what will be the magnitude of the
collimation error?
16. What would be the volume of excavation as per prismoidal formula if the excavation is to be made for a
reservoir measuring 20 m long, 12 m wide at the bottom and 2 m deep, the side slopes are to be 1:1 and the
top to be flush with the ground which is the level in the vicinity?
17. What would be the flying height if the difference in height of two points whose parallax difference is +.8 mm
on a pair of stereo pair taken from a flying height H and having mean photo base 95.2 m is +100 m?
18. What would be the axis signal correction if in a trigonometric levelling the height of the signal used is 4.62 m
and the instrument height is 1.25 m and if the horizontal distance of the target from the instrument is 5780 m?
19. A plan of an area drawn with the original scale of 1 cm= 10 m, has shrunk such that a line, originally 15 cm
long on the plan, measures now 14.5 cm. What would be the shrunk scale?
20. What would be the area of the triangle on the earth if the difference between the sum of the angles of a plane
triangle and the sum of the angles of a spherical triangle is one second?
Unit I
Introduction and Chain Surveying
Definition - Principles - Classification - Scales - Survey instruments, their care and adjustment - Ranging and
chaining - Reciprocal ranging - Setting perpendiculars - well conditioned triangles - Traversing - Plotting -
Enlarging and reducing figures.
Field and office work - Conventional signs
9 Hours
Unit II
Compass Surveying and Plane Table Surveying
Prismatic compass - Bearing - Systems and conversions - Local attraction – True and magnetic meridians -
Magnetic declination - Dip - Traversing - Plotting - Adjustment of errors by graphical and analytical methods -
Plane table instruments and accessories – Methods: Radiation, Intersection, Resection and Traversing - Three and
two point problems.
Surveyor’s compass - Merits and demerits of plane table surveying
9 Hours
Unit III
Levelling
Level line - Horizontal line - Spirit level - Temporary and permanent adjustments - Fly and check levelling -
Booking - Reduction – Effect of curvature and refraction - Reciprocal levelling - Longitudinal and cross sections -
Plotting - Calculation of areas and volumes - Contouring – Methods - Characteristics of contours - Plotting - Earth
work volume - Capacity of reservoirs – Block contouring.
Levels and Staves - Sensitiveness - Bench marks - Uses of contours - Microptic
9 Hours
Unit IV
Theodolite Surveying
Theodolite - Vernier and microptic - Temporary and permanent adjustments of vernier transit - Horizontal angles
and their measurement - Vertical angles and their measurement - Heights and distances - Traversing - Closing error
and distribution - Gale‘s tables.
Description and uses of theodolite - Omitted measurements – Radial contouring
9 Hours
Unit V
Tacheometric Surveying
Tacheometric systems - Tangential, stadia and subtense methods - Stadia systems – Fixed hair method - Horizontal
and inclined sights – Determination of Stadia constants of the tacheometer - Anallactic lens – Tangential system –
Subtense measurements - Subtense bar – Direct reading tacheometry.
Principles, instruments required - Vertical and normal staffing - Fixed and movable hairs
9 Hours
Textbook
1. B. C. Punmia, Surveying, Vol. I & II, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2005
References
1. K. R. Arora, Surveying, Vol. I, Standard Book House, 2008

2. N. Basak, Surveying, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
3. T. P. Kanetkar, Surveying and Levelling, Vol. I & II, United Book Corporation, 2002
11C304 FLUID MECHANICS

3 1 0 3.5
 To enhance the students‘ knowledge on fluid statics, kinematics and dynamics

 To impart knowledge on the fluid properties and application to real situations of fluid flow
(b) an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such
as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and
sustainability
1. Identify the fluid‘s classifications, properties and their units of measurement

2. Handle various pressure measuring instruments in the field
3. Assess the stability criteria‘s for a floating body
4. Expertise in Dimensional Analysis, Similitude and Model Analysis
5. Demonstrate the fluid flow
6. Design of pipe layout
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

S. No. Test 1† Test II†
1 Remember 30 20 20 20
3 Apply 40 50 60 60
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Evaluate - - - -
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define fluids.
2. Enumerate the important fluid properties with their units of measurement.
3. State the Newton‘s law of viscosity.
4. Define ‗Pascal‘s Law‘.
5. What is hydrostatic pressure distribution?
6. List the various pressure measuring instruments.
7. Define Manometers.
8. Define Centre of pressure.
9. Define Buoyancy.
10. Define Meta – Centre.
11. What is sluice gate?
12. Define fluid flow.
13. Define steady and unsteady flows
14. How are fluid flows classified?
†
15. What is an incompressible fluid flow?

16. What is mean by rate flow?
17. Define potential function.
18. What is mean by convective acceleration?
19. Define path line.
20. Write down continuity equation for compressible and incompressible fluids.
21. What is a flow net?
22. List the forces present in fluid flow
23. What is Euler‘s equation of motion?
24. State Bernoulli‘s theorem.
25. Define impulse momentum equation
26. Mention few discharge measuring devices for pipe flow
27. What is a Pitot-tube?
28. What do you me by viscous flow?
29. What do you me by turbulent flow?
30. What is Hagen Poiseuille‘s formula?
31. What is Moody‘s diagram?
32. What is a pipe?
33. List the energy losses in pipe flow.
34. Define friction factor.
35. Give Darcy's equation and Chezy's equation to determine the friction of pipes
36. Define Hydraulic Gradient Line and Total Energy Line
37. What is compound pipe?
38. What will be the loss of head when pipes are connected in series and parallel?
39. What do you mean by equivalent pipe?
40. What is a boundary layer?
41. What are the causes which result in separation of boundary layer?
42. Define the term dimensional analysis.
43. What do you meant by fundamental units and derived units?
44. What is meant by geometric similarity?
45. Explain the term ‗dimensionally homogeneous equation‘
46. What are methods of dimension analysis?
47. What do you meant by repeating variables?
48. Define the terms model and prototype
49. What are the applications of model testing?
50. How are hydraulic models classified?
UNDERSTAND
1. How fluids are classified?

2. Explain the importance of viscosity in fluid flow.
3. Write down the value of atmospheric pressure in terms of water and mercury
4. Explain how you would find the resultant pressure on a curved surface immersed in a liquid.
5. Distinguish between manometers and mechanical gauges
6. What are the methods of describing fluid flow?
7. Explain Reynolds and Froude numbers. Give suitable examples where these numbers can be used
8. What do you understand by Continuity Equation?
9. Under what conditions one can treat real fluid flow as irrotational.
10. List the properties of stream function.
11. State the assumptions used in deriving Bernoulli‘s equation.
12. Mention the applications of Bernoulli‘s equation.
13. Compare venture meter with orifice meter and mention the advantages of venture meter.
14. A shaft is rotating in a journal bearing. The clearance between the shaft and the bearing is filled with a
viscous liquid. Find an expression for the power absorbed in overcoming viscous resistance.
15. How would you distinguish between hrdrodynamically smooth and rough boundary
16. Comment on the arbitrariness of boundary layer thickness
17. For the two cases of flow in a sudden contraction in a pipeline and flow in sudden expansion in a pipeline,
draw the flow pattern, Hydraulic Gradient Line and Total Energy Line.
18. The discharge of an existing pipeline is to be increased. You have additional pipe of any desired length and
diameter at your disposal. Suggest how would you proposer to augment the flow in the pipeline
19. Cite examples of dimensionally homogeneous and non-homogeneous equations
20. What are the uses of dimensional analysis?
21. What are the advantages of using Buckingham‘s Π - theorem
22. How are the repeating variables selected for dimensional analysis?
23. Show that ratio of inertia force to viscous force gives the Reynolds number
24. Explain the significance of dimensional numbers
APPLY
1. Why does the viscosity of a gas increases with the increase in temperature while that of a liquid decreases
with increase in temperature?
2. Give one example where pressure distribution is non-hydrostatics.
3. With neat sketches, explain the conditions of equilibrium for floating and sub-merged bodies
4. Sketch the velocity distribution for uniform irrotational flow.
5. Derive the continuity equation for three dimensional flow.
6. Describe the use and limitations of the flow nets.
7. Drive Bernoulli‘s equation for the flow of an incompressible fluid.
8. Explain the principle of venturimeter with a neat sketch. Derive the expression for the rate of flow of fluid
through it
9. Derive an expression for the velocity distribution for viscous flow through a circular pipe. Also sketch the
velocity distribution and shear stress distribution across a section of the pipe.
10. Derive Darcy-weisbach formula for calculating loss of head due to friction in a pipe.
11. Why are boundary layer equations not applicable in the region downstream of point of separation?
12. Three pipes of different diameters and lengths are connected in series to make a compound pipe. The ends
of this compound pipe are connected with two tanks whose difference of water levels is H. If co-efficient of
friction for these pipes is same, then determine the discharge through the compound pipe first neglecting
the minor losses and then including them
13. Discuss the circumstances which necessitate the use of distorted model.
14. Assuming that the drag force exerted by a flowing fluid is a function of the density, viscosity, velocity of
the fluid and a characteristic length of the body, develop a general equation by dimensional analysis
15. Explain scale effect in model testing. How is it found?
Unit I
Fluid Properties and Fluid Statics
Dimensions and units - Fluid properties - Hydrostatic law- Pascal‘s law - Atmospheric, absolute, gauge and vacuum
pressures - Measurement of pressure by various types of manometers - Total pressure on plane surfaces - Buoyancy
and meta-centre.
Types of fluids
9 Hours
Unit II
Fluid Kinematics
Classification of fluid flow - Stream line, streak line and path line - Convective and local acceleration - Continuity
equation for one, two and three dimensional flows - Stream function and velocity potential function - Flow net
Properties of flow net and its uses
9 Hours
Unit III
Fluid Dynamics
Pressure, kinetic and datum energy - Euler's equations of motion for a three dimensional flow - Bernoulli's theorem
and proof - Application of Bernoulli‘s equation - Discharge measurement – Pitot tube - Orifice meter,
Venturimeter, Mouth piece and Orifice - Laminar flow through pipes and between plates - Hagen Poiseuille
equation - Turbulent flow
Moody diagram
9 Hours
Unit IV
Boundary Layer and Flow through Pipes
Boundary layer concept - Displacement and momentum thickness - Development of laminar and turbulent flows in
circular pipes - Darcy-Weisbach equation for flow through circular pipe - Moody diagram - Major and minor losses
of flow in pipes problems - Pipes in series - Equivalent pipe.
Pipes in parallel
9 Hours
Unit V
Dimensional Analysis, Similitude and Model Analysis
Methods of dimensional analysis - Rayleigh‘s method - Buckingham‘s ∏ theorem - Hydraulic similitude - Model
analysis - Types of models.
Dimensionless numbers
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. R. K. Bansal, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2005
2. R. K. Rajput, A Text Book of Fluid Mechanics, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2006
References
1. P. N. Modi and S. M. Seth, Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics, Standard Book House, Delhi, 2010
2. V. L. Streeter and B. E. Wylie, Fluid Mechanics, McGraw Hill International Book Co., 2006
3. Yunus A. Cengal and John M. Cimbala, Fluid Mechanics – Fundamentals and Applications (In SI Units),
McGraw Hill International Book Co., 2004
11C305 DESIGN OF TIMBER AND MASONRY STRUCTURES

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart fundamental knowledge on the design of timber and masonry structures

 To make the students understand the design principles of timber and masonry structures
sustainability
1. Design of wooden members subjected to axial forces and bending moment etc
2. Design of masonry piers and walls
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Apply/ Evaluate 40 40 40 40
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Create 20 20 20 20
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1) Define a structure.
2) Classify the structural elements with an example.
3) What is called an allowable stress?
4) Classify the structures based on their properties.
5) Classify the structures based on the supporting systems with example.
6) Define the following terms:
(a) Strength (b) Stability (c) Stiffness
7) What are the various types of loads?
8) What is called as working stress method of design?
9) What is called as limit state method of design?
10) What is meant by masonry construction?
11) Group the timber based on young‘s modulus value.
12) What do you mean by bond?
13) Classify the types of bond.
14) What are the various types of bricks?
15) What is mean by a brick column pier?
16) What are the factors modifying the basic value?
17) What is meant by a slenderness ratio?
18) What is the value of effective thickness for cavity wall?
19) List out the Grades of timber.
†
20) Explain any three requirements for a bed plate.

21) Mention the codes usually adopted for core concrete in composite brick concrete pier and their
corresponding compressive stress values.
22) What is meant by the bearing capacity of soil?
23) What are the various grades available for timber according to the size of defect?
24) Write the formula for permissible bearing stress when the direction of stress is at an angle to the direction
of grain in any structural member.
25) What is meant by a notched beam?
26) What are the two main aspects of structural designing?
27) What are the advantages of using built-up column?
28) What is meant by flexural member?
29) What is the Nominal size of brick including mortar joint?
30) Mention the codes used for different structural materials.
31) What are the advantages of bolted connections?
32) Mention the types of nails used for connections.
33) What is the minimum tensile ultimate strength of common wire nails made up of mild steel?
34) What are the various types of nail resistances required in engineering practice?
35) What do you mean by clenching of nails?
36) List out the merits of clenching of nails.
37) List out the various types of arches.
38) What are the limitations of Fuller‘s formula for testing the stability of masonry?
39) What is a masonry arch?
40) What are the different types of joints used in timber construction?
41) What do you mean by fish plates?
42) Define a beam.
43) What do you by built-up column?
44) Define box column.
UNDERSTAND
1. Write the formula for calculating allowable stress.

2. Why it is needed to provide contraction and expansion joints in concrete?
3. Which of the factors affects the safe bearing capacity of soils?
4. Under what circumstances nailed joints are preferable in timber?
5. Classify the types of joint based on strength consideration.
6. Differentiate statically determinate and statically indeterminate structures.
7. Classify the timber based on location.
8. What is the value of factor of safety for masonry? Why the large factor of safety is adopted for masonry
structures?
9. Distinguish between flitched and deepened beam.
10. Classify the column according to its slenderness ratio value.
11. Differentiate ultimate limit state and serviceability limit state method.
12. What is the value of factor of safety for masonry? Why the large factor of safety is adopted for masonry
structures?
13. What is the value of safe bearing pressure for concrete grades of M10 and M15?
14. Why the effective height is same as the actual height as in case of columns?
15. What is the necessity of providing piers in case of designing of walls?
16. How the allowable bearing stress and the allowable compressive stress vary according to the direction of
grain in any structural member?
17. Differentiate built-up solid column and built-up hollow column.
18. What are extra checks other than conventional beam to be done for a notched beam?
19. Mention the principal factors for the depth of foundation.
20. What is the safe bearing capacity value when the earthquake forces are considered?
21. What are the various factors affecting the strength of timber?
22. What are the different types of loads acting in a structure?
APPLY/EVALUATE
1. How will you calculate the cross sectional area factor?

2. What is the value of load factor (KL) for different loading conditions?
3. Write the formula for calculating effective thickness in cavity walls?
4. The wall is stiffened by intersecting walls of 200mm thick at 3600 m c/c. How the design will be for the
interior wall?
5. How will you calculate the permissible stress for built up column?
6. For rectangular beam, how will you calculate the horizontal shear?
7. How will you design for spaced columns?
8. Write are the four basic steps necessary for designing a flexural beam.
9. Write the allowable deflection value for different types of beams.
10. Write the value of factors for different cross sections.
11. How the grouping of timber can be made based on their young‘s modulus values?
12. Write the formula for calculating allowable stress.
13. How will you calculate the cross sectional area factor?
14. What is the value of load factor (KL) for different loading conditions?
15. Write the formula for calculating effective thickness in cavity walls.
16. If the ratio of length to diameter increases, then what is the effectiveness of a bolt?
17. If the bearing stresses are non-uniform, what will happen for grip?
18. How will you calculate the bearing pressure, if the bolts bear at an angle to the direction of grain?
19. How will you design nail joint safely and economically for joint forces between 40 to 50 kN of hardwood?
20. Write the formula to calculate safe withdrawal resistance per nail.
21. How will you determine the allowable lateral strength?
22. Calculate the end thrust of the arch.
23. Which is the most convenient method for all type of loading in arches?
24. How will you calculate combined bending and direct stresses of a member?
ANALYZE
1. Analyze a column for its allowable load when it is subjected to the eccentricity of 100mm about major axis
of bending.
2. Determine the area and minimum depth of foundation for a column carrying a load of 700 kN including its
self weight. The safe bearing capacity of the soil is 110 kN/m2 and its unit weight is 16 kN/m2. Take angle
of repose as 300.
3. Check whether the line of thrust lies within middle third zone or not.
CREATE
1. Design the allowable axial load per m length of a 240 mm cavity wall with 40 mm cavity.
2. Design the load carrying capacity of a brick concrete pier of size 342 x 684 mm laterally restrained by wall
in both directions throughout the height. Assume it has a concrete core of 114 x 456 mm.
3. Design nail joint safely and economically for joint forces between 20 to 25 kN of softwood.
Unit I
Concepts of Structure
Definition and classification of structures - Structural systems - Basic structural requirements - Strength, stability
and stiffness - Design methods - Working stress method - Limit state method -Code of practice - Choice between
different structural materials - Masonry, timber, concrete and steel - Types of loads - Dead load - Live load -
Wind load – earthquake load.
Case studies of buildings
9 Hours
Unit II
Timber Structures
General - Factors affecting strength of timber - Permissible stresses - Bearing stress - Live load for design - Types of
timber joints - Design of rectangular beams - Design of tension members - Design of compression members of solid
and box sections - Design of bolted and nailed connections – Design of timber joists - Allowable stresses in tension,
compression and flexure
Design of timber trusses
9 Hours
Unit III
Design of Masonry Column
Design of permissible compressive stresses in masonry - Design of masonry column subjected to axial and
eccentric loading - Design of reinforced brick masonry - Design of composite brick masonry - Design of
masonry arches in building
Stability of masonry arches
9 Hours
Unit IV
Design of Hollow Block Masonry
Materials for Hollow Blocks as per IS 2185 – Size of the Hollow blocks – Tests on Hollow Blocks – Design and
Construction of Hollow Block Masonry Walls
Methods of Manufacturing Hollow Blocks
9 Hours
Unit V
Design of Masonry Wall
Types of walls - Design of solid load bearing wall for axial loads - Design of solid load bearing wall for eccentric
loads - - Design of wall with opening - Design of cavity wall - Design of stiffened and unstiffened wall
Design of masonry retaining wall.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. A.S. Arya, Design of Masonry and Timber Structures, Nemchand and Bros. Publishing, 2007
2. P. Dayaratnam, Brick and Reinforced Brick Structures, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd, 1987
References
1. B. C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Design of steel structures, Laxmi Publications (P)
Ltd, 2007
2. W. M. C McKenzie, Design of Structural Elements, Macmillan Publishers, 2010
3. IS: 1905 – 1980, Indian Standard Code of Practice for Structural Safety of Buildings, Masonry Walls,
Indian Standards Institution, 1981
4. IS: 883 – 1994, Code of Practice for Design of Structural Timber in Buildings, BIS New Delhi
5. IS: 2185 (Part I) – 1979, Indian Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units Part I Hollow and
Solid Concrete Blocks BIS New Delhi
6. IS: 2185 (Part II) – 1983, Indian Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units Part II, Hollow and
Solid Light Weight Concrete Blocks, BIS New Delhi
7. IS: 2185 (Part III) – 1984, Indian Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units, Part III Autoclaved
Cellular (Aerated) Concrete Blocks, BIS New Delhi
11C306 ARCHITECTURE AND URBAN PLANNING

3 0 0 3.0
 To provide a basic knowledge on architecture and urban planning.

 To provide basic knowledge on different types of plans, implementation and management for sustainable
development
sustainability
(l) an ability to perform economic analysis, quality checks, time/labour management and cost estimates related
to design, construction, operations and maintenance of systems in the civil technical specialties
1. Design of buildings with respect to architectural point of view

2. Assess and select the best urban layout plan
3. Prepare Environmental Impact Assessment for any civil project.
4. Better assessment of the proposals because of the cost-benefit analysis knowledge.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate - - - -
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Architecture.
2. Define aesthetics.
3. Define axis.
4. What are the basic elements of aesthetics?
5. What is meant by character in buildings?
6. Give a historical example for Aesthetic design.
7. What are the requirements for a good architecture?
8. Write a note on point.
9. Define symmetry.
10. What are forms?
11. What is rhythm?
12. Write a note on scale.
13. Define harmony
14. What is punctuation?
†
15. Define Anthropometry

16. What is unity?
17. Define Dominance.
18. What is proportion?
19. What is transformation?
20. Define contrast.
21. Define balance.
22. Define the basic elements of design.
23. Give an example for the architectural impact on buildings.
24. What are the principles of design?
25. State any four climate zones in India.
26. Define punctuation in architecture
27. State the principles of economic evaluation.
28. Mention the different economic evaluation techniques.
29. State the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of EIA.
30. Define cost-benefit ratio.
31. Mention the formula for calculating the Net Present Value.
32. Define cash flow analysis.
33. Mention the steps involved in the cash flow analysis.
34. What do you mean by long-term funds principle of cash flow analysis?
35. Define environmental management plan.
36. Name the various landscape design elements.
37. What is meant by site analysis?
38. What do you mean by bye-laws?
39. What is the necessity of bye-laws?
40. What are the serviceability requirements in the building?
41. What is the height of a standard Indian door?
42. What do you understand by integration of building services?
43. State the functions of climate in building design.
44. What are the basic fundamentals of architecture?
45. What do you mean by climax?
46. What do you mean by functional space?
47. Define circulation space.
48. Give examples of Indian cities that have adopted urban planning concepts.
49. State the importance of zoning in urban planning.
50. Name the various landscape design elements.
51. Tabulate the minimum off-street parking space suggested by NBC for different types of buildings.
52. State the percentages of different zones in a normal town.
53. State the objects of zoning.
54. Define gross density and net density.
55. Explain the principle of height zoning.
UNDERSTAND
1. Write a short note on Principles of Architecture.

2. Explain the importance of Architectural composition.
3. Explain the factors to be considered in the design of a building.
4. Explain the function of aesthetics in architectural design.
5. Differentiate between radial and bilateral symmetry.
6. What do you understand by unity as an aesthetic quality in building?
7. Write are the requirements for normal residential building?
8. Explain the importance of bye-laws.
9. Explain how the idea of harmony is expressed in buildings.
10. Describe the designing concept in Architecture?
11. Differentiate Traditional and Modern Architecture.
12. Describe salient features of Gothic Architecture.
13. Differentiate clearly between soft and hard landscape.
14. Differentiate Functional space and Circulation space.
15. Write a short note on Interior Design.

16. Explain how the composite climatic behaviour affects the building planning.
17. Explain in detail Renaissance Architecture.
18. What are the advantages of zoning?
19. Explain in detail the different types of zoning.
20. Discuss the process of site analysis in detail.
21. Explain the site studies and analyses that are employed in the effective design of an architectural project.
22. Explain in detail the surveys carried out prior to Development Plan.
23. Discuss various traffic surveys to be carried out for preparation of Development Plan.
24. Enlist principles of landscaping. Explain any two principles in detail.
25. Explain the role of landscape designer in Urban Planning.
26. Elaborate on stages of preparation of Development Plan as per MRTP Act, 1966.
27. Explain the concept of Garden City and its contribution in early planning efforts.
28. Elaborate on the planning concepts of neighbourhood.
29. Write a short note on Development plan and norms in UDPFI guidelines for the same.
30. Explain the importance of land use zoning in Development Plan.
31. Write short notes on various stages involved in development of a building plan.
32. Elaborate on the effects of topography on plan preparation.
33. List out the merits and demerits of B.O.T projects.
34. Compare the positive and negative impacts of transportation projects
35. Explain in detail the step by step procedure of economic evaluation
36. List out the various environmental impacts and mitigation measures taken in case of a transportation project
APPLY
1. Using the examples of residences, explain how space requirements, circulation and climate affect design.
Illustrate the arguments.
2. Explain how the idea of harmony, contrast, and climax are applied in traditional and modern buildings.
Compare the different kinds of usage.
3. Explain with neat sketches how anthropometrics are applied to determine the size and shape of rooms for
human activities.
4. Explain the planning considerations of a neighborhood with special reference to Indian cities
5. Explain in detail the application and importance of connectivity matrix in case of an educational institute.
6. Elaborate on the application and preparation of Environmental Impact Assessment for a transportation
project.
7. Discuss the effective use of different soft landscaping elements in screening and pollution control for a
sight long highway.
8. Explain the steps involved in preparation of landscape plan of an undulating site admeasuring 165 acres
along a canal.
9. Town planning scheme is very effective tool in the hands of Urban Planner. Explain in detail giving
examples.
10. How GIS can be applied in data collection, analysis and planning of a Town?
11. Elaborate on the application of satellite imagery in Planning.
12. How should a residential building be designed to derive maximum benefits from climatic agencies?
13. In an auditorium, in which direction should the doors open and why?
14. How the style and character of a building are realized in traditional and modern architecture?
15. Evaluate how the proportioning system influences the form of a building.
ANALYZE
1. Correlate between vasthushastra and functional plan.

2. How anthropometry is useful in building design?
3. Discuss and analyze how the aesthetic qualities of scale, balance, symmetry, and rhythm influence a
building design.
4. Analyze how the various building services are integrated in the architectural design of a building.
5. Discuss the relevance of theory of three magnets in Modern Urban Planning.
6. Discuss and examine the various building rules and regulations that are followed in town planning by
taking a case study of your town.
7. A single lane road 30 km long is to be widened to two lanes at a cost of Rs. 15 lakhs per km including al
improvements. The cost of operation of vehicles on the single lane road is Rs.2.00 per vehicle km and Rs.
1.50 per vehicle km for the improved facility. The average traffic may be assumed as 5000 vehicles per day
over the design period of 15 years. The interest rate is 9 percent per annum. The cost of maintenance is
Rs.10, 000 per km on the existing road and Rs.15, 000 per km on the improved road. Analyze whether the
investment is worthwhile.
8. A new link is to be proposed to connect two taluk head quarters. The length of the proposed major district
road is 35 km. the cost of construction is Rs. 40 lakhs per km. the vehicle operating costs, accident costs
and maintenance costs with and without the link for the project period is tabulated below. The discount rate
is 6%. Evaluate whether the project is economically worth for the investment.
Road user costs Accident costs Maintenance costs

Year With Without With Without With Without
widening widening widening widening widening widening
1 101.5 160.7 2.5 3.6 10.0 7.5
2 105.6 168.2 2.6 3.7 10.0 7.5
3 110.2 176.3 2.7 3.8 10.0 7.5
4 116.2 185.2 2.8 3.9 10.0 7.5
5 122.3 190.0 2.9 4.0 10.0 7.5
6 128.4 199.0 2.9 4.0 10.0 7.5
7 135.6 210.0 3.0 4.1 10.0 7.5
8 143.2 219.5 3.1 4.2 10.0 7.5
9 149.1 288.2 3.2 4.3 10.0 7.5
10 154.6 240.1 3.2 4.3 10.0 7.5
All the costs are in lakhs
Unit I
Architectural and Climate Responsive Design
Architectural design - An analysis - Integration of function and aesthetics - Introduction to basic elements and
principles of design - Factors that determine climate - Characteristics of climate types - Design for various climate
types.
Passive and active energy controls
9 Hours
Unit II
Building Types
Building types – Classification of residential, industries and public building - Planning concepts - Residential,
institutional, commercial and Industrial - Application of anthropometry and space standards - Building rules and
regulations - Building services. Layout regulations
Safety standards
9 Hours
Unit III
Urban Planning Process
Urban planning – Development plan – Needs, goals, COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) and contents – Factors to be
considered in development plan – collection of data – surveys – procedure for preparation – guidelines of
development plan – important measures and stages of development plan. Town planning – objects – principles –
necessity – forms – stages.
Plan implementation – Chandigarh case study
9 Hours
Unit IV
Urban Project Evaluation
Project evaluation - Economic evaluation [Benefit cost ratio method, Net present value and Internal rate of return –
problems] - Environmental impact assessment and Cash flow analysis
Basic introduction about Housing,, transportation and traffic improvement projects
9 Hours
Unit V
Development Management Systems
Planning standards – The basic frame work – distribution of land use – Infrastructure – Physical infrastructure –
Social infrastructure – Commercial activity – variations in norms and standards by size of settlement - Development
control rules – Zoning regulations - Building bye-laws.
Co-ordination between urban local bodies and other functional agencies such as water supply & sewerage boards,
housing boards including slum boards and planning authorities
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. VRA. Saathappan and K. Yogeshwari, Principles of Architecture, Raamalingaa Publication, 2005

2. M. Pratap Rao, Urban Planning, CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2005
References
1. Gallian B Arthur and Simon Eisner, The Urban Pattern, City Planning and Design, Affiliated Press Pvt.,
Ltd., New Delhi, 1995
2. Margaret Roberts, An Introduction to Town Planning and Planning Techniques, Hutchinson, London,
1990.
3. Francis D.K. Ching, Architecture: Form, Space and Order, VNR, N.Y., 1999
4. B. Givoni , Man Climate and Architecture , Applied Science, Barking ESSEX, 1982
5. Edward D. Mills, Planning the Architects Handbook , Butterworth London, 1995
6. Rangwala S C, Town Planning, Charotar Publishing House, 1987
11C307 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5
 To make the students understand the behavior of materials under various loading conditions, viz., tension,
compression, torsion and bending
 To know the impact strength and the hardness number of the given material
(b) an ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data
1. Design of any structural (or) machine components

2. Design of weigh bridges
3. Design of metallic pipes
4. Design of shaft
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tension and Torsion tests on mild steel rod

2. Shear test on mild steel rod
3. Compression test on brick and wood
4. Tests on open and closed coil helical springs
5. Izod and Charpy impact tests
6. Static bending test on metal beam
7. Determination of Brinell‘s Hardness Number
8. Determination of Rockwell‘s Hardness Number
9. Tests on thin cylinder
10. Demonstration on the variation of shear force and bending moment in a beam
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
Sl. No. Experiments Hours
1 Tension and Torsion tests on mild steel rod 12
2 Shear test on mild steel rod 6
3 Compression test on brick and wood 3
4 Tests on open and closed coil helical springs 6
5 Izod and Charpy impact tests 6
6 Static bending test on metal beam 3
7 Determination of Brinell‘s Hardness Number 3
8 Tests on thin cylinders 3
9 Demonstration on the variation of shear force and bending 3
moment in a beam
11C308 COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING PLAN AND DRAWING

0 0 3 1.5
 To make the students understand and learn various elements of Residential / Institutional / Workshop
buildings.
 To impart fundamental knowledge on AutoCAD to make the students draw truss structures, the plan,
elevation and sectional view of a building.
g) An ability to communicate effectively.
1. To know the various components of the different types of building.

2. To acquire knowledge of minimum size of the various elements of a building.
3. To draw a building plan for a given area.
4. To prepare an elevation and a sectional view of the given plan.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXERCISES
1.Develop a model of a Brick wall using basic commands

• Flemish Bond
• English Bond
• Header Bond
• Stretcher Bond
• Raking Bond
• Zigzag Bond
2. Create a model of a hexagonal, triangular shaped paver blocks for a given floor area
3. Joinery details for doors and windows
4. Plan, Elevation and Cross section of a
• Single- and Multi-storeyed residential buildings for a given plan
5. Steel Truss
6. Develop a 3 Dimensional model of a single storey single bay residential building for a given plan
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
Sl. No. Exercises Hours
1 Develop a model of a Brick wall using basic commands 3
2 Create a model of a hexagonal, triangular shaped paver blocks for a given floor area 6
3 Joinery details for doors and windows 10
4 Elevation and cross section for a single/multi storeyed residential building 10
5 Plan, elevation and cross section of multi – storeyed residential building 6
6 Plan, elevation and cross section of industrial building 6
7 Steel truss and its connection details 4
11C309 SURVEY PRACTICAL I

0 0 4 2.0
 To impart a basic knowledge on chain and compass traversing

 To impart knowledge on leveling and tachometry survey
(c) an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints
such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and
sustainability
1. Select a particular site for surveying.

2. Demonstrate the various functional aspects of surveying instruments.
3. Set perpendiculars and well conditioned triangles by chaining.
4. Solve the two point and three point problems.
5. Calculate the area and volume of earthwork.
6. Recommend the proper method for contouring.
7. Survey using theodolite and tachometry.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Aligning, Ranging and Chaining

2. Plane table surveying: Radiation, Intersection, Traversing
3. Plane table surveying: Resection – Two and Three point problems
4. Fly levelling using Dumpy and Tilting level
5. Check levelling
6. LS and CS
7. Repetation and Reiteration
8. Heights and distances - Single plane method.
9. Tacheometric Constants
10. Subtense system
Mini Project
Total: 60 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE

1 Aligning, Ranging and Chaining 6
2 Plane table surveying: Radiation, Intersection, Traversing 6
3 Plane table surveying: Resection – Two and Three point problems 12
4 Fly levelling using Dumpy and Tilting level 6
5 Check levelling 10
LS and CS
6 Heights and distances – single/double plane method. 10
7 Tachometry - tangential system - stadia system 5
8 Subtense system 5
11C401 / 11M401 / 11A401 NUMERICAL METHODS

(Common to CE, ME and AE)
3 1 0 3.5
 Acquire the knowledge of finding approximate solutions of algebraic, transcendental, differential and
integral equations by numerical methods and interpolating the values of a function using Lagrange‘s and
Newton‘s polynomial approximations
 Ability to find solution of initial and boundary value problems using multi step approximations and ability
to solve boundary value problems using finite difference methods

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

S. No Test I† Test II†
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Apply 60 60 60 60
4 Analyze/ Evaluate - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State the Fundamental theorem of algebra.

2. Define Algebraic and Transcendental equations.
3. Write the formula for Regula Falsi method .
4. What do you mean by Interpolation?
5. State the derivatives of Newton‘s Forward and Backward Interpolation formula.
6. Write the conditions for applying Trapezoidal and Simpson‘s rules.
7. Write the formula for two point and three point Gaussian quadrature.
8. Mention the multistep methods available for solving ordinary differential equation.
9. Write the Bender schmidt Scheme for solving one dimensional heat equation.
10. Write the explicit formula for one dimensional wave equation.
UNDERSTAND
1. What is a transcendental equation?

2. Write the condition of convergence of Iteration method
†
3. What is the order of convergence of Newton - Raphson method?

4. Write the differences between Direct and Iterative method
5. State the sufficient condition for solving Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel method
6. Using Lagrange‘s interpolation, find the polynomial through (0,0), (1,1) and (2,2)
7. Explain power method of finding the eigen values of a matrix
8. How will you find the solution for Laplace equation
9. Write Milne‘s & Adam‘s Predictor and Corrector formula
10. What are the methods for solving simultaneous algebraic equations
APPLY
1. Obtain by power method, the numerically largest eigen value of the matrix
 15  4  3 1
A    10 12  6 with the starting vector x  1 . Perform only 4 – iterations.
  (0)
 20 4  2 1

2. Explain briefly Gauss Elimination Iteration to solve simultaneous equations.
1
3. If f ( x)  , find the divided difference f(a,b).
x2
4. What is the relation between divided differences and forward differences ?
x: 6 7 9 12
5. Find the value of f ' (8) from the table given below
f ( x) : 1.556 1.690 1.908 2.158
6. The following data gives the velocity of a particle for 20- secs at an interval of 5-secs.
time (sec) : 0 5 10 15 20
Find the acceleration for the following data
velocity (m / s) : 0 3 14 69 228
1
,
7. If y = xy , y(1)=1, find y(1.1) using Taylor‘s method.
3
8. If y‘= x2+y2, y(0)=1 find y(0.1) by Euler‘s method.

9. For which points of x and y, the equation xfxx+yfyy=0, x>0, y>0 is elliptic.
10. Name at least two numerical methods that are used to solve one dimensional diffusion equation
Unit I
Solution of Equations and Eigen Value Problems
Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental equations by the method of False position – Newton- Raphson method-
Solution of system of linear equations : Gauss- elimination method and Gauss-Jordan method - Iterative method:
Gauss – Seidel method- Inverse of a matrix by Gauss-Jordan method. Eigen value of a matrix by power method.
9 Hours
Unit II
Interpolation and Curve Fitting
Newton ‗s Forward and Backward interpolation. Newton‘s Divided difference interpolation formula – Lagrange‘s
interpolation formula – Fitting of curves by the method of Least squares: Straight line,Parabolic curves and the
conversion of equations of the curves in the form of straight lines.
9 Hours
Unit III
Numerical Differentiation and Integration
Derivatives from difference table – Numerical differentiation using Newton ‗s forward and backward
interpolation formulae - Numerical integration by Trapezoidal and Simpson‘s 1/3 and 3/8 rules - Romberg‘s method
- Two and three point Gaussian quadrature formulae - Double integrals using Trapezoidal and Simpson‘s rules.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Initial Value Problems for Ordinary Differential Equations
Single step Methods : Taylor Series method for solving first and second order equations - Euler‘s and Modified
Euler‘s methods - Fourth order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order equations - Multistep methods –
Milne‘s and Adam‘s predictor and corrector methods.
9 Hours
Unit V
Boundary Value Problems
Finite difference solution for the second order ordinary differential equations- Finite difference solution for one
dimensional heat equation by implicit and explicit methods - one dimensional wave equation and two dimensional
Laplace‘s and Poisson‘s equations.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
MAT LAB: Invited Lectures on Mat lab and its applications on Numerical methods.
Text books
1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Numerical Methods, S.Chand and Co. New Delhi, 2009.
2. B.K. Moorthy, P.Geetha, Numerical Methods ,Tata McGraw-Hill Publication company Ltd, New Delhi
2010, First Edition
References
1. R. L Burden, and T. D Faries, Numerical Analysis, Seventh Edition, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., Singapore,
2002.
2. K. Sankara Rao , Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers, Third Ed.Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
3. C.F Gerald., and P.OWheatley, Applied Numerical Analysis, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education Asia, New
Delhi.2006.
4. T.Veerarajan, Numerical Methods with programs in C, Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication,co.Ltd, New Delhi ,2008.
11C402 MECHANICS OF DEFORMABLE BODIES – II

3 1 0 3.5
 To impart knowledge on deflection of statically determinate beams, ideal Columns and real columns.
 To determine the stresses due to unsymmetrical bending and understand various theories of failures.
1. Determine the deflection of beams

2. Design of beams and columns
3. Analysis of stress distribution in thin and thick cylinders
4. Discuss the various types of failures
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 60 60 60 60
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Evaluate - - - -
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is meant by hoop stress?

2. State Maxwell‘s reciprocal theorem.
3. What do you mean by unsymmetrical bending?
4. Define the term Poisson‘s ratio.
5. Define the term Bulk modulus.
6. What do you mean by composite bar?
7. Mention the effect of change of temperature in a composite bar.
8. State Castigliano‘s first theorem.
9. What is meant by Strain energy?
10. What is meant by point of contraflexure?
11. Write down Rankine-Gordon formula for eccentrically loaded columns.
12. Define Middle Third Rule.
13. What do you mean by triaxial state of stress?
14. Define principal stresses.
15. What is meant by principal plane?
16. State any four assumptions made in the analysis of stresses in curved bars.
17. What do you mean by unsymmetrical bending?
18. When will you use the simple flexure formula for curved beams?
19. State the assumptions in Winkler – Bach Analysis
†
20. What are the reasons for unsymmetrical bending?

21. The section modulus with respect to x-axis of a rectangle of width (b) and depth (d) is ________ and in
case of circle, the section modulus is _____
22. What do you mean by state of stress at a point?
23. What do you mean by octahedral plane?
24. Give the necessary condition for a pure state of shear.
25. List out any five important theories of failure.
26. State the theory of ―Energy of Distortion Theory‖.
27. State the theory of ―Maximum Elastic Strain Energy‖.
28. State the theory of ―Maximum Elastic Energy‖.
29. State the theory of ―Maximum Shear Stress Theory‖.
30. State the theory of ―Maximum Principal Stress Theory‖
31. Why theories of failure are necessary?
32. Define dilatation.
33. Define Column.
34. What are the major classifications of a column?
35. What do you mean by slenderness ratio?
36. What do you mean by effective length of a column?
37. What do you mean by radius of gyration?
38. What are the failure modes of columns?
39. What do you mean by buckling and buckling load?
40. What do you mean by real column?
41. Mention any one method of finding the critical load of a long column.
42. What are the assumptions involved in the derivation of Euler‘s critical load?
43. What is the influence of the assumptions of Euler on the load carrying capacity of a real column?
44. What do you mean by eccentricity?
45. Draw the relation between slenderness ratio of the column against the critical stress of the column.
46. List out the effective length (s) of column for different boundary conditions.
47. Why deflection of beams is needed for engineering applications like mechanical engineering?
48. Name the various methods of determining slope and deflection of beams.
49. What do you mean by flexural rigidity?
50. Define the term slope.
51. Define deflection.
52. List out the relationship exists between slope, deflection, bending moment and the load.
53. What is conjugate beam?
54. Define Shear Centre.
55. Define Fatigue.
56. What is Fatigue life?
UNDERSTAND
1. Derive a relation for strain energy due to shear

2. Write the equation giving maximum deflection in case of a simply supported beam subjected to udl over
the entire span.
3. Discuss the effect of crippling load (Pc) obtained by Eulers formula for short columns
4. Give the expression for finding deflection of closely coiled helical spring.
5. Give the equivalent length of a column for any two end conditions.
6. Find the principal stresses if the normal stresses σx and σy and shear stess σ act at a Point
7. Derive the Lame‘s equations for thick cylinder
8. Derive the formula to find the crippling load in a column of length l hinged at both ends.
9. Derive the expressions for Energy of distortion and Energy of dilatation?
10. Describe the boundary conditions that can be used for finding out the values of the constants of integration
in case of common type of beams.
11. Express the strength of a solid shaft
12. Briefly explain how the Winkler – Bach theory shall be used to determine the stresses in a curved beam.
13. Write short notes on Fatigue and fracture
14. Write short notes on Stress concentration.
15. Explain the following:
(i) Maximum principal stress theory

(ii) Maximum principal strain theory
(iii) Maximum strain energy theory and
(iv) Distortion energy theory.
16. Derive Euler‘s crippling load for the following cases :
(i) Both ends hinged.
(ii) One end is fixed and other end free.
APPLY
1. A simply supported beam of span ( l ) carries an uniformly distributed load of W per unit length over the
entire span. Apply Castigliano‘s theorem determine
(i) The mid-span deflection of the beam
(ii) The slope at the left support
2. Differentiate between thin and thick cylinders.
3. Applying the Castigliano‘s theorem, determine the deflection of the free end of the cantilever beam. A is
fixed and B is free end. Take EI = 4.9 MNm2.
4. A column with one end hinged and other end fixed has a length of 5 m and a hollow circular cross-section
of outer dia 100 mm and wall thickness 10 mm. If E = 1.60 x 105 N/mm2 and crushing stress σc = 350 N/
mm2, find the load that the column may carry with a factor of safety of 2.5 according to Euler theory and
Rankine – Gordon theory.
2
5. A bar of cross section 600 mm is acted upon by axial compressive forces of 100 kN at each end of the bar.
O
Using Mohr‘s circle, find the normal and shearing stresses on a plane inclined at 30 to the direction of
loading. Neglect the possibility of buckling of the bar.
6. Consider a rectangular steel bar 40 mm x 50 mm in cross section, pinned at each end and subject to axial
compression. The bar is 2 m long and E = 200 GPa. Determine the buckling load using Euler‘s formula.
7. A 2m long pin ended column of square cross section. Assuming E = 12.5 GPa, σ allow = 12 MPa for
compression parallel to the grain, and using a factor of safety of 2.5 in computing Euler‘s critical load for
buckling, determining the size of the cross section if the column is to safely support P = 200 kN.
8. A boiler of 800 mm diameter is made up of 10 mm thick plates. If the boiler is subjected to an internal
pressure of 2.5 MPa, determine circumferential and longitudinal stress.
9. Determine the principal moments of inertia for an angle section 80 mm x 80 mm x 10 mm.
10. A thick cylinder has diameter 1.2 m and thickness 100 mm is subjected to an internal fluid pressure 15
N/mm2. Sketch the hoop stress distribution.
11. The state of stress at a certain point in a strained material. Calculate (i) principal stresses (ii) inclination of
the principal planes (iii) Maximum shear stress and its plane.
12. Determine the horizontal and vertical deflection of the end B of the thin curved beam. Take E = 200
GN/m2, width and thickness of the beam 10 mm and 5 mm respectively. P = 2 N.
13. A Steel fixed beam AB of span 6 m is 60 mm wide and 100 mm deep. The support B sinks down by 6 mm.
Fine the fixing moments at A and B. Take E = 200 GPa.
14. A simply supported beam of span 8 m carries two concentrated loads of 20 kN and 30 kN at 3 m and 6 m
from left support. Calculate the deflection at the centre by strain energy principle
15. The external diameter of a hollow shaft is twice the internal diameter. It is subjected to pure torque and it
attains a maximum shear stress (τ). Show that the strain energy stored per unit volume of the shaft is 5 τ2 /
16C. Such a shaft is required to transmit 5400 kW at 110 r.p.m. with uniform torque, the maximum stress
not exceeding 84 MN/m2. Determine,
(i) The shaft diameter
(ii) The strain energy stored per m3. Take C = 90 GN/m2.
Unit I
Deflection of Statically Determinate Beams
Governing differential equation – Macaulay‘s method – Moment area method – Conjugate beam method – Strain
e nergy method.
Newmark’s method
9 Hours
Unit II
Columns and Struts
Columns – Slenderness ratio - Calculation of stresses in short columns due to axial load and uni-axial and biaxial
bending moments - Core of the section - Buckling load of long columns - Euler‘s theory – Different end
conditions - Rankine‘s formula – Straight line formula
Secant formula for columns subjected to eccentric loading
9 Hours
Unit III
Thick Walled Cylinders and Curved Beams
Thick walled cylinders – Lame‘s equations – Hoop stress and radial stress distribution – Compound cylinders –
shrink fit. Curved beams – Stresses due to bending by Winkler Bach theory – Rectangular, trapezoidal, circular
solid sections – Crane Hook Problems
Stresses in Chain Links and Proving Ring
9 Hours
Unit IV
Shear Centre and Unsymmetrical Bending
Shear flow in thin walled beam cross section – Shear centre of mono/symmetric open sections – Hollow thin
walled torsion members – Single and multi connected sections - Symmetrical and unsymmetrical bending –
Bending stresses in beams subjected to unsymmetrical bending
Change in direction of neutral axis and simple problems
9 Hours
Unit V
Theories of Elastic Failure
Types of Failure: Brittle and ductile – Maximum principal stress theory – Maximum Principal strain theory –
Maximum strain energy theory – Maximum shear stress theory – Mohr‘s theory – simple problems
Octahedral Shear Stress Theory
9 Hours
Textbooks
1. S. Rajput, Strength of Materials, S. Chand & Co., 2006

2. R. K. Bansal, A Textbook of Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications, 2010
References
1. P. Boresi, F. B. Seeli and J. P. Smith, Advanced Mechanics of Materials, John Wiley & Sons, 1993
2. D. S. Bedi, Strength of Materials, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., 1984
3. C. Punmia, Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications, 1992
11C403 SURVEY II
3 0 0 3.0
 To make the students understand the basic knowledge in designing curves.

 To impart knowledge on the application of various electronic instruments in surveying.
 To make them understand the probable error and its correction factor in surveying.
sustainability
COURSE LEARNING OUTCOME (CLO)
1. Design of horizontal and vertical curves for a highways and roadways
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 40 40 40 40
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Evaluate - - - -
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Name the different types of curves.

2. List the application of electronic theodolite.
3. Write the basic principles of remote Sensing and GIS.
4. State the application of GPS and its working principle.
5. What is triangulation Survey?
6. Name the different types of signals.
7. What is Level Net?
8. What are the fundamental concepts of remote sensing?
9. Define Celestial Sphere.
10. What is meant by ―Hour Circle‖?
11. Define Spherical Excess.
12. What is most probable value?
13. Define Altitude.
14. Define Latitude.
15. Define Hour Angle.
16. Define Azimuth.
17. What are the corrections to the observed altitude of sun?
†
UNDERSTAND
1. When will you prefer chain offset method in designing a horizontal curve?
2. When do you apply Curvature and Refraction Corrections?
3. How will you determine the position of a celestial body?
4. Does the total station usage increase the working speed?
5. Why do we have a base line reference in Triangulation Survey?
6. Under what circumstance satellite station is preferred.
7. What principle you adopt in determining the discharge of a river.
8. Where do the principle of photogrammetric surveying applied.
APPLY
1. Design a horizontal curve for a highway with the radius.

2. Design a topographic map by classifying the types of soil and available natural resources.
Unit I
Surveying Techniques and Curves
Horizontal curves – Elements of simple curve – Setting out with chain and tape with theodolites by deflection
angles – Obstruction in curve ranging, compound and reverse curve (Parallel tangent only) – Transition curve –
Setting out of combined curve by Theodolites - Vertical curves – summits and sags – setting out vertical curve
by tangent corrections.
Different kinds, functions and requirements of transition curves - uses and advantages of electronic theodolites
9 Hours
Unit II
Control Surveying
Working from whole to part - Horizontal and vertical control methods - Triangulation - Signals - Base line -
Satellite station - Reduction to centre - Trignometric levelling – Corrections – Curvature and refraction - Single
and reciprocal observations - Modern trends – Bench marking – Trilateration.
Triangulation instruments and accessories
9 Hours
Unit III
Survey Adjustments
Errors - corrections - Classification of errors - True and most probable values - weighted observations - Method
of equal shifts - Principle of least squares - Normal equation - Correlates - Level nets - Adjustment of simple
triangulation networks-Principle of electronic theodolites - electromagnetic distance measurement.
Sources and precautions of errors
9 Hours
Unit IV
Astronomical Surveying
Celestial sphere - Motion of sun and stars - Apparent altitude and corrections - Celestial co-ordinate systems -
Different time systems - Nautical almanac - Practical astronomy - Field observations and calculations for
azimuth of a line - Astronomical terms and definitions
Star constellations
9 Hours
Unit V
Advances in surveying
Basic concept of hydrographic surveying – Tides – MSL – Location of soundings - Sounding methods – Three point
problem – Strength of fix – Sextants and station pointer – River surveys – Measurement of current and discharge –
Photogrammetry – Introduction only – Basic concept of terrestial and aerial photographs Stereoscopy – Definition
of parallax – Basic concept of Cartography and Cadastral surveying - Electronic Total Station- Basic Concepts of
Remote Sensing - GIS and GPS
Example using Total station
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. B.C. Punmia, Surveying, Vols. II & III, Laxmi Publications, 2005
References
1. R. Subramanian, Surveying and Levelling, Oxford university Press, 2007

2. T. P. Kanetkar, and Kulkarni, Surveying and Levelling, Vol. I and II, United Book Corporation, 1994
11C404 SOIL MECHANICS

3 0 0 3.0
 To make the students gain adequate knowledge on the engineering properties of soils
 To make them know the significance of the soil properties
1. Determine the properties of the given soil sample

2. Determine the suitability of soil for building construction
3. Analyze the stability of slopes
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 60 60 60 60
4 Analyze - - -- -
5 Evaluate - - - -
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define void ratio and porosity of soil.

2. Write down the relation between void ratio and porosity.
3. What is a block diagram?
4. What are all the methods available to determine the water content of a soil in laboratory?
5. How would you determine the bulk density of a soil specimen in a laboratory?
6. What are the main index properties of a coarse grained soil?
7. State stoke‘s law.
8. What is relative density?
9. What is particle size distribution curve?
10. Define liquid limit.
11. List out different types of soil water.
12. Define effective stress and neutral stress.
13. What are all the clay minerals?
14. State Darcy‘s law.
15. What are different methods for determination of the co-efficient of permeability in a laboratory?
16. What is a flow net?
17. Define co-efficient of permeability in a soil mass.
18. List the factors affecting permeability of soils.
†
19. What is a quick sand phenomenon?

20. Give the relation between seepage velocity and discharge velocity.
21. Define compaction.
22. What are the factors that affect compaction?
23. What are the different methods of compaction adopted in the field?
24. What is a compaction curve?
25. What is the coefficient of consolidation?
26. Write the assumptions of Terzaghi‘s theory of consolidation.
27. What is meant by over consolidation ratio?
28. Define preconsolidation pressure.
29. Give the relation between dry density and bulk density of soil.
30. Define isochrones.
31. Give any two assumptions of Boussinesq‘s stress distribution.
32. Define pressure bulb.
33. What is Newmark‘s influence chart?
34. List different tests to determine shear strength parameters.
35. State Mohr coloumbs equation for determination of shear strength of soils both for total and effective stress
conditions.
36. Define shear strength of soil.
37. What are the factors influencing the shear strength of soil?
38. What is pore pressure parameter?
39. What is stress path?
40. Define isobar.
41. What are different factors of safety used in the stability of slopes?
42. What are different types of slope failure?
43. Define stability number.
44. Write short notes on slope protection measures.
45. What are finite slopes?
46. What are the three conditions for which stability analysis of an earth dam is carried out?
47. What are the assumptions that are generally made in the analysis of the stability of slopes?
48. What is critical height?
49. What are all the methods available to analyse the stability of slopes?
50. What is meant by rotational failure and its types?
UNDERSTAND
1. State the conditions to classify coarse grained soil by IS method.

2. How would you determine the bulk density of a soil in field?
3. State the various corrections required for a hydrometer reading. How these corrections are determined?
4. What is the use of classification of soils?
5. If the liquidity index of a soil is zero, find its consistency index.
6. What are the three most common clay minerals? Which one usually causes the most problems for
engineers?
7. How would you construct the flow net when the soil is anisotropic?
8. What is the effect of surcharge and the capillary action the effective stress?
9. How would you determine the average permeability of a soil deposit consisting of a number of layers?
10. Write the uses of flow net? How would you determine the quantity of seepage from flow net?
11. Differentiate between compaction and consolidation and what type of soil will undergo larger
consolidation.
12. State the components of settlement and its predominance soil type.
13. What is O.M.C, explain its practical significance.
14. What are different causes of preconsolidation in soils? What is the effect of preconsolidation on the
settlement?
15. What is the effect of compaction on the engineering properties of the soil? How would you decide whether
the soil should be compacted the dry of optimum or the wet of optimum?
16. What do you understand by contact pressure? Draw the contact pressure distribution diagram for flexible
and rigid footings on sand and clayey soils.
17. What is unconfined compression test? What are its advantages over a triaxial test?
18. Sketch different types of stress paths that can be obtained in a triaxial test.
19. What do you understand by geostatic stresses? How are these determined?
20. Discuss the shear characteristics of cohesionless soils and cohesive soils.
21. Show by an example, the effect of sudden drawdown on stability of slopes. How is stability determined?
22. Differentiate between slope failure and base failure. When does each of the above type occur?
23. How a slope is analyzed using Swedish circle method? Derive an expression for the factor of safety.
24. Explain how factor of safety is obtained for a finite slope made of purely cohesive soil by total stress
method.
APPLY
1. A specimen of saturated undisturbed clay has the mass of 1590 gm and 1098 gm after drying. Determine its
water content, and then find out its void ratio and porosity. The specific gravity of the clay particles was
2.70.
2. The Atterberg limits for a clay soil used as for filling an earth dam are liquid limit 60 %, plastic limit 40 %
and shrinkage limit 25 %. If a specimen of the soil of volume 10cc at the liquid limit has a volume of 6.5cc
when dried, what would be the specific gravity of the soil particles?
3. Sketch the variation in total stress, effective stress and pore water pressure up to a depth of 6m below
ground level given the following data. The water table is 2m below the ground level. The dry unit weight of
the soil is 17 KN/m3, water content is 12 %, and specific gravity is 2.65. What would be the change in these
stresses, if water table drops by 1 m?
4. Find the average horizontal and vertical permeabilities of a soil mass made up of three horizontal layers.
The first and second layers have the same thickness of 0.5 m each. The third layer is 1.0 m thick. The
coefficients of permeability of the first, second and third layers, respectively are 1×10 -3, 2×10-2, and 5×10-4
cm/sec.
5. A 8m thick clay layer with single drainage settles by 120 mm in 2 years. The co-efficient of consolidation
for the clay was found to be 6×10-3 cm2/s. calculate the likely ultimate consolidation settlement and find out
how long it will take to undergo 90% of the settlement.
6. For a soil with a specific gravity of grains 2.65, determine the dry density at (i) a moisture content of 15 %
with 80 %; (ii) a moisture content of 12 % with 85 % saturation.
7. Undrained Triaxial tests are carried out on 4 identical specimen of clay and the following results are
obtained.
Cell pressure (KN/m2) 50 100 150 200
Deviator stress (KN/m2) 340 430 540 620
Pore pressure (KN/m2) 4.8 9 11 17
Determine the value of effective angle of shearing resistance and cohesion intercept by drawing modified
failure envelope.
8. A concentrated load of 30 KN acts on the surface of a homogeneous soil mass of large extent. Find the
stress intensity at a depth of 8m and (i) directly under the load; (ii) at a horizontal distance of 6m.
9. Compute the factor of safety of a slope of infinite extent having angle of slope with horizontal = 29°. The
slope consists of a soil, having effective values of c= 0 KN/m2; and Ф =32°.
10. Compute the safe height for an embankment rising at angle of 60° to the horizontal, and to be made with a
soil having unit weight of 20KN/m3, Ф = 15°, and cohesion c = 20 KN/m2. Factor of safety may be
considered as 2.5. Make use of Taylor‘s stability chart.
Unit I
Introduction
Nature of soils - Phase diagrams – Basic definitions and inter--relationships - Index properties of soils and their
determinations: Specific gravity - Water content - Density –Field test - Relative density - Stoke's law - applications
- Sieve analysis - Particle size distribution - Sedimentation analysis - Consistency of soils – Atterberg limits and
indices - Classification of soils: Necessity – Classification based on BIS classification- Field Identification of Soils
Problems encountered in different types of soils
9 Hours
Unit II
Soil Water and Water Flow
Soil water – Various forms – Capillary flow – Suction – Effective stress concept – Total - Neutral and effective
stress distribution in soils - Flow of water through soils - Darcy's law; Assumptions and validity - Permeability -
Coefficient of permeability – Laboratory test and Field test - Factors affecting permeability: Permeability of
stratified deposits of soils - Seepage - Laplace equation – Introductin to Flow nets.
Quick sand phenomena
9 Hours
Unit III
Compressibility of Soils
Compaction – Factors affecting compaction - Effect of compaction on soil properties - Proctor and modified Proctor
tests - Zero air void lines - Field compaction and its control - Proctor's needle Consolidation - Fundamental
definitions - Spring analogy - Terzaghi's one dimensional consolidation theory – Assumptions, limitations and
applications - Pre-consolidation pressure and its determination - Normally, under and over consolidated soils -
Laboratory consolidation test and determination of consolidation characteristics of soils
Case studies on failure of structures due to settlements
9 Hours
Unit IV
Shear Strength
Stresses in soils: Boussinesq's and Wester Guard's theories of stresses due to concentrated loads - Circular loads -
Rectangular load - Strip load - New Mark's chart - Pressure bulbs - Contact pressure - Shear strength of Soils -
Concept of shear strength - Mohr - Coulomb theory - Measurement of shear parameters - Direct shear - Unconfined
compression – Triaxial - Drained and un-drained conditions - Vane shear tests
Factors affecting shear strength of soils and shear parameters.
9 Hours
Unit V
Stability of Slopes
Failure mechanism of slopes – slopes – types – Total and effective stress analysis – Finite slopes - Stability analysis
for purely cohesive and c – ø soils – Method of slices– Friction circle method – Modified Bishop‘s method –
Taylor‘s Stability number – Slope protection methods – Stabilization methods
Case studies – Methods for improving the stability of slopes
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. B. C. Punmia, Soil Mechanics and Foundations, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007
References
1. Alam Singh, Soil Engineering in Theory and Practice, Asia Publishing House, Bombay, 2003
2. Braja M. Das, Principles of Geotechnical Engineering, Thomson Brooks/Cole, Australia, 2005
3. Dr. K.R. Arora, Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Standard Publishers Distributors, Delhi,
2005
11C405 APPLIED HYDRAULICS AND HYDRAULIC MACHINERY

3 0 0 3.0
 To disseminate the knowledge among the students in the area of open channel flow measurements
 To impart the knowledge on the analysis and design of water turbines and pumps
 At the end of the course the students will be able to design pumps for the given pressure requirement
 Determine the capacity of pump required for water supply and sewage schemes
(c) an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such as
economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability
1. Understand the various types of open channel flow

2. Determine cross sections of different types of channels
3. Creation of hydraulic jumps and its advantages
4. Analyze the performance of turbines and pumps under different operating conditions
5. Design the turbines and pumps
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 60 60 60 60
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List the various types of flow.

2. What is meant by open channel flow?
3. Define Hydraulics.
4. Define supercritical flow.
5. Define specific energy.
6. What do you mean by specific energy curve?
7. What is meant by conveyance of the channel?
8. Define sub critical flow.
9. What is meant by wetted perimeter?
10. What are the possible types of flow in open channel with respect to space and time?
11. Define critical depth.
12. Define critical velocity.
13. What do you know about uniform and non uniform flow?
14. State the formula for determining the value of roughness co-efficient using Manning‘s Equation
15. Write down the Chezy‘s formula for determining velocity of flow in an open channel.
†
16. Define the term most economical section of the channel.

17. List out the instrument used for measuring the velocity in open channel.
18. What are the methods used for finding gradually varying flow profile?
19. What are the types of flow profile?
20. Define afflux.
21. What do you know by drop down curve?
22. Define length of backwater curve.
23. Define hydraulic jump.
24. What are hydraulic machines and thermal turbo machines?
25. Write down the conditions of most economical circular channel with maximum velocity.
26. List the instrument used to measure open channel flow.
27. Define back water.
28. Define length of backwater curve.
29. Define gradually varying flow.
30. Define rapidly varying flow.
31. What do you mean by turbine?
32. What is known by governing of a turbine?
33. Define Hydraulic Efficiency.
34. Define mechanical efficiency.
35. What are the types of characteristic curves?
36. What is meant by impulse turbine?
37. What is meant by Reaction turbine?
38. Define axial flow turbine.
39. What is the use of draft tube?
40. What is specific speed of the turbine?
41. How pumps are classified?
42. Define cavitations.
43. Define multistage pump.
44. What is Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH)?
45. Write the manometric efficiency of the pump.
46. What is the minimum speed for starting the centrifugal pump?
47. What do you know about Hub or Boss?
48. What is the purpose of an air vessel fitted in the pump?
49. What is meant by indicator diagram?
50. What is separation of reciprocating pump?
UNDERSTAND
1. How will you express the specific energy for a wide rectangular channel with depth of flow d and velocity
of flow V?
2. Compare the open channel flow with pipe flow.
3. Derive an expression for the velocity distribution for viscous flow through a circular pipe.
4. Distinguish between specific force and specific energy in detail.
5. What do you understand by a most economical section of a channel? Derive the condition of most
economical section for a trapezoidal channel.
6. Explain in detail various gradually varied flow profiles in mild and steep channels.
7. Discuss the assumptions made in the derivation of dynamic equation for gradually varing flow.
8. Explain with a neat sketch M1, M2 and M3 profile for a gradually varied flow.
9. Derive an expression for the discharge through a channel by chezy‘s formula.
10. Derive an expression for critical depth and critical velocity.
11. Differentiate between Steady and unsteady flow
12. Find an expression for loss of energy head for a hydraulic jump.
13. Explain the classification of hydraulic jumps.
14. Differentiate between alternate depths and sequent depths.
15. Obtain the expression for the work done per second by water on the runner of a reaction turbine.
16. Draw the Characteristic curve of the turbine.
17. Give the range of specific speed values of the Kaplan turbine.
18. Discuss the function of various main components of pelton wheel with neat sketches.
19. Explain Gross head and Net head.

20. Differentiate between the turbines and pumps.
21. Discuss in brief how and when separation of flow takes place in a reciprocating pump.
22. Differentiate between the volute casing and vortex casing for the centrifugal pump.
23. Explain the working principle of Hydraulic press.
24. What is a Hydraulic intensifier?
25. Why are centrifugal pumps used sometimes in parallel and sometimes in series?
APPLY
1. An open channel is to be constructed of trapezoidal section and with side slopes 1 vertical to1.5 horizontal.
Find the proportions between bottom width and depth of flow for minimum excavation. If the flow is to be
2.7 m3/sec, calculate the bottom width and depth of flow assuming C = 44.5 and the bed slope as 1 in 4000.
2. A rectangular open channel has the following details: —
(1) Discharge — 16m3/sec.
(2) Bed width = 10 m
(3) Depth of water = 1.0 m.
Find :
(i) Specific Energy
(ii)Critical depth
(iii) Critical velocity
(iv) Minimum specific energy required for this discharge.
3. A channel of trapezoidal section has sides sloping at 60° with the horizontal and a bed slope of 1 in 800
conveys a discharge of 12 m3/sec. Find the bottom width and depth of flow for most economical section.
Take Chezy's constant C = 70.
4. A rectangular channel 3.6 m wide had badly damaged surfaces with Manning's n = 0.030. As a first phase
of repair, its bed was lined with concrete with n = 0.015. If the depth of the flow remains same at 1.2 m
before and after the repair, what is the increase of discharge obtained as a result of repair?
5. A rectangular channel 2.5 m wide carries a uniform .flow rate of 7.3 m3/s at a depth of 1.6 m. If a smooth
hump of height 0.13 m is constructed at a certain location on the channel bed, determine the change in
water surface elevation. Also compute the maximum permissible hump height if the upstream depth is not
be altered.
6. A rectangular channel conveying a discharge of 30 m3/sec is 12 m wide with a bed slope of 1 in 6000 and
N = .025. The depth of flow at a section is 1.50. Find how far upstream or downstream of this section, the
depth of flow will be 2.0 mts. Use step method
7. A turbine is to operate under a head of 25 m at 200 rpm. The discharge is 9 m 3/sec. If the efficiency is 90%,
determine:
(i)Specific speed of the machine
(ii)Power generated
(iii)Type of turbine
(iv) Performance under a head of 20 mts.
8. A hydraulic turbine develops 880 kW under a head of 20 m and gives an efficiency of 90%. Calculate the
specific speed of the turbine. Calculate the power generated if the head is reduced to 15 m. Assume N =
400 rpm.
9. A single acting reciprocating pump runs at 60 r.p.m. The diameter of the plunger is, 1,5 cm and crank
radius is 15 cm. The suction pipe is 10 cm in diameter and 5 m long. Calculate maximum permissible value
of suction lift Hs if separation takes place at 2.6 m of water absolute.
10. A centrifugal pump lifts water against a static head of 40 m, of which 4 m is suction lift. The suction and
delivery pipes are both 15 cm diameter; the head loss in a suction pipe is 2.3 m and in the delivery pipe is
7.4 m. The impeller is 42 cm diameter and 2.5 cm wide al the mouth, it revolves at 1200 r.p.m. and its
effective vane angle it exist is 35°. If mano = 82% and 0 = 72% determine the discharge delivered by the
pump and power required to drive the pump.
11. Why is it that the speed of a reciprocating pump without air vessels is not high?
12. What would happen if cavitations occur in centrifugal pump?
13. What factors decide whether Kaplan, Francis or a pelton type turbine would be used in a hydroelectric
project?
14. How do the losses in the draft tube effect the pressure at runner exit?
15. Analyse the force on a sluice gate when the discharge is under submerged conditions.
16. How does the roughness of channel affect the chezy‘s constant?
17. What is the purpose of providing bed slope in open channel?
Unit I
Open Channel Flow
Open channel flow - Regime of flow - Velocity distribution in open channel - Wide open channel -Specific
energy - Critical flow and its computation.
Types of flow
9 Hours
Unit II
Uniform Flow
Uniform flow - Velocity measurement - Manning's and Chezy's formula problems - Determination of roughness
coefficients - Determination of normal depth and velocity - Most economical sections - Non-erodible channels.
9 Hours
Unit III
Varied Flow
Dynamic equation of gradually varied flow - Characteristics of flow profiles - Drawdown and backwater curves -
Profile determination - Graphical integration, direct step, standard step method - Hydraulic jump - types - energy
dissipation - Surges - Surge through channel transitions.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Turbines
Application of momentum principle - Impact of jets on plane and curved plates - Turbines - Radial flow turbines
- Axial flow turbines - Impulse and reaction turbines – Specific speed and characteristic curves.
Field visits to Power plants
9 Hours
Unit V
Pumps and Hydraulic Devices
Centrifugal pumps - Multistage pumps - Minimum speed to start the pump – Jet pumps - Specific speed and
characteristic curves - Reciprocating pumps - Negative slip - Indicator diagram - Functions of air vessels -
Hydraulic press - Hydraulic accumulator
Functions of air vessels
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. R. K. Rajput, A Text Book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, S. Chand and Co, Ltd., New Delhi,
2006
2. R. K. Bansal, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2005
References
1. P. N. Modi and S. M. Seth, Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics, Standard Book House, Delhi, 2010
2. K. Subramanya, Flow in Open Channels, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2009
3. Ven Te Chow, Open Channel Hydraulics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2009
11C406 HYDROLOGY
3 0 0 3.0
 To enhance the knowledge on the various components of hydrologic cycle

 To impart knowledge on spatial and temporal distribution of water availability in any region
 At the end of the course the students will be able to estimate the rainfall and ground water flow
sustainability
1. Estimate the various methods of recording the rainfall

2. Perform measurement of water in a river basin e.g. river flow, weather stations
3. Analyse data from multiple sources to construct a water balance model
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Bloom’s Taxonomy Model Semester End

(New Version) Examination† Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 50 50 60 60
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define the term precipitation.

2. What are the common forms of precipitation?
3. What are the types of rain gauging stations?
4. Name the commonly used recording rain gauges.
5. What is point rainfall?
6. Give an equation for determining PMP.
7. What are the drawbacks of non recording rain gauging stations?
8. What are the advantages of recording rain gauges?
9. What are the types of precipitation?
10. What is intensity duration graph?
11. What are the factors affecting infiltration rate of soil?
12. What is meant by evaporation?
13. Define pan coefficient.
14. What are the methods of reducing reservoir evaporation?
15. What is an infiltrating capacity curve?
16. What are the factors affecting evaporation?
†
17. What are the analytical methods for determining of lake evaporation?
18. What is ɸ index?
19. Define the term W index.
20. What is meant by infiltration capacity?
21. What is direct runoff?
22. What are the parts of total runoff or direct runoff?
23. Explain base flow.
24. Define a hydrograph.
25. What are the uses of a hydrograph?
26. What is meant by precipitation excess?
27. What is effective rainfall?
28. What are the parts or elements of a flood hydrograph?
29. What is synthetic unit hydrograph?
30. The recession curve is sometimes called the depletion curve. Why?
31. What are the uses and applications of unit hydrograph?
32. What is meant by flood routing?
33. What are the types of flood routing?
34. What is reservoir routing?
35. What is channel routing?
36. List the uses of flood routing.
37. In the Muskingum storage equation, what do the parameter k and x represent?
38. What are the forms of storage in a channel reach?
39. What is the importance of flood peak studies?
40. Define attenuation and lag time.
41. Define standard project flood (SPF).
42. What is an aquifer?
43. What is an aquitard?
44. What is an aquifuge?
45. What is an aquiclude?
46. What is a confined aquifer?
UNDERSTAND
1. Distinguish between hydrograph and hyetograph.

2. Compare the orographic with convective precipitation.
3. How precipitation is measured and lists the errors that occur in the instruments of precipitation?
4. Explain briefly with neat sketch of ‗Hydrologic cycle‘.
5. Discuss in detail about non recording rain gauge.
6. Explain in detail about the evaporation process.
7. Discuss briefly the various abstractions from precipitation.
8. Distinguish between depression storage and interception.
9. Discuss the various factors affecting the evapotranspiration process.
10. Compare simple infiltration meter with ring type infiltrometer.
11. How will you classify the flood routing?
12. Explain the energy budget method of estimating evaporation from lake.
13. Why is base flow separated from the flood hydrograph in the process of developing a unit hydrograph?
14. Explain the procedure of using a unit hydrograph to develop the flood hydrograph due to a storm in a
catchment.
15. Distinguish between D- hour unit hydrograph and Instantaneous Unit Hydrograph.
16. Explain a procedure of deriving a synthetic unit hydrograph for a catchment by using Snyder‘s method.
17. Distinguish between hydraulic and hydrologic method of flood routing.
18. How does flood routing through river channel differ from that of reservoir?
19. Explain the basic equation for flood routing..
20. Explain the steps involved in the Muskingum equation in order to determine the value of outflow discharge.
21. Discuss the factors affecting the runoff co efficient C in rational formula.
22. Discuss the geological formation in India which have potential as aquifers.
23. Explain the Perched water table.
24. Explain the behaviour of water level in wells in confined aquifers due to changes in the atmospheric
pressure.
25. Discuss the principle of recuperation test of an open well.
APPLY
1. For a station A, the recorded annual 24 h maximum rainfall is given in the table below. Estimate the 24 h
maximum rainfall with return periods of 13 and 50 years and the probability of a rainfall of magnitude
equal to or exceeding 10 cm occurring in 24 h at station A.
Year 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961
Rainfall 13 12 75 14.3 16 9.6 8 12.5 11.2 8.9 8.9 7.8
Year 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971
Rainfall 9 10.2 8.5 7.5 6 8.4 10.8 1.6 8.3 9.5
2. A catchment has six raingauge stations. In a year,the annual rainfall recorded by the gauges are as
follows
Station A B C D E F
Rainfall(cm) 82.6 102.9 180.3 110.3 98.8 136.7
For a 10% error in the estimation of the mean rainfall, calculate the optimum number of stations in the
catchment.
3. A reservoir had an average surface area of 20 km2 during June 2004. In that month the mean rate of
inflow is 10 m3/s, outflow is 15m3/s, monthly rainfall is 10 cm and change in storage is 16 million m3.
Assuming the seepage losses to be 1.8 cm, estimate the evaporation in that month.
4. The rainfall on five successive days on a catchment was 2,6,9,5 and 3 cm. If the Ø index for the storm
can be assumed as 3cm/day, find the total surface runoff.
5. Derive the ordinates of 12 Hrs Unit hydrograph with the help of given 4 hr UHO and draw the UHO.
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44
Time
UHO 0 20 75 125 150 125 90 50 25 15 5 0
6. A 1 hour unit hydrograph of small rural catchments is triangular with a peak value of 3.6 m 3/s occurring
at 3 hours from the start and a base time of 9 hours. Following urbanization over a period of two decades,
the infiltration index Ø has decreased from 0.7cm/h to 0.4 cm/h. Also the 1 hour unit hydrograph has now
a peak of 6 m3/s at 1.5 hours and a time base of 6 hours. If a design storm has intensities of 4 cm/h and
3cm/h for two consecutive one hour intervals estimate the percentage increase in the storm runoff and in
the volume of flood runoff, due to urbanization.
7. Determine Muskingum coefficients k and x for this reach

0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66
Time
Inflow m3/s 35 135 444 670 685 535 385 235 140 95 60 42
Outflow m3/s 35 57 200 455 612 617 510 375 246 158 102 68
8. A well with radius of 0.5 m completely penetrates an unconfined aquifer of thickness 50 m and
permeability (K) is equal to 30 m/day. The well is pumped so that the water level in the well remains at
40 m above above the bottom. Assuming that pumping has essentially no effect on water table at radius is
equal to 500 m. What is the steady state discharge?
9. The topographic surveys at a proposed reservoir site yielded the following data
Contour elevation (m) Contour area

(hectares)
400 220
402 229
404 239
406 249
408 279
410 295
412 325
414 352
416 362
There are 2 circular sluices with a diameter of 3 m and with their centers at an elevation of 400 m.
Spillway with an effective crest length of 30 m is also provided with its sill at 410 m. The coefficient for
sluices may be taken as 0.7 and for spillway C=2.3. Prepare the storage-discharge curve for the reservoir.
10. How does the Indian standard rain gauge differ from symon‘s gauge?
11. Evaporation is indirectly a cooling process how?
12. How unit hydrograph can be used to predict the runoff from storms?
13. How the reservoir characteristic curves are prepared?
14. Analyse the results of aquifer parameters obtained from Theis,Cooper and Jacob methods?
Unit I
Precipitation
Hydrologic cycle – Types of precipitation –Measurement of Rainfall – Spatial measurement methods –
Temporal measurement methods – Frequency analysis of point rainfall – Intensity, duration, frequency
relationship – Probable maximum precipitation.
Rain gauge network
9 Hours
Unit II
Abstraction from Precipitation
Evaporation process – Reservoir evaporation – Infiltration process – Infiltration capacity – Measurement of
infiltration – Infiltration indices – Effective rainfall.
Losses from precipitation
9 Hours
Unit III
Hydrographs
Baseflow separation – Unit hydrograph – Derivation of unit hydrograph – S curve hydrograph – Unit
hydrograph of different deviations - Synthetic Unit Hydrograph
Factors affecting Hydrograph
9 Hours
Unit IV
Floods and Flood Routing
Recurrence interval – Gumbel‘s method – Flood routing – Reservoir flood routing – Muskingum‘s Channel
Routing – Flood control – Run-off and Estimation of Run-off
Flood frequency studies - Factores affecting Run-off
9Hours
Unit V
Ground Water Hydrology
Darcy‘s law – Dupuit‘s assumptions – Confined Aquifer – Unconfined Aquifer – Recuperation test –
Transmissibility – Specific capacity – Pumping test – Steady flow analysis only.
Artesian Wells
9Hours
Total: 45Hours
Text book
1. K Subramanya, Engineering Hydrology, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi ,2008
References
1. Ven Te.Chow, D.R. Maidment and L.W. Mays, Applied Hydrology, McGraw Hill, New York, 2008
2. P. Jayarami Reddy, Hydrology, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi , 2008
3. H. Ragunath, Hydrology, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi,2003
11C407 SOIL MECHANICS LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
 To make the students determine experimentally the fundamental properties of soils that are needed for the
classification of soils, determining the strength and seepage characteristics
 To determine the safe bearing capacity of soil at a given site using the knowledge of the fundamental
properties of soils
1. Determine the properties of the given soil sample.

2. Identification of soil sample.
3. Determine the strength of given soil
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
 Grain size distribution Sieve analysis and Hydrometer analysis

 Specific gravity of soil grains and relative density of sand
 Atterberg limits test
 Determination of moisture - Density relationship using Standard Proctor test
 Permeability determination (Constant head and falling head methods)
 Determination of shear strength parameters
a) Direct shear test on cohesion less soil
b) Unconfined compression test on cohesive soil
c) Triaxial compression test
 One dimensional consolidation test (Determination of co-efficient of consolidation only)
 Field density test (Core cutter and sand replacement methods)
 Determination of the safe bearing capacity of soil for three different sites
 Estimation of CBR value for pavement design at a given site
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE

1 Grain size distribution Sieve analysis and Hydrometer analysis 6
2 Specific gravity of soil grains and relative density of sand 3
3 Atterberg limits test 3
4 Determination of moisture - Density relationship using Standard Proctor test 3
5 Permeability determination (Constant head and falling head methods) 6
6 Determination of shear strength parameters 9
a) Direct shear test on cohesionless soil
b) Unconfined compression test on cohesive soil
c) Triaxial compression test
7 One dimensional consolidation test (Determination of co-efficient of consolidation 3
only)
8 Field density test (Core cutter and sand replacement methods) 6
9 Determination of the safe bearing capacity of soil for three different sites 3
10 Estimation of CBR value for pavement design at a given site 3
11C408 FLUID MECHANICS LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5
 To impart knowledge on flow measurements in pipes and open channels
 To carry out performance studies on hydraulic machineries
 At the end of the course the students will be able to design pipe layouts and design pumps for residential
buildings
1. Design of turbines
2. Design of pumps
3. To know the various losses of pipes.
4. To acquire knowledge of flow measurements.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Compare the actually measured flow rates to those calculated using the theoretical formula derived by
applying the continuity and Bernoulli‘s equations of the following pipe flow measuring meters. And also
determine its Coefficient of discharge for arriving actual flow rate from the theoretically computed flow
rate.
• Orifice meter
• Venturi meter
2. Compare the actually measured flow rates to those calculated using the theoretical formula derived by
applying the continuity and Bernoulli‘s equations of the given open channel flow measuring meters. And
also determine its Coefficient of discharge for arriving actual flow rate from the theoretically computed
flow rate.
3. Find the friction factor of the given pipe using Darcy‘s equation. The necessary data may obtained by
conducting suitable experiment in the lab. And also plot the curve between head loss, energy gradient
verses discharge.
4. Conduct the load test for the following turbines by keeping head/discharge as constant and draw the
characteristic curves (plot of head, power and efficiency verses discharge). And also determine its specific
speed.
• Pelton wheel
• Francis turbine
5. Conducting experiments by keeping head/discharge as constant and drawing the characteristic curves (plot
of head, power and efficiency verses discharge)of the following pumps. And also determine its specific
speed.
• Centrifugal pump
• Submergible pump
• Gear pump
6. Design of Pipe Networks
7. Design a pump and piping system for a multi storey building
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
Sl. No. Experiment Hours

1 Determination of 15
 Friction factor for pipes
 Co-efficient of discharge of venturimeter
 Coefficient of discharge of V- notch
 Co-efficient of discharge of orifice meter
2 Study on Performance Characteristics of 15
 Centrifugal pump
 Submersible pump
 Reciprocating pump
 Jet pump
 Gear pump
3 Study on performance characteristics of Francis Turbine 6
4 Study on performance characteristics of Pelton Wheel Turbine 3
5 Design a pump and piping system for a multi storey building 6
11C409 SURVEY PRACTICAL II

0 0 3 1.5
 To impart basic knowledge on designing simple curve

 T o acquire knowledge on finding horizontal angle, vertical angle and distance using total station.
PROGRAMME OUT COMES (POs)

1. Handle Electronic Surveying Instruments

2. Determine the R.L, Distance and horizontal angle using total station.
3. Determine the co-ordinate of a given station points.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tacheometry - Stadia system

2. Setting out a simple circular curve using chains
3. Setting out a simple circular curve using Rankine‘s method
4. Setting out a transition curve
5. Setting out of Combined curve
6. Determination of azimuth of a line by observation on the sun
7. Foundation marking
8. Measurements using Total Station
a) Distance between two points
b) R. L. of a station
c) Horizontal angles
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE

1 Setting out a simple circular curve using chains 8
2 Setting out a simple circular curve using Rankine‘s method 8
3 Setting out a transition curve 8
4 Determination of azimuth of a line by observation on the sun 8
5 Foundation marking 4
6 Theodolite traverse 4
7 Measurements using Total Station 5
11C501 WATER SUPPLY ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on the various issues pertaining to quality and quantity of water
 To emphasize the need for water conservation
 To impart knowledge to select suitable method of water treatment and to find the capacity of water
treatment plant.
sustainability
COURSE OUTCOMES (COS)
1. Examine the given water sample.

2. Design of various types water treatment units.
3. Arrive the quantity of water for given city. Estimate the quantity of water for a given city.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 50 40 40 40
4 Analyze / Evaluate - 10 10 10
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of water supply system?

2. Describe the scope of Environmental Engineering?
3. List out the human activities in Environmental pollution.
4. List out the types of Environmental pollution.
5. List out the population forecasting methods.
6. List out the formulae for fire demand.
7. Define about intake structures.
8. List out the intake structures.
9. List out the factors to select the intake structures.
10. What are the uses of pumps?
11. What is the necessity of pumps?
12. List out the pipe appurtenances.
13. List out the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of water treatment.
14. Draw a typical flow chart of a water treatment plant.
15. Define aeration.
16. List out the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of aeration.
†
17. List out the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of sedimentation

18. List out the functions of sedimentation aided with coagulants.
19. List out membrane related technologies.
20. List out types of membrane.
21. Define filter.
22. List out the mechanism of filtering.
23. What are the uses of screening?
24. Define Secondary treatment.
25. Define Tertiary treatment.
26. List out the various methods of sludge disposal.
27. What are the uses of sludge drying beds?
UNDERSTAND
1. Discuss the role of Environmental Engineering.

2. Discuss the importance of planned water supplies.
3. Compare between Domestic and Industrial water demand.
4. Discuss about the necessity of planned water supplies.
5. Which methods of population forecasting are suitable?
6. Which types of sources is suitable for water supply?
7. Discuss in detail about pipe appurtenances.
8. What are the factors considered in selection of pumping station?
9. List out the aim of aeration.
10. What are the principals of aeration?
11. What is the theory of sedimentation?
12. Discuss about water softening.
13. Why Disinfection is needed in water supply?
14. Why back washing is needed in filtering?
15. Which types of filtering mechanism is suitable for water supply?
16. Discuss the types of Treatment.
17. Why modification in ASP is required?
18. What is the function of trickling filter?
19. List out the stage of sludge digestion.
20. What is the end product of sludge digestion?
APPLY
1. What are the effects of human activities in Environmental pollutions?

2. Define the necessity of protected water supply.
3. There is no shortage of water in India, yet the water supplies are poorly developed here, Discuss the
above statement and suggest some methods for improvement.
4. How do you find the most economical size of a rising main?
5. How is the temperature stresses produced in pipe lines laid above the ground?
6. How will you find the quality of drinking water?
7. How will you determine the optimum coagulant quantity by jar test?
8. When desalination is required in drinking water?
9. How will you find the bacterial removal efficiency of water?
10. How will you find the back washing time of slow sand filter?
11. How will you find the hardness of drinking water?
12. How will you find the iron and manganese content of drinking water?
13. Why secondary treatment is necessary in drinking water supply?
14. Why tertiary treatment is necessary in drinking water supply?
15. What are the functions of sludge?
ANALYZE / EVALUATE
1. Analyze human activities in water pollutions.

2. Identify the need of protected water supply required in public.
3. Outline the fluctuations in demand of water in a given city.

4. How will you find the physical, chemical and bacteriological characteristics of drinking water?
5. Point out the location of pumping station.
6. How will you find the efficiency of pump?
7. Why treatment is required for drinking water?
8. Why filtration is required for drinking water?
9. Why water softening is required for drinking water?
10. Calculate the capacity of service reservoirs.
CREATE
1. Find the quality of given water for drinking purpose.

2. Find the quantity of water for population of 100000 persons and per capita demand is 200 litre.
3. Design the water pump according to above quantity.
Unit I
Quantity of Water
Introduction: Scope for Environmental Engineering - Human activities and environmental pollution - Need for
protected water supply - Responsibility of the Government. Quantity of Water Types of water demands -
Domestic demand in detail - Institutional and Commercial demands - Public uses - Fire demand - Per capita
consumption - Water born diseases - Examination of water COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) – Physical -
chemical and microbiological examinations - Drinking water standards - BIS & WHO standards - Sampling of
water for examination – Importance - Precautions – Types.
Public awareness about drinking water
9 Hours
Unit II
Collection and Conveyance of Water
Intake structures - Different types of intakes - Factor of selection and location of intakes - Pumps – Necessity -
types - Power of pumps; Factors for the selection of a pump - pipes - Design of the economical diameter of the
rising main - Nomograms – Use - Pipe appurtenances – Laying - jointing and testing of pipes - Surface and
subsurface sources, Suitability with regard to quality and quantity.
Treatment plant field visit
9 Hours
Unit III
Water Treatment
COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of water treatment – Typical flow chart of a water treatment plant - Aeration –
COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) - Principles of aeration - Types of aerators - Sedimentation – Theory - Settling
tanks – Types - Design - Aided sedimentation - with coagulants – Dosages - Chemical feeding - Flash mixing -
Flocculators - Desalination - Membrane related technologies - Ion exchange technology.
Water softening technology
9 Hours
Unit IV
Advanced Water Treatment
Filtration - Mechanism - Theory of filtration - Design of sand filters - Rapid sand and slow sand filters including
construction and operation - Under drainage system - Back washing of filters - Disinfection - Theory of
disinfection - Methods of disinfection – Chlorination - Chlorine demand - Residual chlorine.
Use of bleaching powder.
9 Hours
Unit V
Domestic Wastewater Treatment
Types of Treatment - Flow diagram of a typical municipal sewage treatment plant - Primary Treatment –
Screening - Grit chambers - Skimming tanks - Primary sedimentation tanks – Sludge deposit - Secondary
treatment - Trickling filter - Theory and operation - Types and designs - Activated sludge process - Principle
and flow diagram - Methods of aeration – Modifications - F/M ratio - Designs of ASP – Secondary
sedimentation tanks - Tertiary treatment - Sludge digestion and filter beds - Sludge drying beds.
Methods of sludge disposal
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. S. K. Garg, Water Supply Engineering, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2008

2. S. K. Garg, Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution Engineering , Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2008
References
1. Sawyer and Mc Carty, Chemistry for Environmental Engineers, McGraw Hill, 2002
2. B. C. Punmia and Ashok Jain, Environmental Engineering - I, Laxmi Publications Ltd., 1995
3. Hammer and Hammer, Water and Wastewater Technology, Prentice Hall, 2009
4. IS 1172:1993 Code of basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation
11C502 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS – I

3 1 0 3.5
 To impart knowledge on the different methods of analysis of statically indeterminate structures

 To impart knowledge on moving loads and influence line diagrams
 To provide a thorough understanding on arches and suspension bridges

1. Draw influence line diagram for reaction, shear force and bending moment of determinate structures
2. Calculate shear force and bending moment in stiffening girders
3. Analyze determinate arches subjected to different loading
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
Apply / Analyze /
3 70 70 70 70
Evaluate
4 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define static determinacy of a structure.

2. Who introduced theorem of three moments of analysis and when?
3. What is the moment at a hinged end of a simple beam?
4. What are the quantities in terms of which the unknown moments are expressed in slope-deflection method?
5. What is meant by ILD?
6. Where do you get rolling loads in practice?
7. What is a three hinged arch?
8. What is funicular polygon?
9. Define the term ‗sway‘.
10. Define Moment distribution method.
UNDERSTAND
1. Give examples for statically determinate and indeterminate structures.

2. Why slope-deflection method is called a ‗displacement method‘?
3. Write the fixed end moments for a beam carrying a central clockwise moment.
4. Mention any three reasons due to which sway may occur in portal frames.
†
5. What is the difference between absolute and relative stiffness?

6. State the location of maximum shear force in a simple beam with any kind of loading.
7. What is the absolute maximum bending moment due to a moving udl longer than the span of a simply
supported beam?
8. In a parabolic arch with two hinges how will you calculate the slope of the arch at any point?
1. A beam ABC of length 2L rests on three supports equally spaced and is loaded with U.D.L w/unit length
throughout the length of the beam. Solve by three-moment equations and draw the S.F. and B.M. diagrams
for the beam.
2. Solve the following loaded beams by three-moment equations.
3. Analyze the continuous beam ABCD by slope deflection method and then draw bending moment diagram.
Take EI constant.
4. Analyze the portal frame shown in figure by slope deflection method and also draw bending moment and
shear force diagram.
5. Using moment distribution method, analyze the continuous beam as shown in the figure.
6. Analyze the frame shown below by Moment Distribution Method.

7. Two equal loads of 90 kN each, spaced 4m apart roll over a girder of 12m span. Calculate the maximum
BM any where in the girder.
8. Draw ILD for simple beam reaction.
9. Draw ILD for simple beam shears and moments at a section.
10. A three hinged parabolic arch has a span of 25m with a central rise of 5m. A load of 150kN rolls over the
arch from left to right. Find the maximum positive and negative moment at a section 8m from the left hand
hinge?
11. A suspension cable is suspended between two points at the same level 75 m apart. It carries an udl of 12.5
kN per horizontal meter. Determine the minimum central dip that may be allowed if the maximum tension
in the cable is limited to 1000 kN.
Unit I
Analysis of Statically Determinate and Indeterminate Structures
Introduction – Degrees of freedom- General criteria for determining statical indeterminacy – Calculation of
indeterminacy by formulae - Analysis of fixed beams and propped cantilevers - Analysis of continuous beams
by Clapeyron‘s theorem of three moments.
Analysis of statically indeterminate pin jointed frames
9 Hours
Unit II
Slope Deflection Method and Column Analogy Method
Analysis of continuous beams and single storey portal frames by Slope deflection method.
Concept of side sway and sinking of supports - Column analogy method
9 Hours
Unit III
Moment Distribution and Kani’s Method
Introduction – Analysis of continuous beams and single storey portal frames by Moment distribution method.
Concept of side sway and sinking of supports – Analysis by Kani’s method
9 Hours
Unit IV
Moving Loads and Influence Lines
Introduction – Construction of SFD and BMD for rolling loads for simply supported and Overhanging beams
with single point load, Two point loads and uniformly distributed loads - Construction of ILD for shear force and
bending moment, Computation of load positions for maximum shear force and bending moments for simply
supported and overhanging beams with several point loads and UDL - Muller-Breslau‘s principle.
Construction of ILD for continuous beam
9 Hours
Unit V
Arches and Suspension Bridges
Introduction – Analysis of three hinged and two hinged parabolic and circular arches with and without
temperature effects – Influence lines.
Analysis of cables and suspension bridges with stiffening girders
9 Hours
Total : 45 + 15 Hours
Textbooks
1. B. C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Theory of Structures, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2006.
References
1. Sujit Kumar Roy and Subrata Chakrabarty, Fundamentals of Structural Analysis with Computer Analysis &
Applications, S Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
2. R. Vaidyanathan and P. Perumal, Structural Analysis, Vol. I & II, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi,
2006.
11C503 FOUNDATION ENGINEERING

3 1 0 3.5
 To impart fundamental knowledge on investigation of the site and selection of suitable foundation
 To impart knowledge on the design concept of different types of foundations
1. Select and design a suitable type of foundation for a given soil condition.
2. Determine the bearing capacity of soil.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 25 20 20 20
2 Understanding 25 20 20 20
3 Apply 50 60 60 60
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the types of soil samples?

2. What are the corrections to be applied to the standard penetration number?
3. What are the types of shear failure?
4. Define net ultimate bearing capacity.
5. Define floating foundation.
6. Under what circumstances, a strap footing is adopted?
7. What is pile driver?
8. What are methods to determine the load carrying capacity of a pile?
9. Discuss basic principles of design of machine foundation.
10. Explain various types of machine foundation.
UNDERSTAND
1. How would you decide the depth of exploration and the lateral extent of the investigations?
2. Mention the factors that affect the sample disturbance.
3. Discuss the effect of water table on the bearing capacity of the soil.
4. What types of shear failure of soil is more likely to happen in the case of very dense soil?
5. Where mat foundation is used?
6. What are the conditions where a pile foundation is more suitable than a shallow foundation?
7. How would you estimate the load carrying capacity of a pile in cohesion less and cohesive soils?
8. What is meant by negative skin friction?
†
9. What do you understand by vibration isolation?

10. How would you determine the natural frequency of foundation-soil system?
APPLY
1. What are the necessary data required for plotting the bore log for any soil investigation project.
2. Define area ratio and recovery ratio and explain how they are used to find whether the sample collected in a
sampler is undisturbed or not.
3. Explain how water table influences the bearing capacity.
4. Indicate the circumstances under which the pile foundations are used for building construction.
5. How would you determine the natural frequency of a machine foundation soil system?
Unit I
Site Investigation and Selection of Foundation
Introduction – COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of Soil Exploration - Methods of exploration - Disturbed and
undisturbed sampling - Depth of soil exploration - Number and disposition of bore holes - Preservation of
samples - Geophysical methods – Penetration tests –SPT, SCPT and DCPT –Pressuremeter tests- Requirements
of good foundation - Factors governing location and depth of foundation- Different types of foundation - Choice
of types of foundation-Construction aspects of Shallow and Deep Foundation.
Preparation of soil investigation report
9 Hours
Unit II
Shallow foundations
Bearing capacity definitions – Types of Failure - Terzaghi's bearing capacity theory and Meyerhoff equations –
IS Formula - Effect of water table, shape of foundation, inclination of load and eccentricity of load on bearing
capacity - Allowable bearing pressure - bearing pressure based on 'N'value - Factors affecting bearing capacity -
Methods of improving bearing capacity - Components of settlement - Immediate and consolidation settlements -
Differential settlement - Computation of settlement, allowable settlement. Measures to reduce settlement.
Foundation in expansive soil
9 Hours
Unit III
Footings and Rafts
Contact pressure distribution below footings and raft - Isolated and combined footings: types & proportioning -
Mat foundation: types, uses - Floating foundation - Allowable bearing pressure for raft foundation on sand -
Codal provisions.
Determination of modulus of subgrade reaction for open foundation
9 Hours
Unit IV
Pile Foundations
Types of piles and their function – Factors influencing the selection of pile – Load carrying capacity of single
pile in granular and cohesive soil - Static formula - dynamic formulae (Engineering news and Hiley‘s) –
Capacity from insitu tests (SPT and SCPT) – Negative skin friction – uplift capacity – Group of piles - Number
and spacing - Pile group efficiency in sands and clays – Settlement of pile groups – Interpretation of pile load
test – Forces on pile caps – under reamed piles – Capacity under compression and uplift.
Introduction to Rock socketed piles, pile termination criteria
9 Hours
Unit V
Machine Foundation
Introduction - Types of machine foundation – Basic principles of design of machine foundation- Dynamic
properties of soil - Vibration analysis of machine foundation - Natural frequency - Design of foundation for
Reciprocating machines and Impact machines - Reinforcement and construction details.
Vibration isolation
9 Hours
Textbooks
1. V. N. S. Murthy, Text Book of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, CBS Publishers Distribution
2. S. R. Gopal Ranjan and Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, New Age International (P) Ltd., New
Delhi, 2007
References
1. P. C. Varghese, Foundation Engineering, Prentice-hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2007
2. B. C. Punmia, Soil Mechanics and Foundations, Laxmi publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005
3. IS 6403: 1981 Code of practice for determination of breaking capacity of shallow foundations.
11C504 CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY
3 0 0 3.0
 To impart a sound knowledge on the ingredients of special and conventional concrete and admixtures.
 To impart a basic knowledge on the properties of fresh and hardened concrete and to provide a basic
understanding on the usage of admixtures used in concrete
sustainability
1. Imparts the knowledge about the properties of concrete making materials and their testing methods
2. Can design the concrete mix for the field requirements
3. Demonstrate the properties of concrete in plastic and hardened state
4. Application of special concretes
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 20 20
3 Apply / Evaluate 20 20 30 30
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What do you mean by hydration of cement?

2. List out the tests on cement.
3. Mention the functions of mineral and chemical admixtures.
4. Name some of the mineral admixtures used in the industry.
5. Give the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of concrete mix design.
6. List out the various methods of proportioning concrete mix.
7. List out the various factors affecting the workability of concrete.
8. Give the relation between compressive and tensile strength of concrete.
9. Define shrinkage and creep.
10. List out the factors that affect the drying shrinkage.
11. What is meant by plastic shrinkage of concrete?
12. Outline the properties of fresh and hardened concrete.
13. Define shortcrete.
14. List out any four advantages of ready mix concrete.
15. What are the basic characters of self compacting concrete in plastic state?
16. What is meant by ultra high strength concrete?
17. List out the methods of compaction.
†
18. List out the importance factors which influences concrete mix design.
19. What is meant by grading of aggregate?
20. List out the factors that affect the strength of concrete?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain about the hydration process of cement.

2. Explain about transition zone.
3. Describe the importance of sieve analysis in determining particle size distribution.
4. Why chloride-based accelerators not used in pre-stressed concrete structures?
5. Distinguish between plasticizer and super plasticizers.
6. Distinguish between segregation and bleeding of concrete.
7. How the maximum size of aggregate will affect the strength of concrete.
8. Differentiate high performance and high strength concrete.
9. Explain about the factors which control the action of high performance concrete.
10. What is the importance of temperature in mass concreting?
APPLY/ EVALUATE
1. Design a concrete mix for construction of multistoried framed structure. The specified design strength of
concrete is 40MPa. The specific gravity of fine aggregate and coarse aggregate are 2.6 and 2.7 respectively.
The dry rodded bulk density of coarse aggregate is 1700 kg/m3 and fines modulus of the aggregate is 2.80.
Ordinary Portland cement (type I) will be used. A slump of 50mm is necessary. Coarse aggregate is found
to be absorptive to the extent of 2%.
2. Design the concrete mix for the construction of water tank using IS method of mix design. The design
strength of concrete is 20MPa. The water absorption of coarse and fine aggregate is 0.5% and 1.0%
respectively. The surface moisture content of fine aggregate is 2.0 %.
Unit I
Ingredients of concrete
Cement : Composition and properties of cement - different types of cements – Hydration of cement-Structure of
hydrated cement - Tests on physical properties of cement - Consistency - Setting time - Soundness - Strength as
per IS code. Aggregates: Classification - Fine aggregate -Coarse Aggregate - Tests on aggregates - IS
specifications - Bulking of sand - Sieve analysis - Fineness modulus - interpretation of grading charts - Quality
of water for mixing and curing.
Soundness of aggregate, Grading of fine & coarse Aggregates, recycled material as aggregates- tyre rubber,
crushed glasses
9 Hours
Unit II
Admixtures and Mix Design
Chemical admixtures: Accelerators - Retarders - Workability agents - Water reducing agents - Air entraining
agents. Mineral admixtures: Fly ash - Silica fume - Ground granulated blast furnace slag – Metakaoline- Dosage,
Usage, structural properties and their effects on concrete properties. Mix Design: Objective - Factors influencing
mix proportion - Mix design by ACI method and IS code method - Mix design examples.
Mineral additives: reactive and inert
9 Hours
Unit III
Fresh Concrete
Properties of fresh concrete: Workability - Factors affecting workability - Tests for workability of concrete -
Slump test and compacting factor test - Segregation and bleeding - Batching and mixing ingredients of concrete -
Methods of compaction – Types of curing concrete.
Setting time of concrete- significance and measurements
9 Hours
Unit IV
Hardened Concrete
Properties of hardened concrete - Determination of compressive, tensile and flexural strength of concrete -
Shrinkage and creep - Factors affecting shrinkage and creep - Stress-strain curve for concrete - Determination of
modulus of elasticity - In situ strength determination - Rebound hammer test.
Durability of concrete: importance of permeability study
9 Hours
Unit V
Special Concrete
Light weight concrete - Fibre reinforced concrete - High performance concrete - High strength concrete - Self
compacting concrete - Polymer concrete - Mass concrete - Ready mix concrete – properties and applications
Cellular concrete, shotcrete (sprayed concrete), ferro cement, bendable concrete, light transmitting concrete.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. A. R. Santhakumar, Concrete Technology, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2007

2. M. L. Gambhir, Concrete Technology, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., New Delhi, 2007
3. M. S. Shetty, Concrete Technology, S. Chand and Co., Ltd., New Delhi, 2003
References
1. A. M. Neville, Properties of Concrete, Tata McGraw Hill publishers, 2003

2. P. Kumar Mehta and Paulo J. M. Monteiro, Concrete - Microstructure, Properties and Materials, Indian
Concrete Institute, Chennai, 1997
3. P.D.Kulkarni, Text book of Concrete Technology, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2007
4. IS 10262-2009 Concrete mix proportioning –Guidelines.
11C505 DESIGN OF R.C.C. ELEMENTS

3 0 0 3.0
 To give an exposure on the basic philosophy of design of R.C.C elements

 To impart knowledge on the design the basic elements of reinforced concrete structures in accordance with
I.S. codal provisions
sustainability
1. Understand the structural behaviour of various structural elements.

2. Know the different method of design.
3. Can able to use IS codes for design of various structural elements.
4. Can analysis, design and detailing of slab, beam and column.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
5 Create 40 40 40 40
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is modular ratio?

2. What are the basic assumptions made in working stress method?
3. What do you understand by modulus of rupture?
4. Define limit state.
5. What is partial safety factor?
6. What do you mean by balanced reinforcement section?
7. List out the advantages of T beam.
8. What is meant by hanger bar?
9. Differentiate between one way and two way slabs.
10. What are the various considerations that come under serviceability?
11. What is the code provision for maximum spacing of vertical stirrups in RC beams?
12. Define development length.
13. Write any two functions of lateral ties in a RC column.
14. Sketch a typical axial load-moment interaction curve for a RCC column.
15. What will be the minimum and maximum area of reinforcement in a RC column?
†
UNDERSTAND
1. Differentiate between WSD and LSD.

2. Draw stress strain curve for Fe415 grade of steel.
3. What is the maximum and minimum steel adopted in beam?
4. Over-reinforced section is not allowed in limit state method of design. Why?
5. Why is secondary reinforcement provided in one-way RC slabs?
6. Why is the design shear strength of concrete related to the percentage tension steel?
7. Minimum shear reinforcement is required in beams. Why?
8. Under what situations do the diagonal tension cracks occur in reinforced concrete beams?
9. Distinguish between flexural bond and development bond.
10. Differentiate between uniaxial and biaxial bending.
11. Write the effects of moments influencing the load carrying capacity of eccentricity loaded columns.
12. How does helically reinforced column differ from tied column in their behaviour when tested to
destruction?
APPLY
1. Is the limit state method in any way a better method of design of concrete structures than the working stress
design? Give reason for your answer.
2. A simply supported beam of effective span 7m is to carry a live load of 15kN/m and dead load of 7kN/m.
Design the mild span section by working stress method for a concrete of grade M25 and steel of grade
Fe415.
3. Design a two way slab 4 m x 5 m with adjacent edges continues and the rest two adjacent edges
discontinuous. The slab is subjected to a live load of 5kN/m2. Use M20 concrete and Fe 415 steel.
4. A RC beam 300mm wide, 400mm effective deep is reinforced on tension side with 4nos 20mm dia bars of
grade Fe250 with an effective cover of 50mm. The beam is subjected to a shear of 295kN. Design the shear
reinforcement (i) using vertical stirrups (ii) bending 2 bar at an angle of 45 degree.
5. A simply supported beam of rectangular section spanning over 4.5m has a width of 295mm and effective
depth of 450mm. The beam is reinforced with 4 bars of 20mm diameter on the tension side spaced at 65mm
C/C which is subjected to a working load moment of 160kN-m. Consider effective cover as 50mm. Use
M30 concrete and Fe 415 steel. Check the beam for the serviceability limits state of cracking according to
IS 456-2000.
6. Design the reinforcements for a column with effective lengths lex =ley=3.5m and size 300mm x 500mm,
subjected to a factored axial load of 1350kN with factored biaxial moment of 168kNm and 100kNm with
respect to the major axis and minor axis respectively. Assume M25 concrete and Fe 415 steel.
7. In construction practice a much stronger mix than used in beams is recommended for columns. Explain
how this practice can lead to considerable economy in construction.
CREATE
1. Design a super structure of two storey residential building of 3m floor height, subjected to maximum live
load of 4kN/m2 Use M20 grade of concrete and Fe 415 grade steel.
Unit I
Working Stress Method &Ultimate Strength Method
Assumptions – Analysis for stresses of flexural members during pre cracking and post cracking stages – Design of
singly and doubly reinforced sections – Ultimate moment of resistance of Sections as per Whitney‘s theory – Design
of tension members.
Estimation of ultimate load carrying capacity of a beam in flexure
9 Hours
Unit II
Design for Flexure by Limit State Method
Principles – Characteristic load and strength – Partial safety factor - Stress block parameters – Analysis and design
of singly and doubly reinforced rectangular and flanged beams – Analysis, design and detailing of rectangular slabs
subjected to uniformly distributed load.
Analysis, design and detailing of square slabs subjected to uniformly distributed load
9 Hours
Unit III
Deformation in Beams and Design of Slabs Subjected to Concentrated Loads
Calculation of deflections in beams under working loads – Check for deflection – Calculation of crack width in
beams – Check for crack width – Design of slabs subjected to concentrated loads.
Check for deflection and crack width in slabs.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Design for Bond, Anchorage, Shear and Torsion
Design for development length – End anchorage – Behaviour of rectangular and flanged beams in shear and design
for shear – Interaction diagram for combined bending and torsion – Design of sections subjected to the combined
action of bending moment, transverse shear and torsion .
Design of sections subjected to the combined action of transverse shear and torsion
9 Hours
Unit V
Design of Columns
Types of columns – Design of rectangular and circular columns for axial load – Provisions of IS-456 code for the
analysis of columns subjected to axial load and uniaxial bending – Design of short and long columns subjected to
axial load and biaxial bending moment using interaction charts.
Design of short and long columns subjected to axial load and uniaxial bending moment using interaction charts.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. N. Krishna Raju and R. N. Pranesh, Reinforced Concrete Design – IS 456 – 2000 Principles and
Practice, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2003.
2. S. Unnikrishna Pillai and Devedas Menon, Reinforced Concrete Design, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998
References
1. P. C. Varghese, Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi, 2002
2. A. K. Jain, Limit State Design of R.C. Structures, Nemchand Publications, Roorkee, 1989
3. S. N. Sinha, Reinforced Concrete Design, Tata McGraw –Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1996
4. Is 456:2000 Plain and reinforced concrete- Code of Practice
ELECTIVE I
3 0 0 3.0
11C507 CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5
 To impart knowledge on the various tests procedure of fresh and hardened concrete
 To impart knowledge on mix design as per Indian Standards

1. Determine the properties of ingredients of concrete
2. Determine the properties of fresh and hardened concrete
3. Design a mix ratio for required grade of concrete
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Physical Tests on Cement

(Fineness, Standard consistency, Initial & final setting times
Soundness, Compressive strength)
2. Tests on Fine Aggregate
(Sieve analysis, Specific gravity, Bulk density, Bulking)
3. Tests on Coarse Aggregate
(Sieve analysis, Bulk density, Aggregate crushing strength,
Aggregate impact, Abrasion, Flakiness index, Elongation
index)
4. Tests on Fresh Concrete
(Slump test, Compaction factor, Veebee consistmeter)
5. Tests on Hardened Concrete
(Compressive strength: Cube – Cylinder, Split tensile strength
Modulus of rupture)
6. Mix design using I.S. Method
7. NDT - Rebound hammer test
8. NDT - Ultrasonic pulse velocity test,
9. Mix design using A.C.I. Method
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
S. No. Experiments Hours

1 Physical tests on cement 8
2 Tests on fine aggregate 8
3 Tests on coarse aggregate 8
4 Tests on fresh concrete 6
5 Tests on hardened concrete 6
6 Non destructive test 4
7 Mix design 5
11C508 DESIGN STUDIO

0 0 3 1.5
 To impart knowledge on the concept of rendering.

 To give practical exposure on the application of various architectural softwarees in the field.
sustainability
(g) an ability to communicate effectively
1. Demonstrate the various characteristics of rendering a building

2. Analyze any type of building.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXERCISES
1. Develop a model of a Residential building showing the plan elevation of
• Single -storey building
• Multi-storey building for a given plan
2. Planning drawing of a
• Residential building
• Commercial building of a given plan with and without rendering effect for daytimes and nighttime effects.
3. Create a model of a residential building plan and accordingly prepare the schedule of quantities for th e
same.
4. Develop a walkthrough model of a
• Classroom with all its necessities
• Park with rendering effects for a given floor area.
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
S. NO. EXERCISES HOURS

1 Plan and Elevation of a single floor residential building 3
2 Plan and Elevation of a multi-storey residential building 3
3 Plan and Elevation of a residential building with all its necessitie 6
4 Plan and Elevation of a commercial building with all its necessities 6
5 Plan and Elevation of a residential building with rendering effects 6
6 Plan of a single room with night rendering effects 3
7 Prepare a schedule of a normal building 3
8 Create a movie of a class room with all its neccessities 3
9 Create a model of a park with rendering effects 6
11C509 SURVEY CAMP

0 0 3 1.5
 To make give practical exposure on the application of various basic principles of survey in the field.
 To provide hands on experience to handle modern surveying equipments using total station.
sustainability
(f) an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility
LIST OF EXERCISES
1. Theodolite traverse
2. Block contouring
3. Radial contouring
4. Highway project
5. Triangulation
6. Trilateration
7. Azimuth of a line by observation on sun.
8. Fixing gradient for a pipe line
9. Fly leveling
10. Surveying using total station
Mini Project Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE

1 Theodolite traverse 3
2 Block contouring 3
3 Radial contouring 3
4 Highway project 3
5 Triangulation 6
6 Trilateration 3
7 Azimuth of a line by observation on sun. 3
8 Fixing gradient for a pipe line 6
9 Fly leveling 3
10 Surveying using total station 6
11C510 TECHNICAL SEMINAR I

- - - 1.0

(i) a recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning
11C601 DESIGN OF R.C.C. STRUCTURES
3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on the basic design philosophy of R.C.C structures

 To make students be familiar about the codal provisions for the design of R.C.C structures
sustainability

1. Understand the component behaviour and structural behaviour of various structures
2. Analyse and Design shallow footings
3. Analyse and Design a multi-bay multi storied frames with joint detailing
4. Know the importance of lateral soil pressure distribution on retaining walls and able to design it for various
loading condition
5. Analyse and Design various types of water tanks.
6. Analyze and determine the critical loading condition on bridge deck for the economical design
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Apply 40 40 40 40
5 Create 40 40 40 40
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out the different types of footings.

2. Define the term Footing.
3. Define the term Foundation.
4. Write down the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of providing the foundation.
5. State the assumptions made in design of foundation.
6. What are all the main requirements of foundation as a substructure in the building system?
7. What are the soil characteristics that govern the design of foundation?
8. Define the term Pedestal.
9. Write down the purpose of providing pedestals to columns?
10. What should be the allowable or minimum thickness at the edges of footing?
11. Draw the pressure distribution diagram for i) cohesive Soil ii) loose cohesion less soil in foundation.
12. Define the term punching shear.
13. How to determine the depth of isolated footing?
14. Write down the advantages of stepped footing over slopped footing?
†
15. Recognize under what circumstances a trapezoidal combined footing is preferred to a rectangular combined
footing?
16. State the advantages of raft foundation
17. List out the methods for analyzing the building frame subjected to horizontal loading.
18. State the assumptions involved in Cantilever method of analysis of frames for lateral loads.
19. Give the step by step procedure involved in the design of multibay structures.
20. Outline the procedure of cantilever methods of analysis for wind forces.
21. List out the types of staircases based on Geometry.
22. Recall the effective span lengths of stairs when
a. The flight of stair with landing slabs spanning over wall supports
b. The flight of stairs spanning over the edge of the landing slabs (landing slab spanning parallel to
riser
23. List out the four types of Retaining wall.
24. Mention the purpose of constructing retaining wall structure.
25. Write down the stability requirements of retaining walls.
26. Name the nature of earth pressure on wall and shear key of a retaining wall.
27. State the functions of counterfeits in counterfort retaining wall.
28. Define Surcharge and what is meant by surcharge angle?
29. Sketch the pressure distribution on the wall of the retaining wall, with a live load surcharge of w kN/m2.
30. What is the purpose of Shear key in retaining walls?
31. What are the different failures occur in Retaining wall?
32. Mention the different types of water tanks.
33. What are the three factors must be considered while designing a water retaining structure?
34. When a wall of a water tank is to be designed as uncracked section?
35. List out the design forces in the bracings of the staging of water tanks.
36. When IRC class AA loading is to be considered in the design of bridges?
37. What are the loads to be considered on a safety kerb?
38. What is the minimum width of roadway for a single lane and tow lane bridges?
39. List out the different methods for determining the load distributions for concrete bridges.
40. State the limitations of Pigeaud‘s method of analysis of a slab subjected to concentrated loads.
UNDERSTAND
1. Distinguish between the terms Shallow foundation and Deep foundation.

2. What is meant by eccentric loading on a footing and under what circumstances does this occur?
3. Why Strap footing is called as Cantilever footing?
4. Distinguish between the combined footing and strap footing.
5. Discuss about the advantages of providing combined footing over isolated footing?
6. Under what circumstances, the mat or raft footings are provided?
7. Why is it desirable to eliminate eccentricity in loading on a footing, wherever possible, by means of proper
proportioning?
8. Why the punching shear is termed as two way shear?
9. What is the function of strap beam in strap footing?
10. Explain briefly the load transfer mechanism in two column combined footing.
11. Explain different types of footing with neat sketches
12. Sketch the critical loading cases for maximum moments in columns, in a substitute frame.
13. Explain the parameters considered for the design of RCC staircase.
14. Bring out the significance of substitute frame.
15. Describe the behavior of each components of cantilever and counterfort retaining wall.
16. Explain the structural action of the cantilever retaining wall and counter fort retaining wall.
17. Sketch the reinforcement detailing of the connections of heel, toe and stem of a cantilever retaining wall.
18. Why ring beams are provided at the junction of the cover dome and the wall of the cylindrical tank?
19. Why tension concrete is not neglected in the design based on uncracked section?
20. Bring out the difference between IRC class A and Class AA loading.
APPLY
1. Sketch the substitute frame and loading condition for maximum negative bending moment at mid span of the
4th bay multistoried frame.
2. What is the effective span of stairs with 2.5m going and supported by the landing slabs of 1.5m in the
direction of the flight. The landing slabs span perpendicular to the flight at top and bottom.
3. A slab bridge has the following parameters:
a. Clear carriage way width = 7.5m
b. Effective Span = 6.0m
c. Safety kerb width = 600mm
d. Loading = IRC class A
e. Average thickness of wearing coat = 80mm
4. Sketch the load positions for maximum shear force and calculate the design shear force. Assume the overall
thickness of slab as 500mm and the width of each support for the bridge as 500mm.
CREATE
1. Design the footing for a square concrete column of side 225mm, to carry an axial load of 500 kN. The safe
bearing capacity of the soil may be taken as 100 kN/ m2. Use M20 grade concrete and Fe 415 HYSD bars.
2. A RC rectangular footing supports a column 250mm x250mm (placed concentric to the footing). The
column transfers an axial load of 1500 kN at service state. The size of the footing is 2.75m x 4m and the
thickness of the footing (uniform throughout) is 670 mm (total thickness). Design the footing for its
reinforcement (flexure only) and sketch the reinforcement details.
3. A dog-logged staircase is to be provided in a staircase room with inner dimensions 5m x 2.5m. Floor to
floor height is 3.5m. Live load on stairs is 3kN/m2. Plan an arrangement for the stairs and sketch the layout.
Design a flight of the staircases. Assume that the waist slab is supported on the landing slabs.
4. Design an intermediate flight of a staircase, for the following data:
a. Width of the flight =1.25m
b. Tread of each step = 250mm
c. Rise of each step = 160mm
d. Number of rises in the flight = 11
e. Live load = 3 kN/m2
f. Surface finish = 0.5 kN/m2
g. Length of landing slabs = 1.25m (each)
The landing slabs are supported on walls. Sketch the arrangement of the flight with steps and design the
flight.
5. A counterfort retaining wall has the following parameters:
a. Height of stem above base slab = 8.5m
b. Thickness of stem = 300mm
c. Level of earth retained = horizontal
d. Weight of soil = 15 kN/m3
e. Angle of repose of soil = 30º
f. Base slab width = 4.5m
g. Thickness of base slab = 300mm
h. Toe projection = 2.15m
i. Spacing of counterforts (c/c) = 3m
Design and detail the toe slab, heel slab, stem and counterfeits.
6. A cantilever retaining wall has a wall height of 6m above base slab. Surface earth retained is horizontal.
Base slab width is 3.25m. Projection of toe is 0.9m. Thickness of wall, toe and heel are 325mm each.
Weight of soil = 15 kN/m2, angle of repose of soil = 30º. Design the heel and toe slab.
7. A cylindrical water tank is 3m inner diameter and open at top. The tank is an elevated tank. The inner
height of the wall is 3m. The junction of the wall and base slab of the tank shall be assumed as fixed.
Design the thickness and reinforcements of the wall (for the design forces in the vertical direction only).
8. A Rectangular water tank has dimensions 3m x 5m. The tank is open at top. The wall of the tank is
monolithic with the base slab. Design the thickness and the reinforcement for the short wall for the design
forces in the vertical direction only. The height (inner height) of the tank is 3m.
9. Design a simple slab bridge for the following requirements.
a. Clear span = 8m,

b. Clear width of carriage way = 7.5m
c. Live load = Class A loading
Use M20 grade concrete and Fe 415 steel
10. Design the super structure for a T beam bridge of clear span 20m to be built on a national highway for IRC
class AA loading. Clear roadway is 8.0m, there are 3 T beams spaced at 3m c/c.Use M20 grade concrete
and Fe415 HYSD bars.
Unit I
Foundations
Isolated footings –Combined footings of rectangular and trapezoidal shape – Strap beam footings – Principles of
design of mat foundation
Design of isolated footing subjected to uniaxial and biaxial moments
9 Hours
Unit II
Building Frames
Steps involved in the design of multibay, multistoreyed frames – Elastic analysis using suitable substitute frames for
gravity loadings – Portal and Cantilever methods of analysis for wind forces – Design of frame components –
Design of Deep Beams-Design of Corbels-Design of stairs spanning horizontally – Design of doglegged stair
Detailing of joints
9 Hours
Unit III
Earth Retaining Structures
Design of cantilever and counterfort retaining walls for any type of back fill – Stability requirements of retaining
walls
Effect of surcharge loading in the design of retaining wall
9 Hours
Unit IV
Liquid Storage Structures
Design of underground and onground rectangular water tanks– Use of Parts I, II and IV of I.S.3370 Codes –
Overhead tanks of rectangular shape and circular shape with domical roof – Design of all components including
staging and foundation.
Design of underground and onground circular water tanks
9 Hours
Unit V
Bridges
Types of bridges – IRC loadings – Design of single span slab bridge deck for class A loading – Design of the deck
of T – beam and slab bridge for class AA loading
Design of single span slab bridge deck for class AA loading
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. N.Krishnaraju, Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures, CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi,
2003.
2. B.C.Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun kumar Jain, Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete, Laxmi
Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.
References
1. Unnikrishna Pillai and Devedas Menon, Reinforced Concrete Design, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing
Co.Ltd., New Delhi, 1998.
2. M.L.Gambhir, Design of reinforced concrete structures, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
3. S.N.Sinha, Reinforced Concrete Design, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co.Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
4. B.C.Punnmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Comprehensive R.C.C. Design, Laxmi
Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 1998.
5. P.Dayaratnam, Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures, Oxford & IBH Publishers, New Delhi, 2000.
6. P.C.Varghese, Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2002.
7. IS 456:2000 Plain and reinforced concrete Code of Practice
8. IS 3370 (Part 1):1965 Code Practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids.
9. IRC 6:2000 Standard Specification and Code of Practice for road bridges, Section II -loads and stresses
10. IRC 21:2000 Standard Specification and Code of Practice for road bridges, Section III –Cement concrete
(plain and reinforced)
11C602 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS II

3 1 0 3.5
 To impart a thorough knowledge about the matrix methods of structural analysis

 To introduce plastic analysis of structures
 To impart knowledge on finite element analysis and tension co-efficient method

1. Analyze a structure by using matrix stiffness and flexibility methods.

2. Importance of Load factor in a Design.
3. Analyze the structure for statistical determinacy.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
Apply / Analyze / 80 80 80
3 80
Evaluate
4 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define structure
2. Define plastic hinge.
3. Define plastic moment capacity of a section.
4. State Muller Breslau Principle.
5. Define influence line.
6. What do you mean by degree of freedom?
7. Define Shape Factor.
8. Define the process of discretization.
9. State Maxwell-Betti‘s theorem.
10. Draw ILD for bending moment at the middle support of a continuous beam having two equal spans.
UNDERSTAND
1. When a beam is said to be statically indeterminate?

2. Why load factor is necessary for analyzing a structure?
3. Differentiate between statically determinate and indeterminate structures.
4. Differentiate between plastic modulus and section modulus.
5. What are all the possible compatible conditions for different end conditions?
6. When a structure satisfies equilibrium and compatible conditions?
7. How will you calculate the degree of kinematic indeterminacy for the given beam and the frames?
8. Give examples for beams curved in plan.
†
9. Show that the stiffness matrix is symmetric.

10. When do we prefer stiffness method?
11. Compare the collapse load for the propped cantilever with uniformly distributed load over the entire span
by using statical and kinematic method.
12. Compare equilibrium and compatibility conditions for the beams with various loading conditions.
13. Differentiate between flexibility matrix and stiffness matrix.
14. Derive the shape factor for various cross sections.
15. What is the effect of lack of fit in redundant frames?
1. Demonstrate Betti‘s theorem by considering a SS beam with a load at midpoint and the same beam with a
load at quarter point.
2. Prove the symmetry property of flexibility matrix and stiffness matrix.
3. Extend tension co-efficient method for space trusses.
4. Analyze the propped cantilever with uniformly distributed load over the entire span and determine the
collapse load.
5. Sketch the stress distribution in a fully plastic rectangular section.
6. In a circular beam on several equally spaced supports, what are the quantities which will be zero at the
supports and why?
7. Analyze the continuous beam ABCD by Matrix stiffness method and then draw bending moment diagram.
Take EI constant.
8. Using flexibility matrix method, analyze the continuous beam as shown in the figure.
9. Analyze the portal frame shown in figure by matrix stiffness method and also draw bending moment and
shear force diagram.
Unit I
Analysis of Pin Jointed Frames
Analysis of perfect frames – Method of joints and method of sections - Analysis of statically redundant trusses
by Force method – Using reactions as redundant and using axial forces as redundant
Yielding of supports
9 Hours
Unit II
Influence Lines
Introduction to influence lines– Influence lines for member forces in simply supported pin jointed frames –
Muller-Breslau principle – Influence lines for beams with degree of indeterminacy one
Stresses in frames with lack of fit
9 Hours
Unit III
Flexibility Method for Indeterminate Beams and Frames
Introduction - computation of flexibility matrices - Analysis of overhanging, continuous beams and rigid jointed
plane frames by flexibility method
Equilibrium and compatibility
9 Hours
Unit IV
Stiffness Method for Indeterminate Beams and Frames
Introduction –equilibrium and compatibility- Analysis of overhanging, continuous beams and rigid jointed plane
frames by stiffness method.
Element and global stiffness matrices
9 Hours
Unit V
Miscellaneous Topics
Introduction to finite element analysis – Steps involved in FEA-tension co-efficient method.
Various types of finite element-Convergence and Compatibility requirements.
9 Hours
Textbooks
1. R. Vaidyanathan and P. Perumal, Structural Analysis Vol. I & II, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd, New Delhi,
2006.
2. S. S. Bhavikatti, Structural Analysis Volume 2, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
References
1. C. S. Reddy, Basic Structural Analysis, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 1996
2. A. Ghali and A. M. Neveille, Structural Analysis a Unified Classical Matrix Approach, E & FN SPON
Taylor & Francis Group – Distributed by Standard Publishers Distributors, Delhi, 1999
3. C.K Wang, Indetermediate Structural Analysis, McGraw- Hill, 1983
4. Klaus- Jurgen Bathe, Finite Element Procedures, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1996
11C603 WASTE WATER TREATMENT

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on various methods of domestic and municipal wastewater treatment

 To enhance the knowledge of students on effluent disposal phenomenon
 To emphasize the need for sewage treatment
(d) an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such
sustainability
1. Design the hydraulic elements for sewer.

2. Compute the design flow by suitable methods.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 40 30 30 30
5 Create - 30 30 30
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What do you mean by dry weather flow?

2. How will you predict the storm flow into the sewer?
3. What are the different shapes of sewer?
4. Name some basic principles of house drainage?
5. List out the disposal standards of sewage in water.
6. How will the time of concentration influence the design of storm water drain?
7. Define: Manhole.
8. What do you mean by oxidation pond?
9. Draw the oxygen-sag curve.
10. What are the methods of sludge disposal?
UNDERSTAND
1) List out the different zones of purification.

2) Define: Self-purification
3) Identify some physical characteristics of sewage.
4) Interpret the activated sludge process.
5) Differentiate the sand filter and carbon filter
6) Explain the dilution process in detail
†
7) Draw a layout plan showing house drainage connection

8) Compare COD and BOD
APPLY/EVALUATE
1) Define/M ratio
2) Paraphrase some of the primary treatment units
3) Explain the process of chlorination.
4) Compare the various treatment techniques for treating the sewage.
5) Write the methods of testing the sewers
6) Draw a flow diagram of municipal STP
Unit I
Introduction: Quantity of Sewage
Types of sewerage systems suitability - Dry weather flow - Factors effecting dry weather flow - Flow variations and
their effects on design of sewerage system - Computation of design flow - Estimation of storm flow: Rational
method and empirical formulae - Design of storm water drain - Time of concentration.
Sullage
9 Hours
Unit II
Analysis of Sewage
Physical, chemical and biological characteristics - Concepts of Aerobic and Anaerobic activity - More emphasis on
BOD and COD - Sampling – Significance - Techniques and frequency - Design of Sewers: Principle – Factors -
Hydraulic formulae for velocity - Effects of flow variations on velocity - Self cleansing and non souring velocities -
Design of hydraulic elements for circular sewers flowing full.
Design of hydraulic elements for circular sewers flowing partially full.
9 Hours
Unit III
Sewer Appurtenances
Definition - Catch basins - Manholes - Flushing tanks - Oil and grease traps - Drainage traps - Basic principles of
house drainage - Typical layout plan showing house drainage connections - Maintenance of house drainage -
Materials of sewers: Sewer materials - Shapes of sewers - Laying of sewers - Jointing of sewers - Ventilation and
cleaning of sewers.
Jointing of sewers
9 Hours
Unit IV
Disposal of Effluents
Dilution - Self-purification phenomenon - Oxygen sag curve - Zones of purification - Sewage farming, sewage
sickness - Disposal standards on land and water - Chlorination of sewage - Oxidation pond and oxidation ditch -
Septic tanks with soak pits - Oxidation pond –Design
Stabilization pond
9 Hours
Unit V
Treatment of Sewage
Types of Treatment - Flow diagram of a typical municipal sewage treatment plant - Primary Treatment – Screening -
Grit chambers - Skimming tanks - Primary sedimentation tanks – Sludge deposit - Secondary treatment - Trickling
filter - Theory and operation - Types and designs - Activated sludge process - Principle and flow diagram - Methods
of aeration – Modifications - F/M ratio - Designs of ASP – Secondary sedimentation tanks - Tertiary treatment -
Sludge digestion and filter beds - Methods of sludge disposal
Sludge drying beds
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. S. K. Garg, Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution Engineering, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2008
References
1. B. C. Punmia and Ashok Jain , Environmental Engineering Vol II, Lakshmi Publications, New Delhi,1995
2. Howard S. Peavy, Donald R. Rowe and George Tchobanoglous, Environmental Engineering, Tata McGraw
Hill, 1985
11C604 IRRIGATION ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart basic knowledge on the basic needs and modes of irrigation

 To emphasis the significance of ground water irrigation
1. Estimate the various methods of irrigation

2. Perform the water losses and irrigation scheduling
3. Select the suitable site for wells and yield of the wells.
4. Analyze data from multiple sources to do the water management in irrigation.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 30 30
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define irrigation
2. What are the factors on which duty depends?
3. What are the types of sprinkler system?
4. Define tank irrigation
5. What is called effective rainfall?
6. List the factors affecting water requirement by crops.
7. What is meant by development of a tube well?
8. Define confined aquifer and unconfined aquifer.
9. What are the advantages of water user association?
10. What is called optimum utilization of irrigation?
UNDERSTAND
1. State the relationship between Duty and Delta.

2. How will you improve the duty?
3. Describe the various methods of subsurface irrigation
4. Differentiate lift and flow irrigation.
5. Outline the empirical methods of determination of consumptive use
6. What are the ill effects of Water logging?
†
7. Discuss the methods to find Yield of an open well

8. State the advantages and disadvantages of tube-well irrigation
9. Write the steps to be taken to minimize irrigation water losses?
10. List the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of irrigation water management.
APPLY
1. There are four wells A,B,C,D of 20 cm diameter each on four sides of a square having sides of 20 m.
pumping has been started at a rate of 2500 lpm from another well of 20 cm which is located at the center of
the square. Storage coefficient of the aquifer is 0.005. Determine the drawdowns of the four wells, A, B, C,
D transmissibility of the aquifer is 1800 lpm/m.
2. Estimate the water requirement of a wheat crop of 130 days duration when the duty of water for the crop is
2496 ha.
3. Calculate the farm conveyance efficiency and field water application efficiency when a stream of 95 l/s
received at the arm gate after being diverted from a canal delivered 72 l/s to the field. During irrigation to
wheat crop for 8 h, 350 and 158 cu.m of water respectively were lost by runoff and deep percolation.
Unit I
Introduction
Irrigation – Need – Benefits - Ill effects - Historical background - National Water Policy – Classification - Crop and
Crop Seasons - Consumptive use of Water – Delta - Duty - Relationship between Delta and Duty - Factors affecting
Duty- Irrigation efficiencies
Planning and Development of irrigation projects.
9 Hours
Unit II
Irrigation Methods
Surface Irrigation - Subsurface Irrigation - Lift Irrigation - Tank Irrigation - Flooding Irrigation - Sprinkler Irrigation
- Drip irrigation – Design of sprinkler and drip irrigation
Canal irrigation
9 Hours
Unit III
Water Requirement of Crops
Crop water requirement – Evapotranspiration – Effective rainfall – Standards of irrigation water – Classes and
availability of soil water
Irrigation scheduling
9 Hours
Unit IV
Ground water Irrigation
Well irrigation – open well – Yield of an open well – pumping test – Tube well – Types of tube well – Design
criteria – Well shrouding and well development
Selection of suitable site for a tube well
9 Hours
Unit V
Minimizing Irrigation water losses - Participating Irrigation Management - Water users association -Optimization of
Water use - Necessity - Important Dams in India - Water Logging - Causes –Ill effects –Remedy - Salinity in soil -
Improvement of Irrigation Efficiency and management
Changing paradigms in water management
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. Dr. B. C. Punmia, Irrigation and Water Power Engineering, Lakshmi Publications, 2010
References
1. S. K. Garg, Irrigation Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2007

2. R. K. Sharma and T. K. Sharma, Irrigation Engineering, S. Chand & Co, 2006
11C605 DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES

3 1 0 3.5
 To impart knowledge on steel constructions

 To impart the knowledge on the codal provisions for the design of steel structures
 At the end of this course students will be able to design bolted and welded connections, tension members,
compression members and beams
sustainability
1. Design of Connection Details

2. Design of Structural Components
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Analyze - - - -
5 Create 20 40 50 50
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define the term block shear.

2. What are the types of bolted joint? Draw neat sketch.
3. Name the types of tension member.
4. How will you find net sectional area in chain riveting?
5. Give the Euler‘s formula to calculate the buckling load.
6. Define Radius of Gyration and slenderness ratio.
7. Write down the formula to find Elastic critical stress.
8. What is built up beams? Mention its types.
9. Describe the assumptions made in analysis of roof trusses.
10. Define beam column.
UNDERSTAND
1. Differentiate between Characteristic load and factored load.

2. What do you mean by prying force?
3. When tension splices are needed in the tension member?
4. Why lug angles are provided in the tension member?
5. What do you mean by ‗Web crippling‘?
†
6. When splicing of a column becomes necessary?

7. What is the difference between laterally supported and laterally unsupported beams?
8. How the loads are transferred by a beam?
9. Distinguish between determinate and indeterminate trusses.
10. What is the function of a bracing?
APPLY / EVALUATE
1) How will you calculate Nominal diameter of the bolt?

2) How the effective throat thickness will be computed in case of incomplete penetration butt weld?
3) Write the formula to check the bolted connection subjected to combined shear and torsion.
4) How the design strength of tension member is calculated?
5) Write down the formula to find Net effective area when pair of angle connected by each side of a gusset
plate.
6) Write down the equation when a tension member subjected to both axial tension and uniaxial bending.
7) What is the radious of gyration for a hollow steel shaft, outside diameter 150mm and inside diameter
100mm is to be used as a column.
8) What is the formula to find the spacing of the lacing for single lacing system?
9) How can you calculate maximum slenderness ratio for flat bars of width b and thickness t used for lacing
system?
10) How will you calculate permissible bending stress in compression and tension for laterally supported
beams?
11) How will you calculate permissible bending stress in compression and tension for laterally unsupported
beams?
12) What is the formula to find the permissible bearing stress in any part of beam?
13) How will you calculate design bending moment for I – section purlin?
14) Write down the formula to find maximum bending moment for angle section.
CREATE
1) Design a single angle discontinuous strut for a roof truss to carry a load of 95kN. The length of the strut
between the centres of intersection is 2.50m.
Unit I
Introduction
Introduction to steel structures - Use of relevant Indian standard codes – Comparison of Working stress and
Limit state method of design - Properties of steel - Structural steel sections - Types of connections - Design of
bolted and welded connections - Efficiency of joint - Concept of eccentric connections.
Pin Connections
9 Hours
Unit II
Tension Members
Introduction to types of sections - Calculation of net area - Net effective sections for angles and Tee in tension -
Design of connections in tension members - Design of tension splice.
Gusset Plate
9 Hours
Unit III
Compression Members
Introduction to types of compression members - Theory of column - Codal provisions for compression members
- Design of lacings and battens - Design of column base - Gussetted base.
Encased Column
9 Hours
Unit IV
Beams
Introduction to design of flexural members - Design of laterally supported and unsupported beams - Built up
beams - Design of plate girders - Intermediate and bearing stiffeners.
Castellated Beam
9 Hours
Unit V
Introduction to Beam Columns - Loading specifications and components of an industrial building - Design of
roof trusses and purlins – Introduction to gantry girder.
Bracing of Trusses – Industrial Visits
9 Hours
Textbooks
1. N. Subramanian, Design of Steel Structures, Oxford University Press 2008

2. S. K. Duggal, Limit State Design of Steel Structures, Tata , Mc Graw Hill Education Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi
References
1. M. R. Shiyekar, Limit State Design in Structural Steel, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2010
2. K. S. Sai Ram, Design of Steel Structures, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd, Pearson Education in South
Asia.
3. IS 800 – 2007, General Construction in Steel – Code of Practice, BIS, New Delhi
R. Murugesan and A. P. Arulmanickam, Steel Tables in SI Units, Pratheeba Publishers, Coimbatore, 2009.
ELECTIVE II
3 0 0 3.0
11C607 IRRIGATION AND PUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING DRAWING

0 0 3 1.5
 To impart basic knowledge on the components and special features of various irrigation structures
 To provide hands on experience pertaining to the design of hydraulic and irrigation structures.

1. Demonstrate the functional aspects of irrigation structures.
2. Demonstrate the functional aspects of units in water treatment.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXERCISES
1. Design and Drawing of

2. Surplus weir
3. Tank sluice with tower head
4. Canal drop
5. Canal regulator
6. Syphon aqueduct
7. Septic tank
8. Imhoff tank
9. Design an Effluent treatment plant for a particular capacity
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
S. No. Exercise Hours

1 Surplus weir 6
2 Tank sluice with tower head 6
3 Canal drop 6
4 Canal regulator 6
5 Siphon aqueduct 5
6 Spectic Tank 3
7 Imhoff Tank 3
8 Design an Effluent treatment plant for a particular capacity 10
11C608 COMPUTER AIDED ESTIMATION, COSTING AND VALUATION
0 0 3 1.5
 To enhance the computing capability of the students to draw the plan, elevation and sectional view of
various structural elements.
 To impart knowledge on computer aided estimation and costing of various structural elements.
 To impart knowledge on valuation of buildings.

(m) an ability to plan and prepare design and construction documents, such as specification, contracts, change
orders, engineering drawings, and construction schedules

1. Estimation of Load bearing and framed structures
2. Estimation of Septic tanks and soak pit
3. Estimation of Sanitary and Water Supply systems
4. Estimation of Roads
5. Estimation of Retaining walls
6. Estimation of Irrigation works
7. Valuation of residential and industrial buildings
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXERCISES
1 1.Quantity Estimation of
• Residential building
• Framed structures
• Septic tanks and soak pit
• Water Supply systems
• Sanitary Supply systems
• Roads
• Retaining walls
• Irrigation works
2. Valuation of
• Residential buildings for a given plan
• Industrial buildings for a given plan
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
Sl. No Exercises Hours

1 Estimation of residential building 3
2 Estimation of framed structures 3
3 Estimation of Septic tanks and soak pit 3
4 Estimation of Water Supply systems 6
5 Estimation of Sanitary Supply systems 6
6 Estimation of Roads 6
7 Estimation of Retaining walls 6
8 Estimation of Irrigation works 6
9 Valuation of residential buildings 3
10 Valuation of industrial buildings 3
11C609 TECHNICAL SEMINAR II

- - - 1.0

(i) a recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning
110701 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS

3 0 0 3.0
 To understand the basics of Micro and Macro Economics

 To understand the methods by which Demand Forecasting, Cost Analysis, Pricing and Financial
Accounting are done in the Industry

1. Costing of products and services

2. Market Analysis
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Economics
2. Define Managerial Economics
3. What are the branches of Economics?
4. What are the two methodologies used for Investigation in Economics?
5. Name the other disciplines which are linked to Managerial Economics.
6. List the theories that explain the basic COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of a firm.
7. What are the basic concepts in Decision making?
8. What are the types of decisions a manager is expected to make?
9. What are the techniques used in the process of decision making?
10. What is opportunity cost?
11. What is Demand?
12. What are the types of Demand?
13. What are the variations in the nature of Demand?
14. State the law of Demand.
15. What are the factors determining Demand?
16. Define Elasticity of Demand.
17. State the different degrees of elasticity of Demand?
18. What are the factors determining Elasticity of Demand?
†
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated
for 50 marks
19. State the Law Of Diminishing Marginal Utility.

20. What is Consumer Equilibrium?
21. List the factors effecting Demand Forecasting.
22. What methods will you use for forecasting demand for a new product?
23. Define Cost.
24. What is a semi variable cost?
25. What are fixed costs?
26. Define Short Run and Long Run costs.
27. Define Optimum Size of a Firm.
28. Define Replacement Cost and Historic Cost.
29. What is a Monopoly?
30. What is an Oligopoly?
31. What is Price Discrimination?
32. What are the reasons for Price Discrimination?
33. What are the advantages of Price Discrimination?
34. Define Oligopoly in terms of market share.
35. Name the two types of Oligopoly.
36. What are the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of Pricing?
37. What are the two basic methods of Pricing?
38. What is Market Skimming?
39. What is sealed bid pricing?
40. Define Accounting.
41. What are the uses of accounting?
42. What is a Balance Sheet?
43. Definitions of key words used in Financial Statements.
44. What is inflation?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the nature and scope of Economics.

2. Differentiate between Macro and Micro economics
3. List and explain the focus areas of Managerial economics.
4. Give reasons why Mangers aim to Maximize Sales even at the cost of a lower profit.
5. Explain the steps in the decision making process.
6. Differentiate between Mechanistic and Analytical Decision making with examples.
7. Explain Giffens Paradox.
8. Explain with examples, exceptions to the Law of Demand.
9. Explain the nature of Demand.
10. Differentiate between Extension and Increase in Demand.
11. What is the significance of Elasticity of Demand?
12. Differentiate between Point and Arc Elasticity of Demand.
13. What are the assumptions made when talking about the Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility?
14. Explain the characteristics of the Indifference Curve with examples.
15. Explain the concepts of consumer‘s equilibrium and consumers‘ surplus with examples.
16. Can Demand Forecasting principles be applied to Services? Substantiate your answer with an example.
17. What is the difference between Accounting Cost and Economic Cost? Explain with an example.
18. Match the following type of question between Cost Concepts and their Basis of Distinction
19. Why is a study of Cost-Output Relationship necessary for a good Manager?
20. How is Incremental cost different from Sunk Cost?
21. Differentiate between Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition.
22. Explain the concept of a Perfect Market and its features.
23. Explain Total Revenue, Average Revenue and Marginal Revenue.
24. Distinguish between Cost and Price.
25. Explain with an appropriate diagram, the mechanism of pricing in a Perfectly Competitive Market.
26. Explain the role of Time in price determination.
27. Under what conditions can a firm charge different prices for the same products?
28. What are the characteristic features of an oligopoly industry ?
29. What causes Oligopoly?
30. Why does a firm need to have a Pricing Policy?

31. Explain the types and features of Cost Based Pricing.
32. Explain the types and features of Demand Based Pricing.
33. Explain the types and features of Strategy Based Pricing.
34. Under what conditions does a company go in for Cross Subsidization pricing?
35. Explain the Business Entity concept.
36. What are the advantages of Double-entry Book-keeping?
37. What is the role of the Central bank in controlling inflation?
APPLY
1. Compare the merits and demerits of the Deductive Method and the Inductive Method of Investigation.
2. Explain decisions based on the degree of certainty of the outcome with examples.
3. Problems involving Marginal and Incremental Costs.
4. Problems concerning Elasticity of Demand.
5. Problems using statistical methods for Demand Forecasting.
6. Problem – Calculate and plot Average Variable Cost, Average Total Cost, Marginal Cost and find the
optimal production volume.
7. Give examples of products falling under the various kinds of Competition, and the reasons they are able to
survive in the market.
8. Give six examples of products that fall under Monopolistic Competitive pricing.
9. Give six examples of products that fall under Oligopolistic pricing.
10. Pick any six Consumer Items and based on your knowledge of the markets, explain the pricing method that
you think is most likely to have been followed for each of these items.
11. Compare the types of information that one can derive from a Balance Sheet and a P&L Statement.
ANALYZE
1. ―The per-capita income of farmers in the country has to be raised by 20% this year to prevent their
migration to cities‖. Analyze this statement from the point of view of Positive and Normative Economics.
2. Decision making improves with age and experience. Discuss.
3. Do a survey of the automotive (only cars) industry and analyze the reasons and timing for discounts offered
from the point of view of elasticity of demand.
4. What are the methods you would adopt to forecast demand for an industrial product? Assuming that the
actual demand versus forecast is very high, what would the most likely reason be for failure of the forecast?
5. ―Most of the cost concepts are overlapping and repetitive‖. Yes or No? Substantiate your answer with
reasons.
6. How would you modify a sealed bid pricing system to take care of different technical approaches by
different bidders for a project for which bids are called for, given that the cost varies depending on the
technical approach?
7. What are the steps you would take to control inflation?
CREATE
1. Create a matrix consolidating the definitions of the word ―Economics‖ as defined by the leading
Economists in the prescribed textbook. Using this define economics the way you understand it, in less than
50 words.
2. Study the price of a commodity over a period of one year and explain the possible reasons for the
fluctuations from an economist‘s point of view.
3. You are in a job which is paying you adequately. You are called for an interview for a job that double your
salary. Unfortunately you miss the only train that will take you in time for the interview. How will you
justify the cost of taking a flight considering the cost concepts you have learnt.
4. Due to cancellation of an export order, you are stuck with a huge stock of jeans of international quality.
Device a pricing strategy for disposing this stock without incurring a loss, considering that it is a very
competitive market.
Unit I
Introduction
Introduction to Economics, Kinds of Economic Systems, Production Possibility Frontier, Opportunity Cost,
Objective of Organizations, Kinds of Organizations, Business Decision Making,
Legal rights and responsibilities of types of Organizations.
9 Hours
Unit II
Demand and Supply
Functions of Demand & Supply, Law of Demand and Supply, Elasticity of Demand, Demand Forecasting Methods,
Price Equilibrium
Role of logistics in managing supply and demand.
9 Hours
Unit III
Production and Cost
Production Function, Returns to Scale, Economies & Diseconomies of scale, Fixed Cost, Variable Cost, Average
Costs, Cost Curves, Break Even point, Law of diminishing Marginal Utility
Costing of a product during the stages of its life cycle
9 Hours
Unit IV
Pricing & Market Structure
Components of Pricing, Methods of Pricing, Return on Investment, Payback Period, Market Structure and Pricing,
Perfect Competition, Monopoly, Oligopoly, Monopolistic, Non price competition, E-commerce.
The secure payment process in e-commerce.
9 Hours
Unit V
Introduction to Macro Economics & Financial Accounting,
National Income – GDP, Per Capita Income, Inflation, Stagflation, Deflation, Business Cycle, Stabilization
Policies, Direct Taxes, Indirect Taxes, Balance of Payment. Accounting - Terminology, Book Keeping, P&L,
Balance Sheet.
Role of Central Excise and Customs
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. A. Ramachandra Aryasri and V V Ramana Murthy, Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 2006
References
1. V L Samuel Paul and G S Gupta, Managerial Economics – Concepts and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1981
2. S N Maheswari, Financial and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand
3. R Kesavan, C Elanchezhian and T Sunder Selwyn, Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting,
Laxmi Publication (P) Ltd , New Delhi, 2005
11C702 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0
 To provide a basic knowledge on highway planning, geometric design, design of pavements and highway
materials.
 To provide a basic knowledge on economic evaluation of highway projects.
sustainability
1. Acquisition of skills in selecting the best highway alignment and the highway proposal
2. Planning of various highway cross sectional elements
3. Ability to design flexible and rigid pavements as per IRC codes.
4. Ability to prepare Environmental Impact Assessment for any highway project.
5. Better assessment of the proposals because of the cost-benefit analysis knowledge.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Sl. No. Test I† Test II† Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 25 25 25 25
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out the recommendations of Jayakar committee.

2. Outline the classification of urban roads.
3. Describe the importance of pavement unevenness.
4. State the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of providing camber.
5. Describe the PIEV theory with a neat sketch
6. Name the IRC empirical formula for calculating the length of transition curve.
7. Define offtracking.
8. State how the following factors influence the design of a highway
a) Design speed
b) Ruling gradient
c) Overall dimension of vehicle
9. Describe the various factors affecting the pavement design.
10. List out the limitations of CBR method of pavement design.
11. Define Equivalent Single Wheel Load.
12. State the significance of penetration test.
13. Define flaky aggregates.
†
14. Define skid resistance.

15. Outline the importance of highway drainage.
16. Reproduce the classification chart of various evaluation techniques
17. Describe the merits and demerits of B.O.T projects.
18. Define EIA.
UNDERSTAND
1. Classify the roads based on Lucknow road plan

2. Explain the functions of CRRI and IRC in highway development of India.
3. Draw the cross section of a NH in embankment in rural area and name the various components of the road.
4. Identify the locations where the effect of negative superelevation will be greater than the positive
superelevation.
5. Discuss the factors to be considered in calculating the length of transition curve.
6. Distinguish between flexible and rigid pavement.
7. Describe the significance of CBR inflexible pavement design.
8. Summarize the step by step procedure of construction of cement concrete roads
9. Explain the California Bearing Ratio test for evaluating the stability of subgrade.
10. Explain the remedial measures taken to avoid mud pumping.
11. Discuss in detail the various types of sub-surface drainage systems
12. Classify the different types of failures in rigid pavements and explain the remedial measures for avoiding
these failures
13. Describe the procedure of pavement evaluation by Benkleman Beam method
14. Identify the positive and negative impacts of transportation projects.
15. Explain in detail the step by step procedure of economic evaluation.
16. Review the various environmental impacts and suggest the best mitigation measures taken in case of a
highway project.
APPLY
1. Relate the application of remote sensing and satellite imagery in highway track alignment.
2. Illustrate with neat sketches the method of introducing the extra widening in curves.
3. Design the rate of superelevation to be provided for a horizontal curve of radius 325 m on a NH in a plain
terrain. Also, calculate the length of the transition curve to be provided.
4. Design the length of a valley curve formed by a descending gradient of 1 in 35 meeting an ascending
gradient of 1 in 30 to fulfill both comfort condition and head light sight distance requirements for a design
speed of 90 kmph. Assume allowable rate of change of centrifugal acceleration as 0.57 m/sec 2
5. Design a flexible pavement for a NH (two lane single carriageway) using the following data.
CBR of subgrade soil = 10 %
Annual rate of growth of traffic = 9 %
Period of construction = 4 years
Design period = 15 years
Assume any other data found required
6. Illustrate the different types of overlay with neat sketches
7. Prepare a Environmental Impact Assessment for construction of a new road.
8. How GIS can be applied in highway track alignment?
ANALYZE/EVALUATE
1. Analyze how the obligatory points affect the highway alignment.

2. Compare the merits and demerits of conventional methods with modern methods of highway alignment.
3. Contrast skid and slip and list out the factors influencing the friction.
4. The speeds of overtaking and overtaken vehicles are 80 and 60 kmph respectively. If the acceleration of the
overtaking vehicle is 2.5 kmph per second, calculate the safe passing distance for one way traffic and two-
way traffic.
5. Under what circumstances the provision of overlay can be justified?
6. A single lane road 50 km long is to be widened to two lanes at a cost of Rs. 45 lakhs per km including al
improvements. The cost of operation of vehicles on the single lane road is Rs.3.00 per vehicle km and Rs.
2.50 per vehicle km for the improved facility. The average traffic may be assumed as 5000 vehicles per day
over the design period of 10 years. The interest rate is 8 percent per annum. The cost of maintenance is
Rs.15, 000 per km on the existing road and Rs.20, 000 per km on the improved road. Analyze whether the
investment is worthwhile.
7. A new link is to be proposed to connect two taluk head quarters. The length of the proposed major district
road is 35 km. the cost of construction is Rs. 40 lakhs per km. the vehicle operating costs, accident costs
and maintenance costs with and without the link for the project period is tabulated below. The discount rate
is 6%. Evaluate whether the project is economically worth for the investment.
Road user costs Accident costs Maintenance costs

Year With Without With Without With Without
widening widening widening widening widening widening
1 110.5 180.7 1.7 3.0 8.0 5.0
2 123.2 168.28 1.8 3.1 8.0 5.0
3 135.6 196.3 1.9 3.2 8.0 5.0
4 147.8 215.2 2.0 3.3 8.0 5.0
5 165.3 220.0 2.1 3.4 8.0 5.0
6 172.6 229.0 2.2 3.5 8.0 5.0
7 178.4 240.0 2.3 3.6 8.0 5.0
8 183.1 249.5 2.4 3.7 8.0 5.0
9 186.5 278.2 2.5 3.8 8.0 5.0
10 189.5 290.1 2.6 3.9 8.0 5.0
All the costs are in lakhs.
Unit I
Highway Planning and Alignment
Jayakar committee recommendations - Institutions for highway planning and implementation at different levels -
Requirements of ideal alignment - Factors controlling highway alignment -Engineering surveys for alignment -
Conventional methods and modern methods (Remote Sensing, GIS and GPS techniques) - Highway cross sectional
elements – Right of Way, carriage way, camber, kerbs, shoulders and footpaths [IRC Standards]
Highway Development in India - Classification and cross section of urban and rural roads (IRC)
9 Hours
Unit II
Geometric Design of Highways
Design of horizontal alignments: Super elevation, Widening of pavements on horizontal curves and transition curves
[Derivation of Formulae and Problems]. Design of vertical alignments – gradients, summit and valley curves - Sight
distances: Factors affecting sight distances, PIEV Theory, Stopping Sight Distance (SSD), Overtaking Sight
Distance (OSD), [Derivations and Problems in SSD and OSD] - Geometric design of hill roads [IRC Standards
Only]
Sight distance at intersections, intermediate sight distance and illumination sight distance
9 Hours
Unit III
Highway Design and Construction
Desirable Properties and Testing of Highway Materials – Soil: California Bearing Ratio Test – Aggregate: Crushing,
Abrasion and Impact Tests - Bitumen: Penetration, Ductility, Viscosity, Binder Content and Softening Point Tests -
Design principles of flexible and rigid pavements – Design of flexible and rigid pavement (IRC Recommendations –
Problems) – Construction of WBM, Premix carpet, Surface dressing, bituminous concrete roads and cement
concrete roads
Soil tests – Field density test
9 Hours
Unit IV
Highway Maintenance
Types of defects in flexible pavements: Surface defects, cracks, deformation and disintegration – Symptoms, causes
and treatments - Types of pavement failures in rigid pavements: Scaling, shrinkage, warping, structural cracks,
spalling of joints and mud pumping – Overlays – Overlay design – Benkelman beam method
Special repairs – Highway drainage
9 Hours
Unit V
Economic Evaluation of Highway Projects
Evaluation of Highway Projects – COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs), methods and basic principles of economic
evaluation – Types of evaluation techniques – Cost Benefit Analysis (Benefit Cost Ratio, Net Present Value,
International Rate of Returns (Problems) – Environmental Impact Assessment – Cash flow analysis (Basic
principles)
Build, Operate and Transfer for Highway Projects (Basic Concepts only)
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. S. K. Khanna and C. E. G. Justo, Highway Engineering, Nem Chand and Bros., Roorkee, 2009
2. K. P. Subramaniam, Highway, Railway, Airport and Harbour Engineering, Scitech Publications, Chennai,
2011
References
1. IRC 37 – 2001, Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements

2. IRC 58 – 2002, Guidelines for the Design of Plain Jointed Rigid Pavements
3. S. K. Khanna and C. E. G. Justo, Highway Material Testing Manual, Nem Chand and Bros., Roorkee, 2002
4. L. R. Kadiyali, Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering, Khanna Publishers Ltd., New Delhi,
2000
11C703 BASICS OF STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS AND ASEISMIC DESIGN OF STRUCTURES

3 0 0 3.0
OBJECTIVES
 To impart knowledge on the theory of vibration and basics of structural dynamics

 To impart the design philosophy of earthquake resistant design of structures
 To create awareness on the use of codal provisions for aseismic design of structures
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
a) an ability to understand the behaviour and response of any structure for the given loading conditions
b) an ability to identify, formulate and to solve engineering problems
c) an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility
d) an ability to communicate effectively
e) the broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic,
environmental and societal context
f) a knowledge of contemporary issues
g) an ability to use the techniques, skills and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice, and
h) an ability to participate and succeed in competitive examinations
SKILL SET
1. Analyze a structure by seismic coefficient method.

2. Importance of providing ductility for a structure.
3. Importance of structural integrity of a masonry structure.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Sl. No Bloom‘s Category TEST TEST Model Semester end

1 2 examination examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 10 10 10 10
5 Evaluation - - - -
6 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define damping.
2. Define resonance.
3. Define earthquake.
4. Define the terms magnitude and intensity.
5. Define base shear.
6. State the terms DBE, MCE, MMI
7. Define Ductility.
8. Define strong column weak beam concept..
9. State the techniques for retrofitting.
10. State seismic isolation in a building
UNDERSTAND
1. What is mean by Frequency?

2. What is mean by free vibration and forced vibration?
3. Differentiate between P-waves and S-waves.
4. What is meant by Indian seismology
5. What do you understand by response spectrum?
6. What is the design philosophy adopted for earthquake resistant structure?
7. What do you understand by Lateral spreading?
8. What are the basic concepts for ductile performance structures?
9. What is retrofitting?
10. Write down the code books for retrofitting.
APPLY
1. Derive the equation for a free vibration system with damping.

2. Compare the equations of a system with and without damping conditions.
3. Relate Rayleigh waves and S-waves
4. Relate magnitude and intensity factors during an earthquake
5. Derive the equation for base shear.
6. What is the effect of seismic waves in a structure during an earthquake.
7. Compute the theory of weak beam and string column concept.
8. Compute the behavior of masonry structures during an earthquake.
9. Predict the codes used for repair and retrofitting of RC buildings.
10. Compute the methods used for improving the retrofitting of RC buildings.
ANALYZE
1. Compare in detail about free vibration and forced vibration of a system with and without damping.
2. Explain in detail about strong ground motion characteristics
3. Analyze a structure by Equivalent static analysis method.
4. Is building configuration requirement necessary.-Justify.
5. Summarize the method of base isolation.
CREATE
1. Explain in details about the seismic resistant design of buildings.

2. Sketch the ductile detailing of a RC building according to IS 1893.
Unit I
Introduction and Principles of Dynamics
Vibration studies and their importance to structural engineering problems - Elements of vibratory systems and
simple harmonic motion - Vibration with and without damping - Generalized mass - D' Alembert's principle -
Degree of freedom: Equation of motion for S.D.O.F. - Damped and undamped free vibrations - Undamped
forced vibration
Damped free Vibration,Undamped forced vibration
Unit II 9 Hours
Introduction to Earthquake Engineering
Elements of engineering seismology – Causes of earthquakes - Seismic waves - Magnitude - Intensity and
Energy release – Indian seismology – Earthquake history – Catastrophies – Failures - Lessons learnt from past
earthquakes – Seismic zone map of India – Strong motion characteristics
Causes of Earthquakes, lessons learnt from past earthquakes
9 Hours
Unit III
Aseismic Design of Buildings
Idealization of building frames - Introduction to methods of seismic analysis –
Equivalent static analysis - IS 1893 provisions – Design horizontal seismic coefficient - Design base shear
distribution - Seismic resistant design of buildings
Seismic resistant design of buildings
Unit IV 9 Hours
Earthquake Resistant Construction
Earthquake resistant properties of materials – Lateral force resisting systems – Strong column weak beam –
Guidelines for seismic resistant construction - Building configuration requirements – Ductile detailing of
reinforcements in RC buildings - Behavior and design of masonry structures.
Guidelines for seismic resistant construction
Unit V 9 Hours
Repairs and Retrofitting
Code of practices for repairs and retrofitting - Retrofitting of RC buildings and structural elements – Techniques
of retrofitting - Improving structural integrity of masonry buildings – Retrofitting by seismic isolation – Case
studies.
Retrofitting by seismic isolation
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Mario Paz, Structural Dynamics – Theory and Computation, CBS Publications, 2004
2. Pankaj Agarwal and Manish Shrikhande, Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures, Prentice Hall of India,
2006
3. A. K. Chopra, Dynamics of Structures - Theory and Applications to Earthquake Engineering, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002
References
1. IS 1893 – 2002, Criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures

2. IS 4326 – 1993, Earthquake Resistant Design and Construction of Buildings – Code of Practice
3. IS 13920 – 1993, Ductile Detailing of Reinforced Concrete Structures to Seismic Forces – Code of
Practice
4. IS 13935 – 1993, Repair and Seismic Strengthening of Buildings – Guidelines
5. http://www.bis.org.in/other/quake.htm
11C704 CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on concrete mix design and the importance of chemical/mineral admixtures
 To enhance the knowledge on construction planning, management and execution
1. Concrete mix design using various admixtures.

2. Design of masonry wall structures.
3. Identify the different types of construction equipments.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out any four mineral chemical admixtures used in concrete.

2. Name the different types of grades of cement.
3. Recall the types of bonds in masonry structures.
4. Identify the functional planning of buildings.
5. Recall the factors affecting the selection of construction equipments.
6. Repeat the special types of construction equipments.
7. Recall the concept of BOT.
8. Reproduce the advantages of CPM over PERT.
9. Relate the decay and damage of the structures.
10. Select any two repair techniques for the cracks in RC Beam.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain any two chemical admixtures used in concrete mix proportions.

2. Describe the properties of High strength concrete.
3. Summarize the Shoring methodology in building construction.
4. Indicate the Functional planning of building.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to a maximum 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
a maximum of 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal
assessment will be calculated for 50 marks
5. Express the operations of Earthwork equipment.

6. Describe the network analysis in construction management.
7. Indicate the cost reduction measures in construction planning.
8. Describe the causes of deterioration of concrete structures.
ANALYZE
1. Differentiate between chemical and mineral admixtures used in concrete mix.

2. Examine the chemical reaction of High strength concrete with mineral admixture.
3. Identify the distresses in concrete structures.
4. Point out the safety measures in construction.
APPLY / EVALUATE
1. Apply the prevention measures for the Deterioration of structures.

2. Write the damage assessment procedure in repair and rehabilitation of structures.
CREATE
1. Develop a high strength concrete mix design procedure incorporating different admixtures.
Unit I
Concrete Mix Design and Admixtures
Grade of cements: 43 grade - 53 grade - High strength concrete - Testing of fresh and hardened concrete - Non
destructive testing - Chemical admixtures - Mineral admixtures - Plasticizers - Accelerators - Air entraining
admixtures - Construction chemicals
Colouring agents - Workability agents.
9 Hours
Unit II
Construction Techniques
Building components and their functions: Brick masonry – Bonds – Jointing - Stone masonry - Design of brick
masonry walls as per I.S. Codes – Specifications - Details and sequence of activity and construction co-
ordination - Site clearance - Marking - Earthwork - Building foundations - Basements - Temporary shed –
Shuttering sheet piles - Slip and moving forms - Design of forming work - Scaffoldings - Deshuttering forms -
Types of floors & roofs – Ventilators - Functional planning of building: Building orientation – Circulation -
Grouping of areas - Privacy concept - Provisions of National Building Code - Building estimates and
specifications - Cost of works - Valuation.
Shoring – Shoring methodology
9 Hours
Unit III
Construction Equipments
Standard and special types of equipment - Preventive maintenance and repair - Factors affecting the selection of
equipment - Economical life - Capital and maintenance cost - Concreting equipments: Weigh batcher - Concrete
pump - Earthwork equipment: Power shovel – Bulldozer – Dumper – Trailers – Tractors - Rollers and sheep
foot roller.
Mixer – Vibration - Batching plant
9 Hours
Unit IV
Construction Planning and Management
Construction activity – Schedules - Job layout - Bar charts - Organization of contracting firms - Project control
and supervision - Network analysis: CPM and PERT analysis – Difference between CPM and PERT –
Advantage of CPM over PERT - Float times - Cashing of activities - Contraction of network for cost
optimization - Up dating - Cost analysis and resource allocation – Concept of BOT – BOOT- DPR – Preparation
of DPR - Safety in construction - Conflict resolution.
Cost reduction measures
9 Hours
Unit V
Repair and Rehabilitation Works
Definitions: Maintenance - Repair - Rehabilitation - Distresses in concrete structures - Deterioration of
structures: Causes and Prevention - Crack repair techniques - Repair techniques/materials for structures - -
Repair of structural components - Research and Development.
Damage assessment procedure
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. P. C. Varghese, Building Construction, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2010
2. B. C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Building Construction, Laxmi Publication (P)
References
1. A. R. Santhakumar, Concrete Technology, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2007

2. Sushilkumar, Building Construction, Standard Publishers Distributors, 2001
3. B. L. Gupta and Amit Gupta, Construction Management and Accounts, Standard Publishers Distributors,
New Delhi, 1997
ELECTIVE III
3 0 0 3.0
ELECTIVE IV
3 0 0 3.0
11C707 COMPUTER AIDED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN, DRAWING AND DETAILING OF

STRUCTURES
0 0 3 1.5
 To impart fundamental knowledge on AutoCAD, Staad Pro and Strud.

 To impart a clear understanding on the computer aided analysis and design of structural components.
 To enhance the computing capability of the students to draw the plan, elevation and sectional view of
various structural elements.
sustainability

1. Design of building components
2. Design of T beam bridges
3. Design of Industrial Components
4. Design of special structures
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXERCISES
Design and Detailing of

1. Floor slab system with T beam
2. Combined rectangular footing
3. Counter fort retaining wall
4. Elevated circular water tank with staging
5. Reinforced concrete T beam bridge deck
6. Plate Girder
7. Gantry Girder
8. Roof Truss
9. Columns with gusseted bases
10. Columns with Battens
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
Sl. No. Exercises Hours

1 Design and Detailing of Floor slab system with T beam 3
2 Design and Detailing of Combined rectangular footing 3
3 Design and Detailing of Counterfort retaining wall 6
4 Design and Detailing of Elevated circular water tank with staging 6
5 Design and Detailing of Reinforced Concrete T Beam Bridge Deck 6
6 Design and Detailing of Plate Girder 6
7 Design and Detailing of Gantry Girder 6
8 Design and Detailing of Roof Truss 3
9 Design and Detailing of Columns with gusseted bases 3
10 Design and Detailing of Columns with Battens 3
11C708 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5
 To provide basic knowledge on the various methods of analysis of water and wastewater
 To emphasize the need for water and wastewater treatment
1. Demonstrate the various characteristics of water and wastewater sample

2. Analyze a water sample.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation 10 15
Record 10 -
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of various forms

• Hardness
• pH
• Acidity
• Alkalinity
• Turbidity and Dissolved and comment in water and wastewater samples
2. Estimation of chlorides and total dissolved solids in
water and wastewater
3. Determination of available chlorine in bleaching powder
4. Analysis of sulphates in water and wastewater samples
5. Evaluation of iron and fluoride in given water sample
6. Calculation of amount of nitrates present in drinking water for a given sample.
7. Estimation of BOD and COD
8. To examine whether a given water sample is potable as per Indian Standards
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
S. No. Exercise Hours

1 Determination of various forms of hardness and pH in water and 3
wastewater
2 Identification of acidity and alkalinity in various forms in water and 3
wastewater
3 Estimation of chlorides and total dissolved solids in water and 3
wastewater
4 Determination of available chlorine in bleaching powder 3
5 Determination of turbidity of water and wastewater 3
6 Analysis of sulphates in water and wastewater 3
7 Assessment of fluoride in drinking water 3
8 Evaluation of iron and manganese in given water sample 3
9 Determination of nitrates in drinking water 3
10 Estimation of DO and BOD 6
11 To examine whether a given water sample is potable as per Indian 6
Standards
12 Mini Project – Design of Waste water treatment in stages 6
11C709 PROJECT WORK PHASE I

- - - 3.0
sustainability
110801 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS

(Common to all Branches)
2 0 0 2.0
 To study the basic issues in Professional Ethics

 To appreciate the rights of others and to instill moral, social values and loyalty
 To enable the student in their engineering profession who explore the ethical issues in technological society

(h) the broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic,
environmental, and societal context
1. Ability to propose possible solutions using articulated ethical theories

2. Ability to form opinions based on reasoned ethical positions, supported with facts and evidence
3. Increase in awareness of the ethical component of daily engineering decisions
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze/Evaluate - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
3
REMEMBER
1. Define Human Values.

2. What are Morals and Values?
3. What do you mean by Civic virtue and Respect for others?
4. Write the various meanings of ―Spirituality‖?
5. List four different types of Virtues.
6. Mention different Human values.
7. What is meant by moral autonomy?
8. Classify the types of inquiry.
9. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?
10. List the levels of moral development suggested by Kohlberg.
11. What do you understand by self-interest and ethical egoism?
12. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?
13. What are the three virtues of religion?.
14. What are the professional responsibilities?
15. What is meant by ―Informed consent‖ when bringing an engineering product to market?
16. What is engineering experimentation?
3 †
The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and Model Examination will be
17. What are the different roles and functions of ―Code of Ethics‖?
18. What are the Limitations of ―Code of Ethics‖?
19. Name some of the engineering societies which published ―codes of ethics‖.
20. What is meant by a disaster?
UNDERSTAND
1. Which are the practical skills that will help to produce effective independent thought about moral issues?
2. Why does engineering have to be viewed as an experimental process?
3. Why isn‘t engineering possible to follow a random selection in product design?
4. Why is the ―code of ethics‖ important for engineers in their profession?
5. What does the Balanced Outlook on Law stress in directing engineering practice?
6. Are the engineers responsible to educate the public for safe operation of the equipment? How?
7. What kind of responsibility should the engineer have to avoid mistakes that may lead to accident due to the
design of their product?
8. What is the use of knowledge of risk acceptance to engineers?
9. Why is Environmental Ethics so important to create environmental awareness to the general public?
10. Why do the engineers refuse to do war works sometimes?
APPLY
1. How does the consideration of engineering as a social experimentation help to keep a sense of autonomous
participation is a person‘s work?
2. How does the ―code of ethics‖ provide discipline among the engineers?
3. How would you classify the space shuttle Challenger case accident?
4. How does the manufacturer understand the risk in a product catalog or manual?
5. How does the knowledge of uncertainties in design help the engineers to access the risk of a product?
6. How can the quantifiable losses in social welfare resulting from a fatality be estimated? Give some
examples.
7. How does the engineer act to safeguard the public from risk?
Unit I
Human Values
Morals, Values and Ethics – Integrity – Work Ethic – Service Learning – Civic Virtue – Respect for Others – Living
Peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing Time – Co-operation – Commitment – Empathy –
Self-Confidence
Character – Spirituality in business
6 Hours
Unit II
Engineering Ethics
Senses of 'Engineering Ethics' – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral autonomy – Kohlberg's theory –
Gilligan's theory – Consensus and controversy – Models of Professional Roles – Theories about right action
Self-interest – Uses of ethical theories.
6 Hours
Unit III
Engineering as Social Experimentation
Engineering as experimentation – Engineers as responsible experimenters – Codes of ethics – A balanced outlook on
law – The Challenger case study – Bhopal Gas Tragedy – The Three Mile Island and Chernobyl case studies
Safety aspects in Nuclear Power plants
6 Hours
Unit IV
Responsibilities and Rights
Fundamental Rights, Responsibilities and Duties of Indian Citizens – Collegiality and loyalty – Respect for
authority – Collective bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of interest – Occupational crime – Professional rights
– Employee rights – Discrimination
Right to Information Act
6 Hours
Unit V
Global Issues
Multinational corporations – Environmental ethics and Environmental Protection Act – Computer ethics – Engineers
as managers – Consulting engineers – Engineers as expert witnesses and advisors – Moral leadership – Sample code
of ethics like IETE, ASME, ASCE, IEEE, Institution of Engineers (India), Indian Institute of Materials Management
Weapons development
6 Hours
Total: 30 Hours
Textbook
1. M. Govindarajan, S. Natarajan and V. S. Senthil Kumar, Engineering Ethics, PHI Learning Private Ltd,
New Delhi, 2012.
References
1. Charles D. Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India , New Jersey,
2004.
2. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Protchard and Michael J. Rabins, Engineering Ethics – Concepts and Cases,
Wadsworth Thompson Learning, United States, 2005.
4. http://www.slideworld.org/slidestag.aspx/human-values-and- Professional-ethics
5. www.mne.psu.edu/lamancusa/ProdDiss/Misc/ethics.ppt
ELECTIVE V
3 0 0 3.0
ELECTIVE VI
3 0 0 3.0
11C804 PROJECT WORK PHASE II
- - - 12.0
sustainability
11O10B BASIC ENGLISH I *

3 0 0 3.0
 To offer students the basics of the English Language in a graded manner.

 To promote efficiency in English Language by offering extensive opportunities for the development of
four language skills (LSRW) within the classroom.
 To give an intense focus on improving and increasing vocabulary.
 To improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering students rigorous practice and exercises.

g) An ability to communicate effectively
1. Listening
2. Reading
3. Writing
4. Speaking
Unit I
Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets COURSE LEARNING
OUTCOME (CLO)s
1 Basic words- 12 most used words in Starting a conversation and Sentence construction
English, usage and pronunciation talking about what one does bolstered by mother
tongue
2 Basic words- 20 oft used words, usage Analysing an action plan Creating and presenting
and pronunciation one‘s own action plan
3 Basic words with a focus on spelling Discriminative listening Informal conversation
4 Basic words- 10 oft used words, usage Content listening and Reading comprehension
and pronunciation Intonation
5 Tutorial
Unit II

OUTCOME (CLO)s
6 Basic words + greetings to be used at Formal conversation Intonation to be used in
different times of the day formal address
7 Last 28 of the 100 most used words Informal conversation Reading practice and peer
between equals learning
8 Using the 14 target words to form Informal dialogues using Guided speaking- talking
bigger words contracted forms to peers using contracted
forms
9 Palindromes, greetings- good luck, Placing a word within its Offering congratulations
festivals context- culling out meaning
10 Tutorial
*
Subject to continuous assessment
Unit III

OUTCOME (CLO)s
11 Homophones Formal and informal methods Let‘s Talk is a group
of self-introduction activity that gives them
some important pointers
of speech
12 Homophone partners, matching words Contracted forms of the –be Translating English
with their meanings verbs, ‗ve and ‗s sentences to Tamil
13 Briefcase words- finding smaller words Formal and informal ways of Team work- speaking
from a big word introducing others activity involving group
work, soft skills
14 Compound words and pronunciation Giving personal details about Using the lexicon
pointers oneself
15 Tutorial
Unit IV

OUTCOME (CLO)s
16 Proper and common nouns Asking for personal Pronunciation pointers-
information and details an informal introduction
to the IPA
17 Pronouns Telephone skills and etiquette Reading aloud and
comprehension
18 Abstract and common nouns Dealing with a wrong number Reading practice and
comprehension
19 Group names of animals, adjectives Taking and leaving messages Pronunciation pointers
on the telephone
20 Test
Unit V

OUTCOME (CLO)s
21 Determiners Interrupting a conversation Pair work reading
politely- formal and informal comprehension
22 Conjugation of the verb ‗to be‘- Thanking and responding to Comprehension questions
positive and negative forms thanks that test scanning,
skimming and deep
reading
23 Am/is/are questions Giving instructions and Small group activity that
seeking clarifications develops dialogue writing
24 Present continuous tense-form and Making inquiries on the Finishing sentences with
usage telephone appropriate verbs
25 Tutorial
Unit VI

OUTCOME (CLO)s
26 Words with silent ‗b‘ Calling for help in an Dialogue writing
Present continuous questions emergency
27 Words with silent ‗c‘ Making requests and Identifying elements of
Simple present tense- form and usage responding to them politely grammar in text extract
28 Simple present tense- rules Describing people Guided writing
29 Words with silent ‗g‘ Describing places Filling in the blanks with
Questions in the simple present tense correct markers of tense
30 Tutorial
Total: 45 Hours
Resources
1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.

11O10C COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH *

3 0 0 3.0
 To equip students with effective speaking and listening skills in English

 To help the students develop speaking skills in Business English
1. Students will develop the fluency and language competence of learners of Business English at the lower
intermediate level
Unit I
Grammar and Vocabulary
Vocabulary for describing different company structures and company hierarchy – Practice using wh – questions;
there is / there are, Definitions of Quality, Vocabulary of quality management – Using nouns and adjectives to form
group nouns – Phrases for offering and accepting help and invitations – Telephone terms – Verb tenses – Questions
and responses – Conditionals – Gap Filling Exercises.
9 Hours
Unit II
Listening
Business Presentation – Conversation between old friends; introducing a stranger – A Quality Manager talks about
his work – Conversation between acquaintances – Sales talk at a sports equipment stand – Small talk among
colleagues – A tour of a factory in Italy – Lunch in the factory canteen – A meeting to improve the efficiency of
internal communication – A phone conversation arranging to meet – A credit card salesman talks to the bank – A
conversation between business acquaintances - A management meeting about a recent merger – A conversation
about a town, a country and its people.
9 Hours
Unit III
Speaking
Pronunciation Practice – Describing organizations - A company presentation –– Practicing of conversation starters
and closers with friends and strangers – Practice of simple language and step – by – step procedures to describe
complex ideas – Explaining visual information – The language of increase and decrease applied to graphs and bar
charts - Presenting a work – related graph – Making a telephone call – A sports equipment buyer and a
manufacturer‘s sales representative talk business – Entertaining a visitor in your country – A short marketing
meeting – Negotiating to meet around a busy schedule – Pairs or small groups discuss the implications of problems
at an electronics factory – Finding out all you can about a partner – Chairing and holding meetings – Pairwork on
questions and answers about places and people.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Reading
Signalling the structure of a presentation – introducing, sequencing and concluding a talk - Explaining concepts and
ideas – The pattern of phone call conversations – Giving, getting and checking information – Common Business
phrases – Giving encouragement: phrases for positive feedback; more emphatic adjectives and adverbs – Giving
facts and explaining functions and processes – Asking for and clarifying information – How to state your point,
agree and disagree – Practice of frequency, quantity and number - A short marketing meeting – Suggesting and
agreeing times and places – Phrases for the Chairperson – People at work: their emotions, skills and attitudes.
9 Hours
*
Unit V
Writing
Making conditions using the present and future conditional Phrases for stalling for time - Common telephone
phrases and responses - Business Communication – Calling for Quotation – Letter asking for Clarification –
Transcoding – Rearranging the sentences – Cloze – Explaining visual information – Explaining concepts and ideas –
Giving, getting and checking information – Business description – Informal negotiations.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. Jeremy Comfort, Pamela Rogerson, Trish Stott, and Derek Utley, Speaking Effectively – Developing
Speaking Skills for Business English, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 2002.
References
1. Brook-Hart Guy, BEC VANTAGE: BUSINESS BENCHMARK Upper-Intermediate – Student’s Book,

Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Aruna Koneru, Professional Communication, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi,
2008.
3. P. Kiranmai Dutt, Geetha Rajeevan and CLN Prakash, A Course in Communication Skills, Cambridge
University Press, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Krishna Mohan Balaji, Advanced Communicative English, Tata McGraw-hill Education Private Limited,
New Delhi, 2009.
11O20B BASIC ENGLISH II *

3 1 0 3.5
 To promote fluency even downplaying accuracy

 A tacit acquisition of Basic English Grammar through ample listening, reading and writing inputs with
direct theory or wherever relevant
 Specific focus on speaking and conversation skills with an aim to increase speaking confidence
 To nurture the capacity to express lucidly and articulate their thoughts and impressions on a wide gamut of
topics both through speaking and writing
 To improve spelling and pronunciation by offering rigorous practice and exercises
 To correct common mistakes and to teach self-assessment techniques

1. Listening
2. Reading
3. Writing
4. Speaking
Unit I
COURSE LEARNING
Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets
Module OUTCOME (CLO)s
Difference between present Calling for help in an Reporting an event-
31 continuous and simple present emergency journalistic style
tense.
Verbs ‗have‘ and ‗have got‘ Describing animals Asking for and giving
32 directions
Simple past tense Inviting people, Self- enquiry and
33 accepting and declining offering ones opinion
invitations on a given topic.
Spelling rules & table of Refusing an invitation Reading and practicing
34 irregular verbs pre-written dialogues
35 Tutorial
Unit II
COURSE LEARNING
Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets
Questions and the negative Apologizing and responding (Reading) conversation
36 forms of the simple past tense to an apology practice
37 Asking questions in the simple Reading comprehension Seeking, granting and
past tense refusing permission.
Past continuous tense Paying compliments and Pair work: writing dialogues
38 responding to them and presenting them
Difference between simple past Describing daily routines Reading and comprehension
39 and past continuous- when and skills.
where to use each
40 Tutorial
*
Unit III
Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets COURSE LEARNING

Simple future tense Talking about the Making plans- applying
41 weather grammar theory to written
work
42 Simple future tense- more Talking about Opening up and
aspects, possessive pronouns possessions expressing one‘s emotions
43 Future continuous Talking about current Listening comprehension
activities
44 Revision of future tense- Asking for the time Discussion- analyzing and
simple and continuous forms, and date debating a given topic.
prepositions used with time
and date
45 Tutorial
Unit IV

46 Articles a/an Writing, speaking and Transcribing dictation
presentation skills
47 Singular- Plural (usage of Reading practice- Comprehension –logical
a/an) independent and shared analysis, process analysis
reading and subjective expression
48 Countable and uncountable Listening Vocabulary: using context
nouns- a/an and some comprehension tools to decipher meaning
49 Articles- the Sequencing sentences in Listening to a poem being
a paragraph recited, answer questions
on it and practice reciting
the same
50 Tutorial
Unit V

51 Articles- the: usage and Speaking: sharing stories Listening: comprehend and
avoidance about family, village/town, follow multiple step
childhood etc. 10 students instructions read out by the
teacher
52 Articles- the: usage and Speaking: sharing stories Reading: make inferences
avoidance with like and about family, village/town, from the story about the
hate childhood etc.- 10 students plot, setting and characters
53 Articles- the: usage and Speaking: sharing stories Comprehension passage
avoidance with names of about family, village/town,
places childhood etc.- 10 students
54 This/ that/ these and those Writing a notice- Speaking: Debate
announcement
55 Tutorial
Unit VI

56 One and ones Collaborative learning- Writing short answers to
problem solving questions based on reading
57 Capitalization and punctuation Controlled writing Listen to a story and
respond to its main
elements
58 Syntax and sentence Guided writing Listen to a poem and
construction- rearrange discuss its elements
jumbled sentences
59 Cloze Free writing Frame simple yet
purposeful questions about
a given passage
60 Tutorial
45 + 15 Hours
Resource
1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.
11O20C ADVANCED COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH*

3 1 0 3.5
 To take part in a discussion in an effective manner

 To listen to an explanation and respond
 To write a formal communication
 To read company literature or any document
1. Read graphs and charts

2. Skim and scan texts like job adverts
3. Read business articles for specific information
4. Understand the structure of a text
Unit I
Grammar and Vocabulary
Comparison of adjectives and adverbs – tenses – simple and complex questions – countable/ uncountable nouns, -
ing forms and infinitives – conditionals – comparing and contrasting ideas – modal verbs – while and whereas for
contrasting ideas – passives – used to, articles, reported speech, relative pronouns and expressing cause and result –
workplace-related vocabulary.
9 Hours
Unit II
Listening
Prediction - the ability to identify information – ability to spell and write numbers correctly – ability to infer,
understand gist, topic, context, and function, and recognize communicative functions ( complaining, greeting,
apologizing, etc.) – ability to follow a longer listening task and interpret what the speakers say.
9 Hours
Unit III
Speaking
The ability to talk about oneself and perform functions such as agreeing and disagreeing – ability to express
opinions, agree, disagree, compare and contrast ideas and reach a decision in a discussion – appropriate use of stress,
rhythm, intonation and clear individual speech sounds - take an active part in the development of the discourse -
turn-taking and sustain the interaction by initiating and responding appropriately.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Reading
The ability to skim and scan business articles for specific details and information – To understand the meaning and
the structure of the text at word, phrase, sentence, and paragraph level – ability to read in detail and interpret
opinions and ideas – to develop one‘s understanding and knowledge of collocations – ability to identify and correct
errors in texts.
9 Hours
Unit V
Writing
The ability to write concisely, communicate the correct content and write using the correct register – ability to write
requests, instructions, explanations, and ask for information by using the correct format in business correspondences
like charts, memo, note, email, letter, fax, report, proposal – understanding formal and informal styles – responding
to written or graphic input. 9 Hours
*
Textbook
1. Brook-Hart, Guy, Business Benchmark: Upper Intermediate – Student‘s Book, Cambridge University
Press, New Delhi, 2006.
References
1. Whitby, Norman, Bulats Edition: Business Benchmark, Pre-Intermediate to Intermediate – Student‘s Book,
Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Cambridge Examinations Publishing, Cambridge BEC Vantage – Self-study Edition, Cambridge University
Press, UK, 2005.
11O20G GERMAN *
3 1 0 3.5
 To help students acquire the basics of German language

 To teach them how to converse in German in various occasions
1. Listening
2. Reading
3. Writing
4. Speaking
Unit I
Grammar & Vocabulary
Introduction to German language: Alphabets, Numbers – Nouns - Pronouns Verbs and Conjugations - definite and
indefinite article - Negation - Working with Dictionary – Nominative - Accusative and dative case – propositions -
adjectives - modal auxiliaries - Imperative case - Possessive articles.
9 Hours
Unit II
Listening
Listening to CD supplied with the books, paying special attention to pronunciation: Includes all lessons in the book
– Greetings - talking about name – country – studies – nationalities - ordering in restaurants - travel office -
Interaction with correction of pronunciation.
9 Hours
Unit III
Speaking
Speaking about oneself - about family – studies - questions and answers - dialogue and group conversation on topics
in textbooks - talks on chosen topics.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Reading
Reading lessons and exercises in the class - pronunciation exercises: Alphabet – name – country – people –
profession – family – shopping – travel – numbers – friends – restaurant – studies - festivals
9 Hours
Unit V
Writing
Alphabets – numbers - words and sentences - Exercises in the books - control exercises - writing on chosen topics
such as one self – family – studies - country.
9 Hours
Textbooks
1. Grundkurs DEUTSCH A Short Modern German Grammar Workbook and Glossary, VERLAG FUR
DEUTSCH, Munichen, 2007.
2. Grundkurs, DEUTSCH Lehrbuch Hueber Munichen, 2007.
References
1. Cassel Language Guides – German: Christine Eckhard – Black & Ruth Whittle, Continuum, London / New
York, 1992.
*
2. Kursbuch and Arbeitsbuch, TANGRAM AKTUELL 1 DEUTSCH ALS FREMDSPRACHE, NIVEAUSTUFE

AI/1, Deutschland, Goyal Publishers & Distributers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
3. Langenscheidt Eurodictionary – German – English / English – German, Goyal Publishers & Distributers
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
11O20J JAPANESE *
3 1 0 3.5
 To help students acquire the basics of Japanese language

 To teach them how to converse in Japanese in various occasions
 To teach the students the Japanese cultural facets and social etiquettes
1. Listening
2. Reading
3. Writing
4. Speaking
Unit I
Introduction to Japanese - Japanese script - Pronunciation of Japanese(Hiragana) - Long vowels - Pronunciation of
in,tsu,ga - Letters combined with ya,yu,yo - Daily Greetings and Expressions - Numerals. N1 wa N2 des - N1 wa
N2 ja arimasen - S ka - N1mo - N1 no N2 - …….san - Kanji - Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)
9 Hours
Unit II
Introduction - Kore - Sore - are - Kono N1 - Sono N1 - ano N1 - so des - so ja arimasen - S1 ka - S2 ka - N1 no N1 -
so des ka – koko - soko - asoko - kochira - sochira - achira - N1 wa N2 (Place) des – dhoko-N1 no N2 - Kanji-10 -
ima….ji…fun des - Introduction of verb - V mas - V masen - V mashitha - V masen deshitha - N1(Time) ne V - N1
kara N2 des - N1 tho N2 / S ne Kanji-10 - Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers) – Dictionary Usage.
9 Hours
Unit III
- N1(Place) ye ikimas - ki mas - kayerimasu - Dhoko ye mo ikimasen - ikimasendheshitha - N1(vehicle) de ikimasu
- kimasu - kayerimasu - N1(Personal or Animal) tho V ithsu - S yo. - N1 wo V (Transitive) - N1 wo shimus - Nani
wo shimasu ka - Nan & Nani - N1(Place) de V - V masen ka - V masho - Oo……. Kanji-10 , N1( tool - means ) de
V - ― Word / Sentence ‖ wa …go nan des ka - N1( Person ) ne agemus - N1( Person ) ne moraimus - mo V
shimashitha - , Kanji-10 – Japanese Typewriting using JWPCE Software, Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25
Numbers)
9 Hours
Unit IV
Introduction to Adjectives - N1 wa na adj des. N1 wa ii adj des - na adj na N1 - ii adj ii N1 - Thothemo - amari - N1
wa dho des ka - N1 wa dhonna N2 des ka - S1 ka S2 – dhore - N1 ga arimasu - wakarimasu - N1 ga suki masu - N1
ga kiraimasu - jozu des - hetha des - dhonna N1 - Usages of yoku - dhaithai - thakusan - sukoshi - amari - zenzen -
S1 kara S2 - dhoshithe, N1 ga arimasu - imasu - N1(Place) ne N2 ga arimasu - iimasu - N1 wa N2(Place) ne arimasu
- iimasu - N1(Person,Place,or Thing ) no N2 (Position) - N1 ya N2, Kanji-10 - Japanese Dictionary usage using
JWPCE Software, Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)
9 Hours
*
Unit V
Saying Numbers , Counter Suffixes , Usages of Quantifiers -Interrogatives - Dhono kurai - gurai – Quantifier-
(Period ) ne ….kai V - Quantifier dhake / N1 dhake Kanji - Past tense of Noun sentences and na Adjective
sentences - Past tense of ii-adj sentences - N1 wa N2 yori adj des - N1 tho N2 tho Dhochira ga adj des ka and its
answering method - N1 [ no naka ] de {nani/dhoko/dhare/ithsu} ga ichiban adj des ka - answering -N1 ga hoshi des -
V1 mas form dhake mas - N1 (Place ) ye V masu form ne iki masu/ki masu/kayeri masu - N1 ne V/N1 wo V -
Dhoko ka - Nani ka – gojumo - Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)
9Hours
Textbooks
1. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook 1-1, Goyal Publishers and Distributors Pvt. Ltd., Delhi,
2007.
2. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook 1-2, Goyal Publishers and Distributors Pvt. Ltd., Delhi,
2007.
References
Software
1. Nihongo Shogo-1
2. Nihongo Shogo-2
3. JWPCE Software
Websites
1. www.japaneselifestyle.com
2. www.learn-japanese.info/
3. www.kanjisite.com/
4. www.learn-hiragana-katakana.com/typing-hiragana-characters/
11O20F FRENCH *
3 1 0 3.5
 To help students acquire the basics of French language

 To teach them how to converse in French in various occasions

1. Listening
2. Reading
3. Writing
4. Speaking
Unit I
Alphabet Français (alphabets) - Les accents français (the accents in French) – aigu – grave – circonflexe – tréma -
cédille - écrire son nom dans le français (spelling one‘s name in French)
9 Hours
Unit II
Les noms de jours de la semaine (Days of the week) - Les noms de mois de l'année (Months) - numéro 1 à 100
(numbers 1 to 100)
9 Hours
Unit III
Moyens de transport (transport) - noms de professions (professions) - noms d'endroits communs (places) -
nationalités (nationalities)
9 Hours
Unit IV
Pronoms (pronouns) - Noms communs masculins et de femme (common masculine and feminine nouns) - Verbes
communs (common verbs)
9 Hours
Unit V
Présentation - même (Introducing Oneself) - narration de son nom - l'endroit où on vit - son âge - date de naissance -
sa profession - numéro de téléphone - adresse (name - where one lives – age - date of birth – profession - telephone
number and address) - Narration du temps (tellling the time)
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook
1. Angela Wilkes, French for Beginners, Usborne Language Guides, Usborne Publishing Ltd., Ohio, 1987.
References
1. Ann Topping, Beginners French Reader, Natl Textbook Co, 1975.
2. Stanley Applebaum, First French Reader, Dover Publications, 1998.
3. Max Bellancourt, Cours de Français, London: Linguaphone, 2000.
Software
1. Français Linguaphone, Linguaphone Institute Ltd., London, 2000.
2. Français I. Harrisonburg: The Rosetta Stone: Fairfield Language Technologies, 2001.
*
11O20H HINDI *
3 1 0 3.5
 To help students acquire the basics of Hindi

 To teach them how to converse in Hindi in various occasions
 To help learners acquire the ability to understand a simple technical text in Hindi
1. Listening
2. Reading
3. Writing
4. Speaking
Unit I
Hindi Alphabet
Introduction - Vowels - Consonants - Plosives - Fricatives - Nasal sounds - Vowel Signs - Chandra Bindu & Visarg
-Table of Alphabet -Vocabulary.
9 Hours
Unit II
Nouns
Genders (Masculine & Feminine Nouns ending in – ā,і,ī, u,ū )- Masculine & Feminine – Reading Exercises.
9 Hours
Unit III
Pronouns and Tenses
Categories of Pronouns - Personal Pronouns - Second person (you & honorific) - Definite & Indefinite pronouns -
Relative pronouns - Present tense - Past tense - Future tense - Assertive & Negative Sentences - Interrogative
Sentences.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Classified Vocabulary
Parts of body – Relatives – Spices – Eatables – Fruit & Vegetables - Clothes - Directions – Seasons - Professions.
9 Hours
Unit V
Speaking
Model Sentences – Speaking practice for various occasions.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook
1. B. R. Kishore, Self Hindi Teacher for Non-Hindi Speaking People, Vee Kumar Publications (P) Ltd., New
Delhi, 2009.
References
1. Syed, Prayojan Mulak Hindi, Rahamathullah Vani Prakasan, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Ramdev, Vyakaran Pradeep, Saraswathi Prakasan, Varanasi, 2004.
*
11C001 MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

3 0 0 3.0
 To provide basic knowledge on the management practices of municipal solid waste

 To emphasize the need for municipal solid waste management
 To provide basic knowledge on the storage, treatment and processing techniques of municipal waste, and
on the process of land filling and incineration.

1. Demonstrate the procedure for municipal solid waste

2. Identify the methods to collect, convey and disposal of municipal solid waste
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 40 40 40 40
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define solid wastes

2. List the scope and importance of solid wastes management.
3. State land Pollution
4. List out the functional elements of solid waste management
5. List out the effects of improper disposal of solid wastes
6. What is the role of NGOs?
7. Method of on-site storage. Discuss.
8. What are materials used for containers?
9. Define transfer stations.
10. What are components of separation?
11. What is meant by chemical reduction and biological processing?
12. Define composting.
13. Differentiate aerobic and anaerobic composting.
14. List out the factors affecting incineration process.
15. What is meant by energy recovery operations?
†
UNDERSTAND
1. Discuss role of Environmental Engineering.

2. Summarize the importance of municipal solid waste
3. Discuss land pollution.
4. Why public health is important?
5. What is the use of on-site storage methods?
6. Discuss the critical evaluation options collection and transportations systems of collection of municipal
solid waste
7. List out the classification and characteristics of municipal solid waste.
8. What is meant by route optimization?
9. List out the Industrial waste disposal.
10. Why components of separation are employed in municipal solid waste?
11. Define pyrolysis
12. What is the end product of composting?
13. List out the type of sanitary land filling.
14. Discuss Leachate collection and control methods.
15. What is the deference between Indore and Bangalore processes of composting?
16. What is the difference between the mechanical and semi mechanical composting processes?
17. Discuss the factors affecting incineration process.
18. What is the use of recycle and reuse of material?
19. List out the energy recovery operations.
APPLY
1. How will human health be affected by municipal solid waste?

2. What are the causes of Land Pollution?
3. How will you apply the functional elements of solid waste management?
4. How will you find the effects of improper disposal municipal solid waste?
5. How to design the on-site storage site?
6. How to design the on-site segregation of solid wastes?
7. What are factors consider the selection of collection equipment?
8. How to design the Pyrolysis?
9. How to design the Composting method?
10. What are the situations to apply feeding to hog?
11. What are the situations to apply trench area method of land filling?
12. What are the situations to apply ramp and pit method of land filling?
13. What are the applications of vermi-composting?
14. What are the applications of Indore and Bangalore processes of composting?
15. How to apply the incineration in municipal solid waste?
16. How to prevent air pollution?
CREATE
1. Write down the various components of municipal solid waste.

2. Tell about Public awareness in municipal solid waste.
3. Prepare the method of on-site segregation of solid wastes.
4. Summarize route optimization.
5. Explain components of separation.
6. Assemble volume reduction and size reduction.
7. Write various Processes 3 T‘s.
8. Prepare the prevention of air pollution.
9. Tell about recycle and reuse material.
10. Explain energy recovery operations.
Unit I
Introduction
Solid wastes – Definition - Scope and importance – Land Pollution – Functional elements of solid waste
management – Quantity assessment – Generation rate – Factors affecting sources – Methods of sampling –
characterization – Effects of improper disposal of solid wastes – Public health effects – Social and economic aspects
– Role of NGOs – Legislation.
Public awareness
9 Hours
Unit II
On – Site Storage and Processing
On-site storage methods – Materials used for containers – On-site segregation of solid wastes – Public and economic
aspects of storage options under Indian conditions – Critical evaluation options collection and transportations
systems of collection - Collection equipment - Garbage chutes - Transfer stations – Bailing and compacting - Route
optimization - Classification and characteristics – Municipal - Industrial waste disposal.
Hospital/biomedical
9 Hours
Unit III
Treatment and Processing Techniques
Components of separation - Volume reduction - Size reduction - Chemical reduction and biological processing -
Disposal methods - open dumping – Selection of site - Ocean disposal - Feeding to hog – Incineration - Pyrolysis
- Composting - Sanitary land filling – Merits and demerits.
Effect of Ocean disposal
9 Hours
Unit IV
Sanitary Land Filling
Definition –Methods - Trench area - Ramp and pit method - Site selection - Basic steps involved - Cell design -
Prevention of site pollution - Leachate collection and control methods - Gas collection systems - Composting –
Biological method aerobic and anaerobic composting – Factors affecting composting – Indore and Bangalore
processes - Mechanical and semi mechanical composting processes - Vermi-composting.
Effect of Leachate in ground water table
9 Hours
Unit V
Incineration
Processes – 3 T‘s - Factors affecting incineration process - Incinerators – Types – Prevention of air pollution -
Recycle and reuse material and energy recovery operations - Reuse in other industries - Plastic wastes -
Environmental significance and reuse.
Case study of Recycle and reuse material
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. P. Sincero and A. Sincero, Environmental Engineering, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2010
References
1. C. Bhatia, Solid and Hazardous Waste Management, Atlantic Publishers, 2007
2. K. Sasiikumar and Sanoop Gopi Krishna , Solid Waste Management, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2009
11C002 SOLID AND LIQUID INDUSTRIAL WASTE MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3.0
 To provide basic knowledge on the management practices of solid and liquid waste
 To impart knowledge on the collection, transport and disposal of solid waste
 To emphasize the need for solid and liquid waste management

1. Demonstrate the procedure for solid and liquid industrial waste

2. Identify the methods to collect, convey and for the disposal of municipal solid waste
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 40 40 40 40
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Name the types of industries and industrial pollution.

2. List out the effects of industrial effluents on streams.
3. Describe waste management Approach.
4. Outline the application of recycle, reuse and byproduct recovery.
5. Define Equalization
6. State Adsorption.
7. Describe removal of dissolved inorganic matter.
8. List out the sources of waste generation.
9. Define solid waste.
10. Describe storage and handling of solid waste.
11. List out the methods of unit operations used for separation and processing.
12. Define anaerobic methods for materials recovery and treatment.
13. Outline landfills.
14. Define resource and energy recovery.
15. Outline agriculture.
16. State integrated waste management.
†
UNDERSTAND
1. Classify the characteristics of industrial wastes.

2. Describe bioassay studies.
3. Discuss waste audit.
4. Distinguish between reuse and byproduct recovery.
5. Explain waste treatment flow sheets for textiles industries.
6. Summarize the Combined treatment of industrial and municipal wastes.
7. Describe Chemical oxidation.
8. Discuss solid waste.
9. Classify sources and types of solid waste.
10. Explain determination of composition of MSW.
11. Discuss anaerobic methods for materials recovery and treatment.
12. Summarize drainage and leachate collection systems.
13. Classify industry specific solid waste management.
14. Describe recycling of solid waste.
15. Discuss integrated waste management.
APPLY
1. Prepare the types of industries and industrial pollution.

2. Demonstrate bioassay studies.
3. Write sewage treatment plants and human health.
4. Illustrate electroplating industries.
5. Uses of residue management. Illustrate.
6. Prepare waste treatment flow sheets for fertilizer plant.
7. Illustrate Legal and organizational foundation of solid waste management.
8. Compute sampling and characterization of liquid and solid waste.
9. Write unit operations used for separation and processing.
10. Relate different transfer stations.
11. Demonstrate landfill remediation.
12. Write about Industry specific solid waste management.
13. Demonstrate integrated waste management.
CREATE
1. Explain Population equivalent.

2. Collect the effects of industrial effluents on streams.
3. Design any one method of material and process modifications.
4. Summarize wastewater reclamation concepts.
5. Synthesize Residue management.
6. Explain the monitoring responsibilities.
7. Write future changes in waste composition.
8. Construct materials recovery facilities.
9. Summarize transport means and methods of solid waste.
10. Write about Agriculture.
11. Explain recycling of solid waste.
Unit I
Introduction
Types of industries and industrial pollution - Characteristics of industrial wastes - Population equivalent -
Bioassay studies - sewer- land - sewage treatment plants and human health - Environmental legislations related
to prevention and control of industrial effluents - Waste management Approach - Waste Audit -Volume and
strength reduction - Material and process modifications - Recycle - reuse and byproduct recovery - Applications.
Effects of industrial effluents on streams
9 Hours
Unit II
Pollution from Major Industries
Sources - Characteristics - waste treatment flow sheets for selected industries such as Textiles - Tanneries-
Pharmaceuticals- Electroplating industries - Dairy - Sugar - Paper - distilleries - Steel plants- Refineries -
fertilizer - thermal power plants - Wastewater reclamation concepts - Equalization – Neutralization – Removal of
suspended and dissolved organic solids - Chemical oxidation - Adsorption - Removal of dissolved inorganic -
Combined treatment of industrial and municipal wastes - Residue management - Dewatering - Disposal.
Field visit
9 Hours
Unit III
Solid Waste Management
Legal and organizational foundation - Definition of solid waste - waste generation in a technological society -
major legislation - monitoring responsibilities - sources and types of solid waste - Sampling and characterization
- Determination of composition of MSW - Storage and handling of solid waste.
Future changes in waste composition.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Collection and Transport of Solid Waste
Unit operations used for separation and processing - Materials Recovery facilities - Waste transformation
through combustion and anaerobic composting - anaerobic methods for materials recovery and treatment -
Energy recovery - Incinerator need for transfer operation- transport means and methods - transfer station types
and design requirements - Landfills - Site selection- design and operation - drainage and leachate collection
systems - requirements and technical solutions - designated waste landfill remediation.
Effect of landfill method
9 Hours
Unit V
Disposal of Solid Waste
Industry specific solid waste management - Agriculture - Process Industry - Mineral and Metallurgical industry -
Disposal of industrial and mill tailings - Resource and energy recovery: Recycling of solid waste.
Integrated waste management.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. S. K. Garg, Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution Engineering, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi. 2001
2. P. Aarne Vesilind, William A Worrel and Debra R Reinhart, Solid Waste Engineering, Thomson
Brooks/Cole, 2002
References
1. P. Arcadio Sincero and A. Gregoria Sincero, Environmental Engineering A Design Approach, Prentice Hall
India, 1996
2. George Tchobanoglous and Hilary Theisen, Integrated Solid Waste Management, McGraw Hill Publishers,
New Delhi.
11C003 HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT AND SITE REMEDIATION

3 0 0 3.0
 To provide basic knowledge on the theory and management practices of hazardous waste
 To impart knowledge on treatment methods of hazardous waste
 To emphasize the need for hazardous waste management

(j) a knowledge of contemporary issues
1. Identify the best treatment method for hazardous waste management

2. Capability to manage e-waste disposal
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Name some of the characteristics of hazardous waste management

2. What are the measures to control the radioactive pollution?
3. What are the dangers of plastic waste?
4. Define biomedical waste
5. What do you mean by e-waste management?
6. How can you determine the impact of hazardous waste on health and society
7. Name some methods of disposal of e-waste.
8. What are the health hazards of e-waste?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the incineration process in detail

2. Compare biomedical waste and plastic waste.
3. Discuss about the source and generation of biomedical waste
4. Compare the different treatment methods for treating hazardous waste
5. How will you classify hazardous waste
†
APPLY/EVALUATE
1. Identify the importance of recycling electronic materials

2. Identify the measure to control hazardous waste
3. Explain the neutralization process in detail
4. How will you quantify the hazardous waste
5. Name some branded incinerators used for hazardous waste management
Unit I
Introduction
Impact of hazardous waste on health and society - Basics of hazardous waste management - Waste generation and
quantification - Hazardous characteristics - Classification of hazardous waste
Control of hazardous waste
9 Hours
Unit II
Treatment Methods
Treatment methods – Neutralization – Oxidation – Reduction – Precipitation – Solidification and stabilization –
Incineration
Control of radioactive pollution
9 Hours
Unit III
Disposal of Hazardous Wastes
Final disposal of radioactive wastes – Risk assessment – Carcinogenesis – Dose - Response assessment - Risk
exposure assessment
Safe disposal techniques
9 Hours
Unit IV
Biomedical and Plastic Wastes
Biomedical wastes: Definition – Source and generation of biomedical waste-Biomedical waste management. Plastic
waste: Dangers of plastic waste – Recycling of plastic waste
Disposal of plastic waste
9 Hours
Unit V
E-Waste
Introduction – Health hazards – E-waste management - Recycle of electronic materials – Disposal of e-waste
Case studies
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
References

2. K. Sasikumar and Sanoop Gopi Krishna , Solid Waste Management, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2009
11C004 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

3 0 0 3.0
 To emphasize the need for EIA.

 To provide basic knowledge on the components, methods and quality control measures of EIA
 To make the students understand the importance of documentation and monitoring of EIA along with case
studies.

1. Demonstrate the legal and regularity aspects of EIA in India

2. Evaluate the EIA practice
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End
1 Remember 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define EIA.
2. Identify the limitations of EIA.
3. What are the issues to be considered in EIA?
4. Outline the trend in EIA practice.
5. Name some of the methods for predicting impact .
6. What do you mean by mitigation?
7. List out some checklist for environmental monitoring.
8. What are the methods to collect the relevant information with respect to EIA?
UNDERSTAND
1. How will you plan a monitoring programme?
2. Interpret the use of visual display materials for environmental monitoring.
3. Name some regulatory aspects of EIA in India.
†
4. Predict any two major impacts on Environment.
APPLY/EVALUATE
1. How the predictions of impact on environment be made?
2. Describe the methods for assessment of impact
3. Interpret some of the common issues in EIA
4. How can you plan for environmental management?
5. Explain the process of public participation in environmental decision making
Unit I
Introduction
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) - Environmental Risk
Assessment (ERA) - Legal and Regulatory aspects in India - Types and limitations of EIA - - Issues in EIA -
National - Cross sectoral - Social and cultural
Terms of Reference in EIA
8 Hours
Unit II
Components and Methods
Components - Screening - Setting - Analysis - Prediction of impacts – Mitigation - Matrices - Networks – Checklists
- Importance assessment techniques - Cost benefit analysis - Analysis of alternatives - Methods for Prediction and
assessment of impacts - Air - Water - Soil - Noise - Biological - Cultural - Social - Economic environments -
Standards and guidelines for evaluation - Public Participation in environmental decision making
Questionnaires for decision making
20 Hours
Unit III
Quality Control
Trends in EIA practice and evaluation criteria - Capacity building for quality assurance - Expert System in EIA -
Use of regulations
6 Hours
Unit IV
Documentation and Monitoring
Document planning - Collection and organization of relevant information - Use of visual display materials – Team
writing - Reminder checklists - Environmental monitoring - Guidelines - Policies - Planning of monitoring
programmes - Environmental Management Plan
Post project audit
6 Hours
Unit V
Case Studies
Case studies of EIA of developmental projects
Case study
5 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. L. W. Canter, Environmental Impact Assessment, McGraw Hill, New York, 1996.
References
1. J. Petts, Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I and II, Blackwell Science, London, 1999.
2. The World Bank Group, Environmental Assessment Sourcebook Vol. I, II and III, The World Bank,
Washington, 1991.
11C005 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES

3 0 0 3.0
 To introduce engineering principles of ground modification, grouting and improvement techniques.

 To impart knowledge on the design methods of ground improvement.
 To enhance knowledge on different tests to be carried out on soils.
sustainability
(k) an ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice
1. Select suitable ground improvement techniques to improve soil properties for structures.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 40 40 40 40
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Recall the principles of ground improvement.

2. State the techniques used to improve cohesive and granular soil.
3. Give the characteristics of jet grouted soils.
4. Name the types of grouting.
5. Enumerate the various methods that are used for lowering the ground water table during construction.
6. List out the factors that have to be considered while selecting an in situ densification technique for
loose sand.
7. Recognize the use of sand drains
8. Write the functions of stone column.
9. What are the corrections to be done in standard penetration test?
10. Describe the purpose of preloading and vertical drains.
†
UNDERSTAND
1. Infer two main reasons that do not allow the techniques used for in situ densification of sands to be
successful for in situ densification of clays.
2. Amongst the grouting methods, which method allows high output, good control over grouted zone
around the grout hole and maximum versatility?
3. Match:
Grouting Grouting pressure (kN/m2)
a) Permeation A) 50,000
b) Displacement B) 5000
c) Jet C) 500
4. Discuss the need of dewatering of ground soils.
5. Explain vibrofloatation.
6. Compare the action of rigid piles with stone columns
7. How is the static cone penetration test different from standard penetration test?
8. Review the limits of soil parameters which suggest whether ground improvement required or not.
9. Express about dewatering.
10. What do you understand soil stabilization by grouting?
APPLY
1. How do you accelerate the consolidation in soft clay of thickness more than 10m? Explain.
2. Illustrate how the heavy tamping technique can be used to improve the ground. In what type of soil and
ground conditions you recommend this technique.
3. Show various field of applications of grouting.
4. Explain the significance of preloading on primary and secondary consolidation of saturated clay
deposits.
5. Predict any three engineering application of grouting which proves to be effective?
Unit I
Ground Water Lowering and Drainage Techniques
Overview of: Design input parameters: existing ground water level and fluctuations – Zone of groundwater
lowering – Permeability – Transmissibility – Storage capacity – Flow nets and estimation.
Construction of dewatering and permanent dewatering
9 Hours
Unit II
Underpinning
Basic principles of underpinning – Grouping – Requirements - Shoring and temporary support – Grillages –
Design considerations for underpinning – Slurry walls in lieu of underpinning – Pre founded columns –
Intermittent lateral underpinning – Element wall underpinning.
Conventional underpinning techniques
9 Hours
Unit III
Grouting
Grouting: Hydrofracture grouting – Compaction grouting – Permeation grouting – Cost considerations - Jet
grouting – Applications: Vertical/Sub vertical and Horizontal/Sub horizontal – Design aspects – Selection of
grout – Selection of jet grout parameters with respect to soil types – Characteristics of jet grouted soils.
Preliminary site investigation and testing
9 Hours
Unit IV
Soil Compaction and Consolidation
Introduction:– Preloading – Consolidation drainage – Compaction grouting– Stone columns – Consolidation of
Fine grained soils – Deformation of cohesionless soils – Design considerations.
Conventional compaction – Vibrocompaction
9 Hours
Unit V
Geotechnical verification testing – Performance monitoring – Optical survey techniques – Settlement plates and
Deep settlement markers – Peizometers.
Standard penetration tests (SPT) – Cone penetration tests (CPT)
9Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. Petros P. Xanthakos, Lee W. Abramson and Donald A. Bruce, Ground Control and Improvement, John
Willey & Sons Inc., 1994
References
1. Hsai Yang Fang, Foundation Engineering Handbook, Van Nostrand Reinhold, NY, 1991
2. M. R. Hausman, Engineering Principles of Ground Modification, McGraw Hill Book Co., Singapore, 1990
1C006 EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES

3 0 0 3.0
 To introduce various theories of earth pressure

 To impart a clear understanding on the design considerations of earth retaining structures
 To impart a fundamental knowledge on the analysis and design of rigid, flexible and reinforced earth
retaining structures and deep cuts.
sustainability
1. Select a suitable earth retaining structure based for a given soil condition.
2. Design of Earth retaining structures.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 25 25 25 25
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define lateral earth pressure

2. Identify whether the following statements are true.
i) The active pressure is the minimum pressure which develops when the wall moves away from
the fill.
ii) The active pressure increases if a dry soil becomes submerged.
3. Name the terms used with retaining walls.
4. How is stability of retaining wall checked?
5. Sketch a typical section of a braced open cut showing the position of struts. Also mark the deformation
pattern of the side of such cuts.
6. State the merits and demerits of different types of cofferdam.
7. Write down the requirements for arching effect to come into play.
8. Draw the pressure distribution diagram for soil due to arching.
9. Give the specification of slurry.
10. Define conduits.
UNDERSTAND
1. Differentiate critically the classical earth pressure theories of Rankine and Coulomb.
†
2. Recognize why retaining walls are usually designed for active earth pressure?
3. Infer the advantage of providing counterforts in a cantilever wall?
4. Explain with neat sketches the situations where retaining walls are provided.
5. Define Cofferdam.
6. Predict the differences between the anchored sheet pile wall with free-earth support and fixed-earth
support?
7. Match:
Soil Excavate- support sequence
a. Unsaturated fine grained soil A. Support-then-excavate under
high pressure
b. Unsaturated coarse B. Support-then-excavate
grained soil with 25% fines
c. Saturated soft clay below C. Excavate-then-support in
water table increments
d. Saturated sand deep below D. Excavate without support.
water table
8. Summarize the phenomenon of arching in soils.
9. Compare the reverse mud circulation technique of drilling used in diaphragm wall construction with
the direct mud circulation techniques used in pile construction.
10. Discuss about soil nailing.
APPLY/EVALUATE
1. Relate the passive earth pressure in cohesive and cohesion less soils.
2. Judge the earth pressure theories for determining the earth pressures in the case of a) Cantilever
retaining wall and b) Gravity retaining wall.
3. For clay backfill behind a retaining wall, evaluate the depth of tension crack.
4. Apply the analysis used to determine the depth of embedment of cantilever sheet pile wall in a)
Granular soils and b) Cohesive soils.
5. Design a R.C.C counterfort retaining wall to support a fill 7m high. The top of fill is horizontal and has
the characteristics i) angle of internal friction = 35˚ and ii) unit weight = 19 kN/m3. A competent
stratum with an allowable soil pressure of 240 kN/m3 is available at a depth of 2.5m.
6. The following data refer to a cellular cofferdam
a. Unit weight of fill= 19 kN/m3
b. Submerged unit weight of fill = 10 kN/m3
c. Angle of internal friction of fill material = 35˚
d. Coefficient of friction between fill and rock = 0.62
e. Coefficient of friction between fill and sheet pile = 0.43
f. Coefficient of interlock friction = 0.32
Design circular cellular cofferdam.
Unit I
Theories of Earth Pressure
Introduction - State of stress in retained soil mass - Earth pressure theories - Classical and graphical techniques -
Active, passive and at rest cases, empirical methods - Wall movement and complex geometry.
Earth pressure due to external loads
9 Hours
Unit II
Compaction, Drainage and Stability Considerations
Retaining structure - Selection of soil parameters - Strain softening - Wall flexibility - Earth pressure due to
earthquake forces - Stability of retaining structure - Design of cantilever and counterfort retaining wall.
Lateral pressure due to compaction- Influence of drainage
9 Hours
Unit III
Sheet Pile Walls and Cofferdam
Lateral pressure on sheeting in braced excavation - Analysis and design of cantilever and anchored sheet pile
walls - Deadman and continuous anchor. Cofferdam: design in rock and soil strata.
Types of sheet pile walls – Types of cofferdam
9 Hours
Unit IV
Supported Excavations and Conduits
Stability against piping and bottom heaving - Earth pressure around tunnel lining, Soil arching, shaft and silos -
Soil anchors - Under pinning - Soil nailing - Basic design concepts. Conduits - action of surface loads on
conduits.
Types and construction of conduit
9 Hours
Unit V
Slurry Supported Trenches
Stability analysis and design - Specification of slurry.
Basic principles - Diaphragm and bored pile walls
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Gopal Ranjan and A. S. R. Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, New Age International, 2000
2. B. M. Das, Principles of Geotechnical Engineering, The PWS Series in Civil Engineering, 1998
References
1. J. E. Bowles, Foundation Analysis and Design, TMI, 1998

2. Swami Saran, Analysis and Design of Substructures, Oxford & IBH Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., 2006
3. R. W. Day, Geotechnical and Foundation Engineering: Design and Construction, McGraw Hill, 1999
11C007 MACHINE FOUNDATION

3 0 0 3.0
 To enhance the knowledge on structural dynamics

 To introduce the principles of construction of machine foundations.
 To impart knowledge on the construction of machine foundations

sustainability
1. Select a suitable type of foundation.

2. Design and analysis of machine foundation system.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 50 50 30 30
5 Create - - 20 20
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. How would you determine the natural frequency of a machine foundation soil system?
2. What are the requirements of a foundation subjected to dynamic loads?
3. What are the main characteristics of a reciprocating machine, impact machine and a rotary machine?
4. Explain various types of machine foundation.
5. What is the effect of increase of stiffness in the natural frequency?
6. What is the importance of critical damping?
7. Discuss basic principles of design of machine foundation.
8. State D‘Alembert‘s principle.
9. Write the properties of response curves.
10. List out the methods of vibration isolation in machine foundation.
UNDERSTAND
1. Discuss the use of single – degree freedom system in the analysis of machine foundation. What are its
limitations?
2. Explain the difference between the following vibration sources:
i. reciprocating machines
ii. forge hammer
†
iii. earthquake
3. How would you determine the natural frequency of foundation-soil system?
4. What do you understand by vibration isolation?
5. Discuss criteria for the design of foundation in the following cases.
a. free vibration without damping
b. free vibration with damping
c. forced vibration without damping
d. forced vibration with damping
6. How the provision for tuning is provided in machine foundations?
7. Describe vibration analysis of a machine foundation.
8. Explain about the design criteria for foundations of reciprocating machines.
9. Why the expansion joints are provided in machine foundations?
10. How the dynamic analysis of block foundation is carried out?
APPLY
1. Determine the natural frequency of a machine foundation having a base area 2 m×2 m and a mass of 10
Mg, assuming that the soil mass participating in the vibration is (a) negligible (b) 20% of the mass. Take
Cu = 104 KN/m2.
2. A machine part of 4Kg mass vibrates in a viscous medium. Determine the damping coefficient when a
harmonic exciting force of 40N results in resonant amplitude of 1.40 cm and a period of 0.2 seconds.
Unit-I
Basic Dynamics
Introduction to Structural Dynamics – Basic theories of vibrations – D‘Alembert‘s principle-Simple harmonic
motion – Free vibration of mass and spring system without damping – Free vibration with viscous damping – Forced
frequency dependant exciting force with viscous damping.
Determination of dynamic properties of soil
9 Hours
Unit-II
Introduction to Machine Foundations
Types of machine foundation – Basic definitions – Degree of freedom of a block foundation – General criteria for
design of machine foundation – Determination of natural frequency – Design criteria for foundations of
reciprocating machines.
Permissible amplitude of vibrations for different types of machines 9 Hours
Unit-III
Block Type Machine Foundations
Modes of vibration of a block foundation – Methods of Dynamic analysis of block foundation – Review – Analysis
of block foundation – Foundation for machines inducing periodical forces – Foundations subject to impact type
forces.
Analysis under different modes of vibration
9 Hours
Unit-IV
Miscellaneous Machine Foundations
Analysis and design of framed foundations for high speed machinery – Rotary type machines with low frequency –
Machine tools – Impact type machines – Hammers - Fans and blowers – Looms – Testing machines with pulsator –
Machines installed on building floors.
Foundation for special structures
9 Hours
Unit-V
Construction of Machine Foundations
Concreting – Reinforcements – Construction details – Expansion joints – Connecting elements – Method of laying
spring absorbers – Provision for tuning – Methods of vibration isolation in machine foundations – Controls.
Active passive isolation tests
9 Hours
Textbooks
1. P. Srinivasulu and C. V. Vaidhyanathan, Handbook of Machine Foundation, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
company Ltd, New Delhi, 2000.
References
1. V. N. S. Murthy, Advanced Foundation Engineering, CBS publishers, New Delhi, 2007

2. Madhujith Mukopadhayay, Structural Dynamics, Ane books India, 2006.
11C008 OPEN CHANNEL FLOW

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart the knowledge of elements of open channel

 To provide a broad exposure to the students on various types of fluid flow
 To disseminate the knowledge on the application of fluid mechanics to open channel flow problems

1. Understand the various types of open channel flow

2. Determine cross sections of different types of channels
3. Understand the creation of hydraulic jumps and its advantages
4. Design the canals and channels
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 60 60 60 60
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define specific energy.

2. Define critical depth.
3. State the formula for determining the value of roughness co-efficient using Manning‘s Equation
4. Write down the Chezy‘s formula for determining velocity of flow in an open channel.
5. List out the instrument used for measuring the velocity in open channel.
6. What are the methods used for finding gradually varying flow profile?
7. What do you know Drop down curve?
8. Define hydraulic jump
9. Define back water.
10. Define gradually varying flow.
11. Define rapidly varying flow.
12. State the assumptions involved in the deriving the varied unsteady flow.
13. What are the classifications of Rapid varied unsteady flow?
†
UNDERSTAND
1. How will you express the specific energy for a wide rectangular channel with depth of flow d and velocity
of flow V?
2. Derive an expression for the velocity distribution for viscous flow through a circular pipe.
3. Explain in detail various gradually varied flow profiles in mild and steep channels.
4. Discuss the assumptions made in the derivation of dynamic equation for gradually varies flow
5. Derive an expression for the discharge through a channel by chezy‘s formula.
6. Derive an expression for critical depth and critical velocity.
7. Differentiate between Steady and unsteady flow
8. Find an expression for loss of energy head for a hydraulic jump.
9. Explain the classification of hydraulic jumps
10. Differentiate between alternate depths and sequent depths
11. Derive the Saint Venant equations for unsteady flow in open channels.
12. Discuss, in brief, the design of channel contradictions and expansions at transitions.
13. Starting from velocity potential υ, discuss mathematically the particle velocity and orbital motion with
respect to a wave in an open channel.
APPLY
1. A rectangular open channel has the following details: -

1. Discharge = 16m3/sec.
2. Bed width = 10 m
3. Depth of water = 1.0 m.
Find:
Specific Energy
Critical depth
Critical velocity
Minimum specific energy required for this discharge.
2. A rectangular channel 2.5 m wide carries a uniform .flow rate of 7.3 m3/s at a depth of 1.6 m. If a smooth
hump of height 0.13 m is constructed at a certain location on the channel bed, determine the change in
water surface elevation. Also compute the maximum permissible hump height if the upstream depth is not
be altered.
3. A rectangular channel conveying a discharge of 30 m3/sec is 12 m wide with a bed slope of 1 in 6000 and
N = .025. The depth of flow at a section is 1.50. Find how far upstream or downstream of this section, the
depth of flow will be 2.0 mts. Use step method
4. A 2 m wide rectangular channel carries a discharge of 1 m3 /s at a flow depth of 1m the discharge is
suddenly increased and the flow depth was found to increase to 1 m. find the discharge and the velocity of
the surge.
5. A trapezoidal channel has bed width of 5 m, side slopes of 1 H: 1 V, bed slope of 0.1, and manning‘s
roughness of 0.01. It is 80 m long and carries water away from a spillway whose crest is parallel to the
channel. Plot the NDL and CDL when the discharge per unit length of the spillway is 2 m3/s/m and 3
m3/s/m. Also plot the transitional depth profile and compute the transitional depth and its location for these
two discharges.
Unit I
Introduction
Geometrical elements of open channel - Velocity distribution, Coefficients and their determination - Pressure
distribution - Specific energy.
Design of open channels
9 Hours
Unit II
Uniform Flow
Energy and momentum principles applied to prismatic and non-prismatic channels - Critical flow - Computation
- Uniform flow - Manning‘s and Chezy‘s equations - Determination of Manning‘s and Chezy‘s constants -
Computation of uniform flow
. Applications of uniform flow concepts.
9 Hours
Unit III
Gradually Varied Flow
Dynamic equation of gradually varied flow - Assumptions - Characteristics of flow profiles - Drawdown and
backwater curves - Profile determination - Graphical integration, direct step, standard step method.
computational methods to analyze flow in open channels
9 Hours
Unit IV
Spatially and Rapidly Varied Flow
Spatially varied flow - Dynamic equation - analysis flow profile - Numerical integration and isoclinal method -
Rapidly varied flow - Characteristics
Flow over spillways
9 Hours
Unit V
Unsteady Flow
Unsteady flow - Dynamic equation for unsteady gradually varied flow - uniformly progressive flow - Wave
propagation - Rapidly varied unsteady flow - Hydraulic jump - Positive and negative surges - Transitions.
Application of unsteady flows
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. K. Subramanya, Flow in Open Channels, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009

2. K. G. Ranga Raju, Flow through Open Channels, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002
References
1. V. T. Chow, Open Channel Hydraulics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009

2. R. H. French, Open Channel Hydraulics, Tata McGraw Hill, 1986
11C009 WATER RESOURCES PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

3 0 0 3.0
 To emphasize the need for water resources planning

 To disseminate the knowledge on the reservoir management and economic analysis aspects
sustainability
1. Demonstrate the Principles and practice of water resources planning and management
2. Identify the importance of Stakeholder involved in planning processes.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define water resources management system.

2. What are the key and environmental problems in a modern society?
3. Define the term Water policy.
4. Mention the 3 principles underlying the National Water Resources Management Policy
5. What is reservoir management?
6. What is a water resource model?
7. What are the various systems of water distribution for farmers?
8. What percentage of total water available in the globe can be utilized as drinking water?
9. Mention 4 adverse effects of water resources project in the environment.
10. How the height of dam is fixed from the known value of required volume of reservoir?
11. What is irrigation scheduling?
12. What is the impact of water resources project on river regime?
13. What is the role of benefit cost ratio for evaluation of water resources projects?
14. What is conjunctive use in water resources project?
15. Write short notes on Rule curve.
UNDERSTAND
1. Briefly describe four site investigations required for reservoir planning.
†
2. Briefly describe at least three systems or tools that can be used by a water utility facility to manage
infrastructure failures and ensure continued protection of the public‘s health.
3. Describe the process of calibration and indicate why it is important in the modeling process.
4. Distinguish between these types of models and give an example of each. Stochastic and deterministic models
5. Give 4 areas where a water engineer would choose to apply modeling techniques to solve a given problem
6. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the various systems of water distribution systems.
7. Which authority has laid down Drinking Water Standards that are followed in lndia?
8. Mention two advantages and two disadvantages of inter-basin transfer.
9. What is understood by non-consumptive use of water?
10. What would you suggest to be the scope of Training for Assistant Engineers/Junior Engineers of Water
Resources Department?
11. What is Simulation Technique? Illustrate with an example of High Dam for Hydropower Generation.
12. Which authority has laid down Drinking Water Standards that are followed in lndia?
13. What role can "Water User Associations" play in Irrigation Management?
14. Explain the intensity of irrigation.
15. Explain the operation of water resources project for (a) conservative purpose (b) Non conservative purpose.
APPLY
1. Quantified hydrological cycle in essential for making the planning of water resources for a region. Show
an authenticated quantified hydrological cycle.
2. The following table gives the details about the average seasonal discharges of a river for the duration of
1963-1971. Determine the storage capacity required to maintain a flow of 475 cumecs throughout the
year.
Year Season Winter Summer
June - September October - March April - May
(cumecs) (cumecs) (cumecs)
1970 – 71 2000 150 120
1971 – 72 1200 350 65
1972 – 73 1400 400 100
1973 – 74 3600 200 80
1974 – 75 3000 150 120
1975 – 76 700 210 50
1976 – 77 800 320 80
1977 – 78 2400 120 120
3. There are two drinking water project alternatives. In alternative-1, 6 corers rupees will be spend in first
year and 1 crore rupee will be obtained as water tax for 10 years of life of the project. In alternative-2, 7
crores rupees will be spend on construction in first year and 1 crore rupee will be spend annually on
maintenance. Because of better maintenance, this project will give return of 2 crores annually for 2
years of life of the project. Which alternative is better considering only the economic criterion? The
interest rate may be assumed constant @6%.
4. Mention two examples where linear programming in used in water resources project planning. In which
situation Dynamic programming can be applied in water resources project planning?
ANALYZE /EVALUATE
1. Why it is felt the interbasin transfer is necessary in Indian context? Discuss the difficulties to implement it.
Considering the peak and non-peak hour power requirement, discuss the way of operation of hydropower
and other power system.
2. What is effect of sedimentation of the life of the project? Explain various short term and long term
precautions for increasing the life against sedimentation at various stages of project.
3. What is understood by centripetal drainage? How does it affect the topography?
4. What is Internal Rate of Return Method for comparing alternate investment opportunities? What steps are
adopted for comparing alternative proposals?
CREATE
1. Imagine you have been assigned the task of designing an expansion for a local Municipality‘s water
distribution system. Briefly describe the steps you would follow in modeling the water distribution system
to ensure you achieve the highest level of operatability.
Unit I
Introduction
Water Resources Survey - Water resources of India and Tamilnadu - Description of water resources planning -
Economics of water resources, planning, physical and socioeconomic data - National water policy - Collection of
meteorological and hydrological data for water resources development.
Regulatory Programs and their Impact on Planning Processes
9 Hours
Unit II
Network Design
Hydrologic measurements - Analysis of hydrologic data - Hydrologic station network - Station network design -
Statistical techniques in network design.
Rainfallcomputation, estimation and determination
9 Hours
Unit III
Water Resource Needs
Consumptive and non-consumptive water use - Estimation of water requirements for irrigation, for drinking and
navigation - Water characteristics and quality - Scope and aims of master plan - Concept of basin as a unit for
development -Water budget and development plan.
Sustainable water resource planning
9 Hours
Unit IV
Reservoir Planning and Management
Reservoir - Single and multipurpose - Multi objective - Fixation of storage capacity -Strategies for reservoir
operation - Sedimentation of reservoirs - Design flood - Levees and flood walls - Channel improvement.
Optimization techniques for water resource operations
9 Hours
Unit V
Economic Analysis
Estimation of cost and evaluation of benefits - Discount rate - Discounting factors - Discounting techniques
Software for economic analysis of water resources
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. R. K. Linsley and J. B. Franzini, Water Resources Engineering, McGraw Hill Inc., New York, 2000
2. K. N. Duggal and J. P. Soni, Elements of Water Resources Engineering, New Age International Publishers,
New Delhi, 2004
References
1. J. L. Douglas and R. R. Lee, Economics of Water Resources Planning, Tata McGraw Hill Inc., New Delhi,
2000
2. M. C. Chaturvedi, Water Resources Systems Planning and Management, Tata McGraw Hill Inc., New Delhi,
1997
3. S. Goodman Alvin, Principles of Water Resources Planning, Prentice Hall, 1984
11C010 TRANSPORTATION PLANNING AND MASS TRANSPORTATION SYSTEM

3 0 0 3.0
 To enhance the knowledge of students on traffic assignment techniques

 To impart knowledge on mass transportation system
PROGRAMME OUT COME (PO)
sustainability
1. Analyze the present trip pattern

2. Forecast the future trips and assign the trips using trip assignment
3. Design a transportation network
4. Analyze the influence of each factor and design a mass transportation system.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
Apply / Analyze /
3 40 40 40 40
Evaluate
4 Create 20 20 20 20
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out the various Transportation Problems.

2. Mention the assumptions of category analysis.
3. What effective method will improve Mass Transportation System?
4. What is zoning?
5. List out the different types of trip distributing model.
6. Recall the purpose of doing Transportation Demand Analysis.
7. What is Trip Generation Model?
8. Which is True
a. Trip involves movement from a single origin to a single destination.
b. Trip Involves movement from single origin and reach multiple destinations.
9. Find out in which model vehicular trips are estimated rather than person trips.
10. Does the transportation have any applications relating to Queuing Theory?
11. What are the disadvantages of growth factor models?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the systems approach to transportation planning with a neat sketch.
†
2. List out the various steps in transportation planning.

3. List out the various factors governing the trip generation and attraction.
4. Can you clarify why do we prefer to use Mass Transportation System?
5. Can you write a brief outline on Personal rapid Transit?
6. Does Forecasting Urban Activity help in predicting Trip Assignment?
7. Summarize the Technique of Trip Assignment.
8. When do you prefer single plane method and Double plane method
1. Compare the merits and demerits of different types of surveys employed for collecting the data in the
transportation planning process.
2. Compare and contrast the multiple linear regression analysis and category analysis
3. A self contained town consists of four residential areas A,B, C and two industrial estates X and Y.
Generation equation shows that, for the design year in question, the trips from home to work generated by
each residential area per 24 hour day are as follows:
A 1000
B 2250
C 1750
D 3200
There are 3,700 jobs in industrial estate X and 4,500 in industrial estate Y. It is known that the attractin
between zones is inversely proportional to the square to the journey times between zones. The journey
times in minutes from home to work are:
Zones X Y
A 15 20
B 15 10
C 10 10
D 15 20
Calculate and tabulate the inter- zonal trips for journeys from home to work.
4. In order to relieve congestion on an urban street network a motorway is proposed to be constructed. The
travel time from one zone centroid to another via the proposed motorway is estimated to be 10 minutes
whereas the time for the same travel via the existing streets is 18 minutes. The flow between the two zones
centroids is 1000 vehicles per hour. Assign the flow between the new motorway and existing streets.
CREATE
1. The number of trips produced in and attracted to the three zones 1, 2 and 3 are tabulated as:
Zone 1 2 3 Total
Pi 14 33 28 75
Aj 33 28 14 75
As a result of calibration, the friction factors to be associated with the impedance values between the
various zones have been found to be as follows:
Impedance Units
1 82
2 52
3 50
4 41
5 39
6 26
7 20
8 13
The impedance values between the various zones can be taken from the following matrix:
O/D 1 2 3
1 8 1 4
2 3 6 5
3 2 7 4
Distribute the trips between the various zones for creating a new transportation network system.
Unit I
Introduction
Transportation planning process and concepts - Transportation problems - Urban travel characteristics -
Concept of travel demand - Demand function - Demand estimation - Sequential, recursive and simultaneous
processes.
Role of transportation
9 Hours
Unit II
Trip Generation
Trip generation analysis - Zoning - Types and sources of data - Expansion factors - Accuracy checks - Trip
generation models - Zonal models - Household models - Category analysis - Trip attractions of work centers.
Various surveys for data collection
9 Hours
Unit III
Trip Distribution and Mode Choice Modeling
Trip distribution analysis - Trip distribution models - Growth factor models - Gravity models - Opportunity
models - Mode split analysis - Mode split Models - Mode choice behaviour, competing modes, mode split
curves, probabilistic models.
Factors influencing mode choices
9 Hours
Unit IV
Route Split Analysis
Traffic assignment - Route split analysis: Elements of transportation networks, nodes and links - Minimum path
trees - All-or-nothing assignment - Multipath assignment - Capacity restraint.
Introduction to BPR
9 Hours
Unit V
Mass Transportation system
Urban transportation systems - Mass rapid transit system - Light rail transit - Personal rapid transit, guided way
systems, cabin taxi, dual mode bus - Para transit systems - Demand responsive system - Intermediate public
transport.
Historical development of urban transportation
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. C. Jotin Khisty and B. Kent Lall, Transportation Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003
2. M. J. Bruton, Introduction to Transportation Planning, Hutchinson, London, 1992
References
1. B. G. Hutchinson, Principles of Urban Transportation System Planning, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
2. C. S. Papacostas and Prevedouros, Transportation Engineering and Planning, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2002
11C011 RAILWAYS, AIRPORTS AND HARBOURS

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart a basic knowledge on railway and harbour planning and its components.
 To provide a basic knowledge on planning and design of airports.
sustainability
1. Ability to assess and select the best track alignment

2. Geometric design of railway track
3. Planning of airport.
4. Orientation and design of runway
5. Demonstrate the importance of various harbor elements in harbor planning.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Sl. No. Test I† Test II† Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 40 40 40 40
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Label the various components of a permanent way.

2. State the functions of railway track, sleeper and ballast
3. State the importance of providing gradients.
4. Relate the advantages of flat footed rails over other rails
5. Relate the importance of coning of wheels in curves.
6. State the principle of track circuiting.
7. Define yards.
8. Name the formula for determining the airport reference temperature.
9. Define turning zone.
10. State the functions of hangar.
11. Outline the classification of water transportation.
12. List out the factors influencing the site investigation of harbours along with their significance.
UNDERSTAND
1. Describe in detail about the surveys that are employed in railway track alignment.
2. Discuss the steps involved in the construction of a railway track.
3. Classify the various types of railway signals.
†
4. Explain the modern survey equipments/techniques used for maintenance of railway tracks?
5. With neat sketches, describe the two types of wind rose diagram and how the optimum runway orientation
oriented.
6. With neat sketches, explain the markings on a runway and apron.
7. Give examples for military harbor and refuge harbors.
8. Describe in detail about the hydrographic and topographic surveys
9. Classify the harbors based on their location and the protection needed.
10. Discuss in detail the various types of mooring accessories used in ports and harbors
11. Explain the different types of navigational aids
12. Discuss the working principle of fenders and dolphins
APPLY
1. Relate the relationship between radius and versine of a curve by deriving a mathematical formula.
2. Compute the extra width required on the gauge for a vehicle moving on a B.G track. The wheel base of the
vehicle is 6.0 m. Diameter of the wheel is 1.5 m. Depth of the flanges below top of rail is 3.17 cm. Radius
of curvature is 168 m.
3. Illustrate with neat sketches the working principle of a right hand or a left hand turnout.
4. Write the formula for finding the runway length by incorporating the elevation, temperature and gradient
corrections.
5. Illustrate with neat sketches how the number of vehicles accommodated changes for different car parking
systems in an airport.
6. Sketch and explain the energy dissipation mechanism in different types of breakwater.
Unit I
Railway Planning and Design
Engineering survey for track alignment – Conventional and modern methods (Remote Sensing, GIS & GPS) –
Permanent Way – Components and functions of each component – Gauges in railway tracks – Coning of wheels –
Geometric design of railway tracks – Gradient – Super-Elevation – Widening of gauges in curves – Transition
curves – Vertical curves and grade compensation (Derivations of formulae and Problems)
Role of Indian railways in national development
9 Hours
Unit II
Railway Track Construction, Maintenance and Operation
Track construction and maintenance – Track drainage – Lay outs of railway stations and yards – Points and
Crossings – Signals – Types of signals – Principles and mechanism of interlocking – Methods of interlocking –
Track circuiting – Electric traction – Introduction to modern trends in Indian Railways in the design of high speed
tracks
MRTS and suburban railways – BOT and BOLT (basic Concepts)
9 Hours
Unit III
Airport Planning and Visual Aids
Airport planning – Standards for planning of airports as per ICAO – Airport site selection – Aircraft characteristics
and their impact on planning of an airport – Airport layout – Components of airports – Terminal area – Passenger
facilities - Aprons – Hangars – Airport zoning – Air Traffic Control – Airport drainage – Aircraft parking system –
Visual aids.
Importance of airports in national transportation sector – Case study of any Indian airport layout
9 Hours
Unit IV
Airport Design and Control Aids
Runway design – Orientation – Geometric design and Correction for gradients – Pattern of Runways – Runway
configuration – Taxiway – Factors governing layout of taxiways – Rapid exit taxiways - Separation clearance –
Parking and circulation area – Marking and lighting of runway and apron area – Wind and landing direction
indicator
Case study of orientation of runway with the aid of wind rose diagram
9 Hours
Unit V
Harbour Engineering
Definition of terms – Harbours, ports, docks, tides and waves – Harbours – Site investigation – Planning,
requirements and classification – Concept of satellite ports – Docks – Dry and Wet Docks – Dredgers and dredging
– Terminal facilities – Shipping terminal facilities – Essentials of passenger terminal – Port Buildings – Warehouse
– Transit sheds – Mooring accessories – Navigational aids – Piers – Breakwaters – Wharves – Jetties – Quays –
Spring fenders – Littoral drift
Layout of harbours – History of port – Case study of selected Indian ports.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. S. C. Saxena and S. P. Arora, Railway Engineering, Dhanapat Rai Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010
2. S. K. Khanna, M. G Arora and S. S. Jain, Airport Planning and Design, Nem Chand and Bros., Roorkee,
2001
3. S. P. Bindra, A Course Work in Docks and Harbour Engineering, Dhanapat Rai Publications Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2003
References
1. S. Chandra and M. M. Agrawal, Railway Engineering, Oxford, New Delhi, 2007

2. S. C. Saxena, Airport Engineering – Planning and Design, CBS Publishers, 2008
3. H. P. Oza and G. H. Oza, A Course in Docks and Harbour Engineering, Charotar Publishing House, 1999
11C012 DESIGN OF PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on the basic principles of prestress concrete structures

 To impart the design philosophy of prestressed beams, tanks, pipes, poles etc
sustainability
1. Selection of various systems of prestressing.

2. Design of prestressed concrete members
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Sl. No TEST TEST †2 Model Semester end

1† examination examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Apply 60 60 60 60
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Evaluate - - - -
6 Create 20 20 20 20
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State the basic principle of prestressed concrete structures.

2. Why did the early attempts in prestressing use ordinary mild steel fail?
3. List out the assumptions in strain compatibility method.
4. Describe why structural concrete flexural members are provided with nominal reinforcements?
5. Identify the computation of the bursting tension in the end block subjected to evenly distributed forces
using Guyons Method.
6. Name some of the various methods generally used for the investigation of anchorage zone stresses.
7. Define concordant cables.
8. Explain the terms a) Primary Moment b) Secondary Moment c) Resultant Moment
9. Outline the merits and demerits of partial prestressing.
10. List out the advantages of prestressed concrete poles.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain why high strength concrete is used for prestressed concrete structures?
2. Identify the difference between concentric and eccentric prestressing.
3. Why high strength concrete is used in prestressed concrete?
4. Describe the failure due to flexure shear cracks?
†
5. Summarize about the long term deflections of cracked prestressed concrete beams?
6. Briefly outline the Magnel method of computing the horizontal and transverse stress in end blocks
subjected to concentrated force from anchorage.
7. Define the term Line of Thrust.
8. Sketch the various methods of achieving continuity in prestressed concrete members.
9. Infer with neat sketches the different types of cross sections generally used for poles.
10. Discuss the various factors influencing the design of sleepers.
APPLY
1. A simply supported prestressed concrete beam spanning over 10 m is of rectangular section 500mm
wide by 750 mm deep. The beam is prestressed by a parabolic cable having an eccentricity of 200 mm at
the centre of the span and zero at the end supports. The effective force in the cable is 1600 kN. If the beam
supports a total uniformly distributed load of 40 kN/m, which includes the self weight.
a) Evaluate the extreme fibre stresses at the mid span section using the internal resisting couple method
and
b) Calculate the force required in the cable having the same eccentricity to balance a total load of 50
kN/m on the beam.
2. A pretension prestressed concrete sleeper 300 mm wide by 250 mm deep is prestressed using 9 wires of 7
mm diameter. Four wires are located at top and 5 wires near the soffit. The effective cover being 40 mm.
The initial stress in the wires is 1256 N/mm2. Assuming the modular ratio 6, estimate the percentage loss of
stress in the top and bottom wires due to elastic deformation of concrete.
3. A pretension girder having a T section is made up of a flange 200 mm side and 60 mm thick. The overall
depth of the girder is 660 mm. the thickness of the web is 60 mm. the horizontal prestress at a point 300
mm from the soffit is 10N/mm2. the shear stress due to transverse load acting at the same point is 2.5
N/mm2. determine the increase in the principal tensile stress at this point if the T section is subjected to a
torque of kNm
4. A class III type partially prestressed T-girder designed to support a live load of 8 kN/m over an effective
span is 20 m is made up of a top flange 1000 mm wide by 120 mm thick, with a rib of 300mm wide. The
overall depth of the girder is 720 mm. The tensioned steel consists of nine strands of 12.5 mm diameter
with a tensile strength of 1750 N/mm2 located at 585 mm from the top. The untensioned steel is of seven
cold-worked deformed bars, of 25 mm diameter with fy=425 N/mm 2, located 80 mm from the soffit of the
girder. The effective prestressing force in the tendons is 830 kN. Estimate the width of the cracks
developed under service loads and check the crack width using the hypothetical tensile stresses provided
for in the IS codes.
5. A concrete beam with a rectangular section 300 mm wide and 500 mm deep is prestressed by 2 post
tensioned cables of area 600 mm2 each. Initially stressed to 1600 N/mm2. The cables are located at a
constant eccentricity of 100 mm through out the length of the beam having a span of 10 m. the modulus of
elasticity of steel and concrete is 210 and 38 N/mm2 respectively.
i. Neglecting all losses, find the deflection at the centre of span when it is supporting its own weight.
ii. Allowing for 20 percent loss in prestress, find the final deflection at the centre of span when it
carries an imposed load of 18 kN/m. Dc=24 kN/m2.
6. A high tensile cable comprising 12 strands of 15 mm diameter with an effective force of 2500 kN is
anchored concentrically in an end block of post tensioned beam. The end block is 400mm wide by 800 mm
deep and the anchor plate is 200 mm wide by 260 mm deep. Design suitable anchorage zone
reinforcements using Fe 415 grade HYSD bars using IS 1343 code provisions.
Unit I
Introduction
Basic principles of prestressing – Classification and types – Advantages over ordinary reinforced concrete –
Materials – high strength concrete and high tensile steel – Methods of prestressing – Freyssinet, Magnel Blaton, Lee
Mc Call and Killick anchorage systems – Analysis of sections for stresses by stress concept, strength concept and
load balancing concept.
Losses of prestress
9 Hours
Unit II
Design for Flexure and Shear
Basic assumptions for calculating flexural stresses – Permissible stresses in steel and concrete as per I.S.1343 Code
– Design of sections of Type I and Type II post – tensioned and pre - tensioned beams – Check for strength limit
state based on I.S. 1343 Code –Location of wires in pre-tensioned beams – Design for shear based on I.S.1343
Code.
Layout of cables
9 Hours
Unit III
Deflection and Design of Anchorage zone
Factors influencing deflections – Short term deflections of uncracked members – Prediction of long term deflections
due to creep and shrinkage – Check for serviceability limit state of deflection. Determination of anchorage zone
stresses in post - tensioned beams by Magnel‘s method, Guyon‘s method and I.S. 1343 code – Design of anchorage
zone reinforcement.
Check for transfer bond length in pre - tensioned beams
9 Hours
Unit IV
Composite Beams and Continuous Beams
Types of R.C.C. – P.S.C. composite beams – Analysis and design of composite beams– Analysis for secondary
moments – Concordant cable and linear transformation - Calculation of stresses – Principles of design.
Methods of achieving Continuity in continuous beams
9 Hours
Unit V
Miscellaneous Structures
Design of tanks, sleepers and tension members – Use of non-prestressed reinforcement – Definition, methods of
achieving, merits and demerits of partial prestressing.
Design of pipes, poles
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. Krishna Raju, N., Prestressed Concrete, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1995.
References
1. Lin, T.Y. and Ned.H.Burns, Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1982
2. Rajagopalan, N., Prestressed Concrete, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.
3. Mallik, S.K. and Gupta, A.P., Prestressed Concrete, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co., Pvt.Ltd., India, 1986.
4. Arthur H.Nilson, Design of Prestressed Concrete, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1978.
5. Dayaratnam,P., Prestressed Concrete Structures, Oxford and IBH, New Delhi, 1982.
6. Sinha, N.C.and Roy, S.K., Fundamentals of Prestressed Concrete, S.Chand & Co., Ltd., 1994.
11C013 BRIDGE ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart basic knowledge on the codal provisions for design of bridges

 To introduce the design of reinforced concrete slab bridge decks, Tee beam and slab bridge decks, plate
girder bridges, rigid frame bridge, balanced cantilever bridges, continuous bridges and prestressed concrete
bridges
 To impact knowledge on the design of different types of bridge bearings, piers and abutments, and bridge
foundations
sustainability
1. Design of reinforced bridge components

2. Design of Arch bridges
3. Design of steel bridge components
4. Design of pre-stressed bridge components
5. Design of bridge bearings
6. Design of Piers and abutments
7. Design of bridge foundations
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Analyze - - - -
5 Create 30 30 30 30
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Write down the types of bearing.

2. Give the four different categories of standard IRC loads.
3. Give any four advantages of rigid frame bridges.
4. Name the different types of arches used in bridges.
5. Classify which factors to be considered in the design of steel bridge due to dynamic effect?
6. Classify the different types of steel bridges.
7. Name the different types of piers.
8. List out the various components of well foundation.
9. What are the benefits of using prestressed concrete bridge?
10. Classify prestressed concrete bridges based on method of construction.
†
UNDERSTAND
1. What do you mean by bearings in bridges?

2. How the impact effect of moving loads is taken in to account in the design of bridges?
3. What do you mean by Articulation?
4. What are the assumptions made in fixed arch and two hinged arch?
5. Under What circumstances the box girder bridge is preferred?
6. What are the roles of web splices in steel bridges?
7. Under What circumstances the well foundation is preferred?
8. What is Abutment? What are the functions of an abutment?
9. What do you mean by external post tensioning?
10. What is End block? What purpose is it used in prestressing bridge?
APPLY / EVALUATE
1. What is the formula to find out the effective width of dispersion for a single concentrated load?
2. Write down the formula to find out the economical depth of a plate girder.
CREATE
1. Design a steel rocker bearing for transmitting a vertical reaction of 1000 kN and a horizontal reaction of
100 kN at the support of a bridge girder, assuming the permissible stresses according to IRC: 83-1982.
2. Design a reinforced concrete rocker bearing to transmit a support reaction of 600 kN. Adopt M-30 grade
concrete and Fe – 415 grade HYSD bars. Permissible bearing stress in concrete is 8 N/mm 2.
Unit I
Introduction
Types of bridges and Loading standards – Standard specifications for road bridges – Design of R.C.C solid slab
bridges – Bearings – Types of bearings – Design of bearings for slab bridges – T-Beam and Slab bridges – Dynamic
response of bridge decks
Design of Footpaths and Hand rails
9 Hours
Unit II
Other Reinforced Concrete Bridges
Design of balanced cantilever bridges – Continuous girder bridges – Rigid frame bridges – Arch bridges – Bow
string girder bridges – Box culverts
Stone Masonry Bridges
9 Hours
Unit III
Steel Bridges
General – Railway loadings – Dynamic effect – Railway culvert with steel beams – Plate girder bridges – Box girder
bridges – Truss bridges – Vertical and horizontal stiffeners.
Composite Bridges – Case studies: Suspension and Cable stayed bridges.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Substructures and Foundations
Design of piers and abutments of different Types – Foundations – Shallow foundations – Deep foundations – Piles –
Well foundations.
Pneumatic caissons
9 Hours
Unit V
Prestressed Concrete Bridges
Design of prestressed concrete bridges – Preliminary discussions – Flexural and torsional parameters – Design of
Girder Section – Cable layout – check for stresses at various sections.
Stressed Ribbon Bridges
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text books
1. N. Krishna Raju, Design of Bridges, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co., Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
References
1. D. Johnson Victor, Essentials of Bridge Engineering, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2001
2. S. Ponnuswamy, Bridge Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2003
3. I.S. 456-2000, Plain and Reinforced Concrete-Code of Practice
4. I.S. 800-2007, Indian Standard Code of Practice for General Construction in Steel
5. SP: 16 (S & T) - 1980, Design Aids to I.S.456-1978
6. IRC: 6, 18, 21, 22, 24, 78 and 83
11C014 DESIGN OF INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES

3 0 0 3.0
 To introduce the structure of folded plate and to design, and shell structures and other structures such as
silos, bunkers and chimneys
 To impart knowledge on the design of power transmission structures
sustainability
1. Draw layout for any industrial buildings.

2. Demonstrate the functional requirements for any industry.
3. Design industrial RC structures.
4. Design storage structures.
5. Demonstrate the use of transmission towers and the steps involved in the design of towers.
6. Design of various types of machine foundations.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Evaluate - - - -
5 Create 20 20 20 20
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out the specific requirements of a textile industry.

2. How the industries are classified?
3. List out the types of fire hazard.
4. What is substation?
5. Differentiate between a bunker and a silo.
6. Mention the types of chimneys that are commonly adopted.
7. Mention the types of transmission tower.
8. What are the soil parameters that are needed to be consider for designing the foundations for tower?
9. What are the components of machine foundation?
10. What is the minimum grade of concrete and steel to be used for nuclear containment structures?
UNDERSTAND
1. What are the factors governing site selection for an industry?
†
2. Bring out the uses of fire alarms, extinguishers and hydrants.

3. Distinguish between natural lighting and artificial lighting.
4. What do you mean by vibration isolation?
5. What is the function of a corbel?
6. What is mean by nib and where it is used?
7. Explain in detail the various loads to be considered while designing a transmission lines.
8. Write down the step by step procedure of design of tower foundation.
9. Outline the types of machine foundation.
10. What is the purpose of gantry girder?
APPLY
1. List out the specific requirements for a Textile Industry.

2. Explain the application of Prefabrication techniques.
CREATE
1. Draw a neat layout of a chemical plant.

2. Draw a neat layout of an Engineering Industry with all its specific requirements.
Unit I
General
Classification of Industries and Industrial Structures – Specific requirements for Industries like Engineering,
Textiles, Chemicals, etc.
Site layout and external facilities required
9 Hours
Unit II
Functional Requirements
Natural and artificial lighting – protection from the sun light – Services – Electrical wiring fixtures – cable and pipe
bridge – Electrical installations – substations – Effluent disposal – Fire expanse and chutes – fire alarm,
extinguishers and hydrants – Guidelines from factories act.
Heating and Ventilation – Air conditioning
9 Hours
Unit III
Industrial RC Structures
Design and detailing of R.C. gable frames, corbels, nibs, bunkers, silos and chimneys – Cooling towers
Application of prefabrication techniques.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Power Transmission Structures
Cables – Transmission line towers – Tower Foundation – Testing of towers.
Substation Structures
9 Hours
Unit V
Other Structures
Design of Nuclear containment structures – Gantry girders – Machine Foundations – design procedure.
Types of machine foundation
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. N. Krishna Raju, Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 2008
2. A. R. Santhakumar and S. S. Murthy, Transmission Line Structures, Tata McGraw Hill, 1992
References
1. P. Dayaratnam, Deign of steel structures, A.H. Wheeler & Co., Ltd., Allahabad, 2008
2. IS :4998 (part 1)
3. IS: 4995 (part 1 and part 2)

4. IS: 3483 and IS: 6060
5. S. N. Manokar, Tall Chimneys – Design and Construction, Tata McGraw Hill, 1986
6. Handbook on functional requirements of industrial buildings(Heating and ventilation)
11C015 ADVANCED R.C. DESIGN

3 1 0 3.5
 To impart knowledge on the design of many complicated structures such as curved beams, gable frames,
silos, bunkers and chimneys
 To impart knowledge on the advanced design of slabs and hyper static beams
sustainability

1. Demonstrate the responses of various structural systems for any loading condition
2. Design of various structures according to codal provisions
3. Analyze and determine the critical load for various types of slab
4. Know the importance of prefabrication techniques
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 10
3 Apply 40 40 40 40
4 Analyze / Evaluate - - 20 -
5 Create 30 30 30 30
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is meant by enhanced shear stress in corbels?

2. List out the applications of curved beams.
3. Describe the IS specification of lever arm of deep beam.
4. What are the assumptions made in yield line theory?
5. Define isotrophically reinforcement slab.
6. What are the standard methods analysed for portal frames?
7. Define the term plane of rupture.
8. What is the production techniques involved in prefabrication?
9. Define a prefabricated structure.
10. What is the minimum thickness generally adopted for grid slab?
11. What are the fundamental principles adopted in moment redistribution?
UNDERSTAND
1. Draw the stress distribution diagram for deep beam.

2. Differentiate between shallow beam and deep beam.
3. Locate the maximum positive and maximum negative bending moment of three span continuous beams.
4. What are the characteristic features of yield lines?
†
5. Formation of one yield line may not cause collapse mechanism. Justify.
6. Write the final moment for orthotropically reinforced simply supported rectangle slab subjected to udl?
7. What are the two methods available for determining the ultimate load capacity of slab?
8. What are the design factors to be considered while designing chimney?
9. What are the difference between bunker and silo?
10. Which is preferred mostly bunker or silo?
11. Which joint transmit forces through the hinge?
12. What are composite prefabricates?
13. What is a basic module?
14. In flat slab, how will you determine the critical shear length?
15. What is meant plastic hinges?
APPLY
1. A continuous beam of a multi-storey frame has three spans each of 8m. The characteristics dead load is
10kN/m and the characteristics live load is 15kN/m. Design the critical sections of the beam and sketch the
details of reinforcements using the limit state method. Adopt M20 and Fe 415.
2. Using the yield – line theory, design a rectangular slab of size 4m X 6m which is simply supported along
the edges and has to carry a service live load of 4kN/m2. Assume Coefficient of orthotrophy µ = 0.75. M25
Concrete and Fe415 steel are to be used.
3. Design side walls and hopper bottom of a rectangular bunker of capacity 300kN to store coal. M20
Concrete and Fe415 steel are to be used. Given unit weight of coal is 8kN/m 3. Angle of repose of coal is
250.
4. Explain with neat sketches the various types of beam column joints encountered in prefabrication.
5. A R.C grid floor for a hall has a size 9m x 12m. The ribs are spaced 1.5 m c/c in mutually perpendicular
directions. Live load on the floor is 2 kN/m2. Use M20 concrete and Fe415 steel. Analyses the grid floor by
Rankine Grashoff method for moment and shears. Design the floor completely. Sketch the details of
reinforcement along the central rib in shorter direction.
ANALYZE
1. Explain the procedure of curved beam design. And sketch the point of maximum BM, SF and torsion
moment of six span curved beams.
2. Design a Corbel to carry an ultimate load of 600 kN at distance of 250 mm from the face of a column of
size 400mm X 400mm. M25 Concrete and Fe415 steel are to be used. Draw the reinforcement details. Take
bearing stress of concrete as 0.8 fck.
3. A reinforced concrete slab 5m X 5m is simply supported along the four edges and is reinforcement with
10mm diameter of Fe 415 steel bar at 150mm spacing on both the ways. The average effective depth of the
slab is 100 mm, overall depth is 130mm. The slab carries a flooring of 50mm thick having unit weight of
22kN/m3. Determine the maximum permissible service load if M20 grade of concrete is used.
4. A reinforced concrete chimney 50m high above ground has an outside diameter of 4m. The thickness of the
shell is 200mm at the top and it is increased to 250mm and 300mm at 18m and 30m from the top. A
vertical steel bar is 1% of the cross section area. The total wind force above the section at 18m from top
may be taken as 93kN. Find the stresses developed due to wind and dead load at the section 18m from the
top of the chimney. Assume modular ratio m=13.
5. A flat slab system consists of 5mx6m panels and is without drop and column head. It has to carry a live
load of 4kN/m2. It is to be designed using M20 grade concrete and Fe 415 steel. The size of the columns
supporting the system is 500mm X 500 mm and the floor to floor height is 4.5m. Calculate a design
moment is exterior panels at column and middle strips in both directions.
CREATE
A portal frame with ends hinged is to be analysed for the following data:
Spacing of portal frames = 4m
Height of columns = 4.5m
Distance between column centre = 9m
Live load on the roof = 1.5 kN/m2
RCC slab is provided over the portal frames.

Design the slab, beam, column, hinge and foundations.
Unit I
Special Structural Members
Design of continuous beams – Curved beams – Deep beams – Corbels.
Design of continuous deep beam
9 Hours
Unit II
Yield Line Theory
Assumptions made – Yield line patterns for various types of slabs with different boundary conditions – Analysis of
square - Rectangular and circular slabs subjected to central concentrated load or uniformly distributed load by
virtual work method and equilibrium method – Effect of corner lever – Hillerborg‘s strip method of analysis.
Design of slabs and detailing of reinforcements.
9 Hours
Unit III
Industrial R.C. Structures
Design of portal and gable frames – Silos – Chimneys.
Bunkers
9 Hours
Unit IV
Prefabrication
Principles of precast Construction – Merits and demerits – Dimensioning and detailing of joints for different
structural connections – Constructions and expansion joints.
Production – Transportation - Erection
9 Hours
Unit V
Miscellaneous Structures
Design of flat slabs – Grid floors – Braced and unbraced r.c. walls – Limit analysis of hyperstatic structures –
Fundamental principles – Moment redistribution – Moment – Rotation characteristics of RC sections – Plastic
hingles.
Ultimate load analysis of fixed and continuous beams.
9 Hours
Textbooks
1. N. Krishnaraju, Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, C. B. S. Publishers and Distributors, 2008

2. Ashok K. Jain, Reinforced Concrete Limit State Design, Nemchand & Bros., 1993
References
1. S. N. Sinha, Reinforced Concrete Design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2002
2. Varghese, Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2002
3. Jain and Jai Krishna, Plain and Reinforced Concrete, Vol. II, Nemchand Brothers, 1986
11C016 TALL STRUCTURES

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on the responses/behavior of tall buildings for various types of loading conditions
 To impart fundamental knowledge on the analysis and design of tall structures
1. Analysis and design of tall buildings with and without shear walls.
2. Demonstrate the functional use of various software packages.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 30 30
4 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Tall Structures.

2. List out the general planning considerations related to high rise buildings.
3. What are the types of high rise structure?
4. What are the important aspects in shear wall design?
5. List out the advantages of Rigid Frame Structure.
6. What are the characteristics of Vierendeel girder?
UNDERSTAND
1. Discuss on loading in tall building, with emphasis on lateral loading, earthquake loading and wind loading.
2. Discuss the behavior of shear wall structures.
3. Explain the behavior of tubular structures.
4. List out the various structural systems. Discuss briefly about the behaviour of each system.
APPLY / EVALUATE
1. Write a note on live load reduction techniques.
ANALYZE
1. Differentiate between braced frame and rigid frame.
†
Unit I
Introduction
Tall Building in the Urban Context - Tall Building and its Support Structure - Development of High Rise
Building Structures - General Planning Considerations. Dead Loads - Live Loads-Construction Loads -Snow,
Rain, and Ice Loads - Wind Loads-Seismic Loading –Water and Earth Pressure Loads - Loads - Loads Due to
Restrained Volume Changes of Material - Impact and Dynamic Loads - Blast Loads.
Combination of Loads – Analysis using Finite Element based packages.
9 Hours
Unit II
The vertical structure plane
Dispersion of Vertical Forces- Dispersion of Lateral Forces - Optimum Ground Level Space - shear Wall
Arrangement - Behaviour of Shear Walls under Lateral Loading. The Floor Structure or Horizontal Building
Plane Floor Framing Systems-Horizontal Bracing- Composite Floor Systems The High - Rise Building as related
to assemblage Kits Skeleton Frame Systems - Load Bearing Wall Panel Systems - Panel – Frame Systems.
Multistory Box Systems
9 Hours
Unit III
Common high-rise building structures and their behavior under load
The Bearing Wall Structure- The Shear Core Structure - Rigid Frame Systems- The Wall -Beam Structure:
Interspatial and Staggered Truss Systems - Frame - Shear Wall Building Systems - Flat Slab Building Structures
- Shear Truss - Frame Interaction System with Rigid - Belt Trusses - Tubular Systems-Composite Buildings -
Comparison of High - Rise Structural Systems Other Design Approaches Controlling Building Drift Efficient
Building Forms.
The Counteracting Force or Dynamic Response
9 Hours
Unit IV
Approximate structural analysis and design of buildings
Approximate Analysis of Bearing Wall Buildings The Cross Wall Structure - The Long Wall Structure The
Rigid Frame Structure Approximate Analysis for Vertical Loading – Approximate Analysis for Lateral Loading
- Approximate Design of Rigid Frame Buildings-Lateral Deformation of Rigid Frame Buildings The Rigid
Frame - Shear Wall Structure - The Vierendeel Structure.
The Hollow Tube Structure
9 Hours
Unit V
Other high-rise building structure
Deep - Beam Systems -High-Rise Suspension Systems - Pneumatic High -Rise Buildings - Space Frame Applied
to High - Rise Buildings.
Capsule Architecture
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Woltang Schueller, High - rise Building Structures, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1976
2. Bryan Stafford Smith and Alex Coull, Tall Building Structures Analysis and Design, John Wiley and Sons,
Inc., 1991
References
1. A. Coull and B. Stafford Smith, Tall Buildings, Pergamon Press, London, 1997.
2. T. Y. Lin and Burry D. Stotes, Structural Concepts and Systems for Architects and Engineers, John Wiley,
1994
3. Lynn S. Beedle, Advances in Tall Buildings, CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi, 1996.
4. S. Taranath, Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings, McGraw Hill, 1998.
11C017 REPAIR AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES

3 0 0 3.0
 To emphasize the importance of maintenance and inspection of structures

 To impart fundamental knowledge on various repairing strategies
1. Demonstrate the various types of distress in concrete structures.

2. Identify the effects due to climate, temperature, chemicals, wear and erosion on structures.
3. Analyze the failures in structure due to design and construction errors.
4. Recommend the best Materials and Techniques for Repair.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Maintenance.
2. Describe Repair.
3. Identify Rehabilitation.
4. State Strengthening.
5. List out the necessities of maintenance.
6. What are the important aspects of Rehabilitation?
7. What are the facets of maintenance operation?
8. List out the classifications of cracks based on width?
9. Name the different types of maintenance?
10. Identify the Deterioration of concrete due to corrosion.
11. State distress.
12. Write down the classification of distress?
13. Define Crazing.
14. Define Quality Assurance.
15. Define ―Mortar repair for Cracks‖.
16. Name the advantages of Diamond cuttings?
17. What is meant by special concrete?
18. List out the factors to be considered while selecting the tools to be used for job on hand.
19. State the assessment procedure for evaluating the structure.
20. Define the term ―Fire Damaged structure‖.
†
UNDERSTAND
1. Classify the concrete demolition.

2. Distinguish between Active Crack and Dormant Crack.
3. Explain the causes for cracks in finished partition walls.
4. Explain the behavior of RC elements due to faulty design and construction errors.
5. Discuss the different methods of flexural strengthening technique for reinforced concrete members and
draw neat sketches
6. Summarize the detail procedure of cathodic protection technique
7. Distinguish between defects in concrete and masonry structures.
8. Distinguish between defects in concrete and steel structures.
9. Distinguish between defects in steel and masonry structures.
10. Classify the types of defects in plastering.
11. Briefly explain the Special concretes and its applications.
APPLY
1. Write the methods available for arrest the cracks.

2. Discover the rehabilitation works to be carried out in multistoried building.
3. Write a short note on Expansive cement.
4. Sketch and represent the damage induced by corrosion of steel.
5. Illustrate the Crack stabilization technique
6. Relate the Repair of fire damaged structure.
Unit I
Maintenance and Repair Strategies
Maintenance, repair and rehabilitation - Facets of maintenance - Importance of maintenance - Diagnosis of
distress - Assessment procedure for evaluating a damaged structure - Causes of deterioration.
Various aspects of inspection - structural and economic appraisal
9 Hours
Unit II
Distress in Concrete Structures - Causes, Effects and Remedial measures
Design and construction errors - Corrosion mechanism - Effects of cover thickness and cracking - Methods of
corrosion protection - Corrosion inhibitors - Corrosion resistant steels - Coatings - Cathodic protection.
Effects due to climate, temperature, chemicals, wear and erosion
9Hours
Unit III
Serviceability and Durability of Concrete Structures
Durability of concrete in sea water - Thermal properties of concrete - Fire resistance - Resistance to freezing and
thawing - Permeability of concrete - Sulphate attack - Methods of control.
Quality assurance - Need - Components - Conceptual bases for quality assurance schemes
9 Hours
Unit IV
Materials and Techniques for Repair
Expansive cement - Polymer concrete - Sulphur infiltrated concrete - Ferro-cement - Fibre reinforced concrete -
Rust eliminators and polymer coating for rebars during repair - Foamed concrete - Vacuum concrete - Gunite or
shotcrete - Epoxy injection, mortar repair for cracks.
Special concretes and mortars - Special cements for accelerated strength gain - Trenchless Technology for
underground pipe laying
9 Hours
Unit V
Repairs to Structures and Demolition of Structures
Repair of structures distressed due to earthquake - Strengthening using FRP - Engineered demolition techniques
for structures.
Case studies of Engineered demolition techniques for structures - Strengthening and stabilization techniques for
repair.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. M. S. Shetty, Concrete Technology Theory and Practice, S. Chand Co., New Delhi, 2005
2. Dension Campbell, Allen and Harold Roper, Concrete Structures, Materials, Maintenance and Repair,
Longman Scientific and Technical Publications, UK, 1991
References
1. ACCE (I), Madurai Centre, Workshop on Cracks, Corrosion and Leaks, July, 2003
2. M. L. Gambhir, Concrete Technology, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2003
3. Peter H. Emmons, Concrete Repair and Maintenance Illustrated Problem Analysis, Repair Strategy,
Techniques, Galgotia Publication, 2001
11C018 FINITE ELEMENT METHOD

3 1 0 3.5
 To impact basic knowledge on the various steps involved in finite element analysis.
 To introduce various types of one -, two -, three – dimensional elements.

1. Derive the shape functions for triangular elements

2. Derive the shape functions for rectangular elements
3. Analysis and design of plate and shell structures using finite element method
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Test Model Semester End

Sl. No. Test I†
II† Examination† Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is the principal of virtual work?

2. What are weighted residual methods?
3. What do you mean by non – conforming element?
4. What is the significance of jacobian matrix?
5. What is linear triangular element?
6. What is isoparametric representation?
7. What is hermitian family of elements?
8. Why constitutive matrix for axi – symmetric stress analysis is of order 4x4?
9. Define shell.
10. What are the degrees of freedom in BIS elements?
11. What do you mean by consistent load vector?
12. What are cylindrical coordinates?
13. What are the different types of non linearity?
14. What is mesh generation?
UNDERSTAND
†
1. State the principle in method of weighted residuals.

2. Differentiate between Galerkin and Ritz method.
3. Differentiate between LST and CST elements.
4. What do you understand by sub parametric, isoparametric and super parametric elements? Differentiate
them with an example.
5. Write a note on ZIB8 and ZIB20 elements with respect to their formulation and implementation.
6. How will you map a curved boundary in 3-D analysis?
7. How finite strip method is applied for the analysis of folded plate?
8. Give a brief account of semi – loop shell elements.
9. How will you analysis a GIRD?
10. Compare Newton Raphson and modified Newton Raphson methods
APPLY / EVALUATE
1. Explain the basis steps involved in Finite Element Analysis.

2. Describe the different storage schemes and solution of large system of simultaneous equation.
3. Explain any two methods of weighted residuals with examples
4. Explain Rayleigh Ritz method by taking an example
5. Evaluate the stiffness matrix of a CST element whose coordinates are (10,10),(30 , 10), and (20,30), adopt
γ = o.25, t = 10mm
6. Determine the element stiffness matrix and thermal load vector for the plane stress element shown in figure.
The element experiences a 20˚C increase in temperature. Take E = 15x10 6 N/cm2, γ = o.25, t = 5cm and α =
6x10-6
Y
3
(1,3)
1 2 X
(0,0) (2,0)
7. Explain how you will use your FE analysis for R.C structures.
8. Determine the shape function of an eight node rectangular element
9. Explore the various steps involved in FEA with a suitable example with the help of any one of the finite
element packages based on FEM
10. Explain the finite strip method in FEM and state its application in structural engineering
11. Explain the modified Newton – Raphson method for solving non linear equations.
12. Explain any one method of handling geometric non linearity
13. Evaluate the stiffness matrix for a three noded triangular element using N1 Techniqu
Unit I
Introduction
Concept of an element - Various element shapes - one, two and three dimensional elements - Finite Element
procedure, variational principles and method of weighted residual - Principle of virtual work - Rayleigh Ritz
method - Galerkin's method of weighted residual. Displacement, stress and hybrid models - Principle of
minimum potential energy - Principle of minimum complementary energy - Reissner's principle. Convergence and
compatibility requirements - Assumed displacement field – Pascal‘s Triangle - Melosh criteria
9 Hours
Unit II
Two Dimensional Elements
Triangular Elements - Constant strain triangle - Rectangular Elements - Serendipity family - Hermitian family.
Sub-Iso-Super Parametric elements - Shape function - Mapping.
9 Hours
Unit III
Three Dimensional Elements
Numerical Integration using Gaussian Quadrature - Weights and Gauss points. Selective and reduced integration. -
Tetrahedran element family - parallelopiped element - Hexahedran Element family.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Plate/Shell Elements and Finite Strip Method
Triangular and Rectangular elements - BFS Element - Faceted element for shells - Semi - loof elements -
Degenerated shell elements - Finite strip method
9 Hours
Unit V
Non-Linear Analysis and Computer Applications
Types of non-linearities - Stability analysis - Load deformation response - Solution techniques - Newton Raphson
method - Modified Newton Raphson method, Alpha constant method, Riks Wempner method - Classical Eigen
Value analysis
9 Hours
Textbooks
1. S. Rajasekaran, Finite Element Methods in Engineering Design, Wheeler, 1993.

2. C. S. Krishnamoorthy, Finite Element Method - Theory and Programming, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company, New Delhi, 1994.
References
1. Tirupathi R. Chandrupatla and Ashok D. Belegundu, Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering,

Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2002
2. K. J. Bathe, Finite Element Procedure, Prentice Hall of India, and New Delhi, 2007
3. O. C. Zienkiewinz, The Finite Element method Vol. 1 & 2, TMH, New York, 2002
11C019 ADVANCED STEEL DESIGN

3 1 0 3.5
 To impart knowledge on steel constructions

 To impart the knowledge on codal provisions for design of steel structures

sustainability
1. Design of Industrial Components

2. Design of cold formed light gauge sections
3. Plastic analysis of structures
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Test Model Semester End

Sl. No. Test I†
II† Examination† Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Create 40 40 40 40
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the merits and demerits of bolted connection?

2. What are stiffened and un stiffened seat connections?
3. What are the various types of connection?
4. Define cable columns.
5. What is a bent in industrial building?
6. What are the various components for a industrial building?
7. What are the assumptions made in the analysis of roof truss?
8. What is meant by staging?
9. What is flat width ratio?
10. Define multiple stiffened elements.
11. Define plastic hinge
12. Define static theorem and kinematic theorem.
13. Define ‗limit state‘.
UNDERSTAND
1. Differentiate between the bolted and welded connections.

2. Differentiate between framed connection and seated connection.
†
3. List out the various types of bolts commonly used in structural steel works.
4. List out the various effects of cranes to be considered under the imposed loads in the design of gantry
girder.
5. State the place where eaves girder is used.
6. What is the difference between bunker and silo?
7. State the factors which decide the height of the transmission line tower.
8. How the allowable stresses on chimney are evaluated?
9. Mention the forces considered for the design of wind bracing.
10. Write an equation to determine the fundamental period of oscillation of a water tank.
11. Differentiate between self supporting chimney and guyed steel stack.
12. Differentiate between the stiffened and multi- stiffened elements in cold formed steel structures.
13. Differentiate between stiffened compression elements and un stiffened compression elements.
14. State the types of mechanism.
15. Give examples for statically determinate and indeterminate structures.
16. What are the differences between elastic theory of design, plastic theory of design and limit state
design?
APPLY / EVALUATE
1. How will you calculate Nominal diameter of the bolt?

2. Write a detailed note on high tension friction grip bolted connection. What are the advantages of such a
connection?
3. Design a single bolted cover butt joint to connect boiler plates of thickness 12mm for maximum
efficiency. Use M16 bolts of grade 4.6. Boiler plates are of Fe410 grade. Find the efficiency of the
joint.
4. How the effective throat thickness will be computed in case of incomplete penetration butt weld?
5. Discuss the relative merits of bolted and welded connections. State the conditions where each would be
used advantageously.
6. Explain how net effective area of various sections used as tension members is computed.
7. How will you calculate design bending moment for I – section purlin?
8. Write down the formula to find maximum bending moment for angle section.
9. Write down the formula to find out the design wind pressure.
10. The span of Knee roof trusses used over an industrial building 25m long is 18m. The spacing of roof
truss is 1 in 4. The galvanized corrugated iron sheets are used for roof covering. The basic wind
pressure is 1.5 kN/ sqm and there is no snow fall. The height of eaves above ground level is 8m.
Propose a suitable type of roof truss. Determine the load at various panel points due to dead load , live
load , and wind load. Determine the reactions also.
11. Compute the design strength of bearing type connections based on shear and bearing for the joints
shown in Fig. the bolts are grade 4.
35 mm 35
120
P = 65 mm
6 mm cover plate
12 mm main plate
12. Explain with sketches the various type of transmission line towers and bracing patterns used.
13. State the different types of towers with their neat sketches, and explain them.
14. Calculate the allowable load for rectangular tubular column of size 200mm x 120mm of 2 mm
thickness. The effective length of column is 3.6m. Take fy =235 N/mm 2.
15. Explain in detail about the laterally supported beams with their conditions.
16. A uniform beam of length 3 L is built up at each end carries vertical loads W and 2W at the third points.
If the plastic moment of the beam is Mp, estimate the value of W for complete collapse.
17. A portal frame of height L and span 2L , is of uniform section with fully plastic moment Mp.a
horizontal load W is applied at the top of the column and another load W is applied at the centre of the
beam. Find the value of W at collapse.
CREATE
1. Design a welded lap joint for plates of size 100mm x 8mm and 100mm x 12mm.
2. A double cover butt joint is used to connect plates of 16 mm thick. Design the riveted joint and
determine its efficiency.
3. Design a butt joint to connect two plats 240mmx12mm using 20mm dia of Rivet. Arrange the rivets to
give maximum efficiency.
Unit I
Structural Connections
Design of high strength function grip bolts - Design of bolted connections at the junctions of beams and columns in
frames - Design of un-stiffened & stiffened seat connections - Welded connections - Eccentric connections - Beam
end connections - Direct web fillet welded connections - Direct web Butt welded connection - Double plate web
connection - Double angle web connection - Un-stiffened and stiffened seat connection – Continuous beam to
column connection – Tubular connections - Continuous beam to beam to connection.
Moment resistant connections
9 Hours
Unit II
Industrial Building
Industrial building frames – Section of roofing and wall materials - General - Framing - Bracing – Design of gantry
girders and crane columns - Analysis of Trussed bents - Design example - Design of rigid joints knee for gable
frames.
Design of slabs on grade
9 Hours
Unit III
Analysis and Design of Special Structures
Design of steel bunkers and silos - Janssen's theory - Airy‘s theory - Design parameters-design criteria - Design and
detailing of guyed steel chimneys - Transmission line towers – Introduction - Types of towers - Tower configuration
– Design and analysis the Thin shell structures
Design of rectangular steel water tank 9 Hours
Unit IV
Light Gauge Sections
Design of cold formed sections - Concepts - Effective width - Stiffened sections - Multiple stiffened sections -
Design for flexure - Design of light gauge columns – Torsional – Flexural buckling – Tension Members - Beam
column – Connections – Design folded plates – Design of light gauge steel studs.
Design light gauge tubular section
9 Hours
Unit V
Plastic Analysis and Design
Plastic design of tension & compression members - Theory of plastic bending - Plastic hinge – Redistribution of
moments - Failure mechanisms - Plastic analysis and design of fixed beams, continuous beams and portal frames by
mechanism method.
Analysis the grid structures
9 Hours
Textbooks
1. N. Subramanian, Design of Steel Structures, Oxford University Press 2008

2. S. K. Duggal, Limit State Design of Steel Structures, Tata , Mc Graw Hill Education Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi
References
1. M. R. Shiyekar, Limit State Design in Structural Steel, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi,
2010
2. K. S. Sai Ram, Design of Steel Structures, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd, Pearson Education
in South Asia.
4. IS 875- 1987 Code of practice for design loads for buildings and structures (second revision) BIS, New
Delhi.
5. IS 811 – 1987, Specification for cold formed light gauge structural steel sections (Second revision) BIS,
New Delhi.
6. IS 801 – 1975, code of practice for use of cold formed light gauge steel structural members in general
building construction , BIS , New delhi.
7. R. Murugesan and A. P. Arulmanickam, Steel Tables in SI Units, Pratheeba Publishers, Coimbatore, 2009.
11C020 BUILDING SERVICES

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on the various aspects of pumps and machinery involved in Civil Engineering
practice
 To impart knowledge on the principles of electrical and air conditioning facilities involved.
 To emphasize the importance of fire safety
sustainability
1. Design of the electrical installation.

2. Planning consideration of the building.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
Apply / Analyze /
3 30 30 30 30
Evaluate
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Name some special features required for a commercial building for physically handicapped and elderly.
2. What is a vibrator?
3. Why is earthing needed for electrical systems?
4. What are the types of switch gears?
5. What is the modern theory of light and colour?
6. What do you mean by depreciation factor?
7. Distinguish between evaporation and sublimation.
8. What is the use of cooling towers?
9. Write any four non combustible materials used in buildings.
10. What is snorkel ladder?
UNDERSTAND
1. What is the need for fire protection in educational buildings?
2. Mention the types of fire protection system.
3. State the types of building services.
4. Write out the quantification of light.
5. Name any four acoustic materials.
6. Define reverberation.
7. State the purpose of a vibrator.
†
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to a maximum of 20and Model Examination will be
8. State the function of a compressor in refrigeration.

9. Distribution of main power supply is very essential in building.
10. What is meant by load factor.
APPLY
1. Explain various possibilities of fire hazards in current type buildings and how will you protect them from
disaster.
ANALYZE
1. Explain the planning consideration in various types of building for fire safety.
Unit I
Machineries
Hot Water Boilers – Lifts and Escalators – Special features required for physically handicapped and elderly –
Conveyors – Vibrators – Concrete mixers – DC motors – Generators – Laboratory services – Gas, water, air and
electricity.
AC motors
8 Hours
Unit II
Electrical Systems in Buildings
Basics of electricity – Single / Three phase supply – Protective devices in electrical installations – Earthing for
safety – Types of earthing – ISI specifications – Types of wires, wiring systems and their choice – Planning
electrical wiring for building – Main and distribution boards – Transformers and switch gears. Layout of substations
10 Hours
Unit III
Principles of Illumination & Design
Visual tasks – Factors affecting visual tasks – Modern theory of light and colour – Synthesis of light – Additive and
subtractive synthesis of colour – Luminous flux – Candela – Solid angle illumination – Utilisation factor –
Depreciation factor – MSCP – MHCP – Lans of illumination – Classification of lighting – Artificial light sources –
Spectral energy distribution – Luminous efficiency – Colour temperature – Colour rendering - Design of modern
lighting – Lighting for stores and house lighting - Elementary idea of special features required and minimum level of
illumination required for physically handicapped and elderly in building types.
Lighting for offices, schools, hospitals
8 Hours
Unit IV
Refrigeration Principles & Applications
Thermodynamics – Heat – Temperature, measurement - Transfer – Change of state – Sensible heat – Latent heat of
fusion, evaporation, sublimation – Saturation temperature – Super heated vapour – Subcooled liquid – Pressure
temperature relationship for liquids – Refrigerants – Vapour compression cycle – Compressors – Evaporators –
Starters – Air handling units – Cooling towers – Window type and packaged air-conditioners – Chilled water plant –
Fan coil systems – Water piping – Cooling load – Air conditioning systems for different types of buildings –
Protection against fire.
Refrigerant control devices – Electric motors
10 Hours
Unit V
Fire Safety Installation
Causes of fire in buildings – Safety regulations – NBC – Planning considerations in buildings like non-combustible
materials, construction, staircases and lift lobbies, fire escapes and A.C. systems - Special features required for
physically handicapped and elderly in building types – Heat and smoke detectors – Fire lighting pump and water
storage – Dry and wet risers – Automatic sprinklers.
Fire alarm system, snorkel ladder
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. C. P. Arora, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1988
2. G. Steffy, Architectural Lighting Design, John Wiley and Sons, 2008
3. J. Killinger and L. Killinger, Heating and Cooling Essentials, Goodheart-Wilcox Publishers, 2003
References
1. Jones, Air Conditioning Engineering, Edward Amold Publication, 2007

2. National Building Code of India, NBC, 2005
3. ASHRAE, Fundamentals and Equipment, ASHRAE Inc., 2005
11C021 DISASTER MANAGEMENT

3 0 0 3.0
 To provide an exposure on the various elements of natural disasters

 To impart knowledge on measurement, effect and management techniques for different disasters
1. Analyze the various methods to mitigate the effect due to disasters

2. Demonstrate the importance of various disaster management techniques
3. Demonstrate the importance of deforestation.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Test Test Model Semester End

Sl. No.
I† II† Examination† Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Evaluation - - - -
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define disaster or calamity.

2. Define the stages of disaster management cycle.
3. State marine control techniques.
4. Define hydrological cycle.
5. State genetic manipulation
6. Define ozone depletion.
7. Identify the causes for earthquake.
8. Name some mining disasters.
9. List out wind driven disasters.
10. Sate some flood forecasting techniques.
UNDERSTAND
1. What do you mean by Disaster Management?

2. Give an example for calculating population growth.
3. Predict the reasons for dam bursts.
4. Distinguish between flood and tsunami.
†
5. Summarize green house effect.

6. Generalizes CBD.
7. What do you understand by ground water?
8. What are the basic concepts for desertification?
9. Distinguish between Lightning and frost disasters?
10. Predict some chemical pollution in India.
APPLY
1. List out the casual factors of disasters.

2. Compare between natural and manmade disasters.
3. Analyze the various techniques for marine pollution control
4. Identify the causes for sea level rise.
5. Outline the various forest related disasters.
6. Illustrate in detail about flood hazards.
7. Compute the theory of mass movement in land disasters.
8. Compare between earthquake and volcanism.
9. Illustrate any two case studies on frost disasters.
10. Compute the methods used reducing chemical pollution in India.
Unit I
Introduction to Disaster Management
Contemporary natural and man-made disasters - Fundamentals of disasters - Causal factors of disasters –
Poverty - Population growth - Rapid urbanization - Transitions in cultural practices - Environmental
degradation - War and civil strife – Earthquakes - Tropical cyclones – Floods – Droughts - Environmental
pollution – Deforestation - Desertification – Epidemics - Chemical and industrial accidents
Fundamentals of disasters, Environmental pollution
9 Hours
Unit II
Coastal and Marine Diasters
Hydrological - Coastal and marine disasters - Flood hazards - Control and management - Dams and dam bursts
- Tsunami - Water and groundwater hazards - Sea level rise - Coastal and marine degradation - Marine
pollution - Techniques of marine pollution control
Coastal and marine degradation
9 Hours
Unit III
Atmospheric Disasters
Atmospheric disasters - Greenhouse effect and global climate - Air pollution and acid rain - Ozone depletion -
Forest related disasters - Biodiversity extinction - Deforestation and loss of biological diversity – genetic
manipulation -Biosafety and CBD
Genetic manipulation
9 Hours
Unit IV
Land Disasters
Geological - Mass movement and land disasters – Earthquake -Volcanism - Mass movement hazards - Land
degration and land use - Droughts and famines- Deserts and desertification – Groundwater over- exploitation-
dryness and wildfires - Technological disasters -Mining disasters - War - chemicals and the environment
Droughts and famines, mining disasters
9 Hours
Unit V
Wind and water driven disasters -Flood forecasting mitigation planning and management -Tropical cyclones –
Storms – Hurricanes –Tornadoes - Lightning and frost disasters. Case studies – Regulating hazardous industries
in India - Control of toxic chemicals and chemical pollution in India
Regulating hazardous industries in India
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. B. K. Khanna, All you wanted to know about disasters, New India Publishing Agency, New Delhi, 2005
2. William L Waugh, Living with hazards, dealing with disasters: An Introduction to Emergency
Management, Amazon Publications, 2002
References
1. Patrick Leon Abbott, Natural Disasters, Amazon Publications, 2002

2. Ben Wisner, At Risk: Natural Hazards, People vulnerability and disasters, Amazon Publications, 2001
3. D. B. N. Murthy, Disaster management: text and case studies, Deep & Deep Publications, 2007
11CO22 CONCEPTS OF ENGINEERING DESIGN

3 0 0 3.0
 To provide a broad exposure to the students about the concepts of designs necessary in Civil Engineering
practice
 To make the students familiar with National Building Code of India and other relevant codes for the
functional design of flats, residential and industrial buildings
sustainability
1. Determine the solutions for engineering problems

2. Analyze the functional design of buildings as per Indian Standards
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Sl. No TEST 1† TEST 2† Model Semester end

examination examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 30 30 30 30
5 Evaluate - - - -
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Engineering Design.

2. List out the main characteristics of engineering design.
3. Mention some of the possible steps to develop creativity.
4. How to overcome Psychological set?
5. What is the aim of embodiment process?
6. What are the main criteria used to select the combination of materials and processes?
7. Write about NBC.
8. Mention any two codes related to design of industrial building.
9. Specify the importance of presentation techniques.
10. What is study prior invention?
UNDERSTAND
1. Briefly discuss about the content of PDS.

2. Explain in detail about the operational requirements.
3. Bring out the difference between Psychological set and inversion.
†
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
for 50 marks.
4. What are the four stages recommended for morphological analysis?

5. Explain the importance of provisional materials and process determination in the design process.
6. Briefly outline the seat suspension technique by preliminary design in the design process.
7. Recall the rules and regulations related to flats.
8. Illustrate the functional design of industrial buildings as per IS.
9. Characterize some presentation techniques to be adopted in reports.
10. How will you prepare a patent report? Explain.
APPLY
1. Write a detailed specification for a car which is to be used in towns.

2. Write a specification for a foot-pump to be designed for pumping up car tyres.
3. Consider the wide variety available for assisting the removal of a cork from the neck of a wine
bottle. Select the optimum using the recommended decision making process.
4. Identify the concept which best meets the specifications you have written for the rail cutter, the bilge
filter problem, and the one-handed can opener introduced to the exercises at the end.
5. A shaft tolerance has a standard deviation of 0.01mm. The hole tolerance has a standard deviation of
0.016 mm. The difference between the means is 0.045 mm. If the entire production is accepted for
assembly, determine the proportion of assemblies with clearance less than the allowance of 0.01mm
and the proportion of assemblies expected to interfere.
6. A unit has a constant rate of 0.3% pep 1000 hours. What is its MTBF? What are the probabilities of
the unit successfully completing missions of 10000, 100000 and 1000000 hours?
7. Apply EVAD method for fixing a gear to a shaft.
ANALYZE
1. A market opportunity exists for a can opener which is operated by disabled people with only one hand. The
device is to open the can in such a manner that the contents are not split or contaminated, the contents can
be easily removed and no dangerous of jagged edges are left exposed. Write a specification for the device.
2. Write down the product design specification for under seat suspension unit.
3. A survey has been conducted which indicates a sizable market for a power driven mini trencher. The use
would be mainly for services on new housing estates, where a trench 100mm wide by 450 mm deep is the
minimum requirement, and for digging drainage channels in lawns. It is envisaged that sales would be
almost solely through contractors/dealers who would then hire the device out. Write a PDS, generate
concepts and select the optimum concept for the mini trencher.
Unit I
Engineering Design and Problem Identification
Engineering design introduction and definition, Design process, Engineering design interfaces, Principles of
Engineering Design– PDS criteria, Content of a PDS, Sample PDS, Principles, Exercises.
Problem Identification
9 Hours
Unit II
Concept Generation and Selection
Introduction – Creativity Principle, Psychological ‗set‘, Inversion, Analogy, Fantasy, Technological advances,
Brainstorming, Morphological analysis, Presentation, Exercises. Concept selection – Subjective decision-making,
Criteria ranking, Criteria weighting, Datum method, EVAD (Design Evaluation) method, Concept selection method,
Exercises.
Principles of Computer aided decision making
9 Hours
Unit III
Design Process
Embodiment design - Introduction, Size and strength, Scheme drawing, Form design, Provisional material and
process determination, Design for assembly and manufacture, Principles. Modeling – Introduction, Mathematical
modeling, Optimization, Scale models, Simulation, Principles, Exercises.
Industrial design
9 Hours
Unit IV
Functional Design of Buildings
Functional design of Residential buildings – Rules and regulations related to flats as per National Building Code of
India – Functional design of Industrial Buildings and factories – as per Indian Standards.
Functional design of other buildings
9 Hours
Unit V
Reports and Intellectual Property Rights
Presentation Techniques – Introduction, Concept sketches, Scheme drawing, Design report, Principles. Intellectual
Property Rights – Introduction, Write the description of the invention, Pursue application.
Study prior inventions
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Ken Hurst, Engineering Design Principles, Elsevier Science & Technology Books, May 1999.
2. National Building Code of India.
Reference Books:
1. Richard Birmingham, Graham Cleland, Robert Driver & David Maffin, Understanding Engineering
Design, Prentice Hall of India, 1998.
2. NPTEL (\\http:lib.bitsathy.ac.in)
3. www.howstuffworks.com
4. www.patentoffice.nic.in
5. ep.espacenet.com/advancedSearch.
11C023 CREATIVITY AND INNOVATIONS

3 0 0 3.0
 To emphasize the importance of creativity and innovation in the field of engineering

 To introduce the fundamental knowledge on TRIZ and patenting
 To emphasize the importance of patenting
1. Application of creative techniques in solving engineering problems

2. Ability to analysis and evaluate a project
3. Understanding the importance of Patenting and Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Analyze 10 10 10 10
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State the concept of creativity

2. What is lateral thinking?
3. What is brain storming?
4. List out the ideas to be followed in selecting a new project.
5. What is meant by diffusion of innovation?
6. Mention the different stages of technological innovation.
7. Name the different forms of Trade Mark.
8. Give some uses of a prototype.
9. What is meant by contradiction in TRIZ?
10. Define ideality in the context of TRIZ philosophy.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain with an example how step by step development takes place using creativity principle.
2. Name the steps to be followed in influencing the design.
3. Explain the different stages in creativity process.
4. State and explain the different types of innovation.
5. Explain in detail the different sources of innovation.
6. List out the criteria for selecting a new project.
7. Describe in detail on different kinds of evaluation.
†
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
for 50 marks
8. Write notes on Patent, trademarks, Industrial design and Copyrights.

9. Discuss the salient features of Patent Act 1970 and Patent rules.
10. Write short notes on Patent application, Patent search, Rights of patentee and Grant of patent.
11. Discuss in detail the international pattern classification.
12. Discuss various brain storming techniques.
ANALYZE
1. State with an example how creativity and intelligence are related

2. Does designing a system using creativity in an economic way influences its output result. State with a
practical example.
3. Analyze how the lateral thinking influences the design process.
4. Compare the benefits and risks of new projects.
5. Why a project has to be evaluated? Does it have any influence in getting final result?
APPLY/ EVALUATE
1. State with examples the application of lateral thinking in civil engineering.

2. Evaluate a project by explaining the steps in a detailed manner.
3. Imagine a world without colours. List eight effects.
4. Take any four creative techniques and explain how you would apply them to your problems.
5. Divide a square into 4 equal parts in at least eight ways.
6. How cost evaluation is done for a new project?
CREATE
1. Create eight ideas for the improvement of quality in a field of your choice.
2. Move three sides to new positions to get only 4 squares, no overlapping or loose ends.
Unit I
Creativity
Concept and - Need for creativity - Creative environment - Stages of creativity process - Creativity and intelligence -
Creativity in various contexts - Economic view of creativity - Measuring creativity - Fostering creativity - Creative
problem solving – Brain storming and various techniques - Lateral thinking.
History of creativity
9 Hours
Unit II
Innovation
Definition - Creativity vis-à-vis innovation - Conceptualizing innovation - Types of innovation - Sources of
innovation - Goals of innovation - Process of technological innovation - Diffusion of innovation - Factors
contributing to successful technological innovation - Failure of innovations- innovation management - Measures of
innovation.
Case studies of applying innovative principles
9 Hours
Unit III
Project Innovation through TRIZ –Theory to Resolve Inventive Problems
Theory to Resolve Inventive Problems- TIPS – Theory of inventive problem solving – About the author – Genrich
Altshuller - Essence of TRIZ – Ideal final result – Problem formulation and functional analysis – Concept of
ideality – Contradiction - Physical and technical – 39 contradicting parameters – Contraction matrix – 40 inventive
principles – 76 standard solutions – Technology evolution trends – Case studies.
History and origin of TRIZ
9 Hours
Unit IV
Product Development and Evaluation
Research and new product development – Process and types of new products - Creative design - Design of prototype
– Purpose – Process and types - Model preparation - Testing and quality evaluation - Marketing research – Purpose
and process - Types and methods - Introducing new products - Cost evaluation.
Case studies of marketing research
9 Hours
Unit V
Protection of Innovation
Intellectual property (IP) - Classes of IP – Industrial property and copyrights - Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) –
Patents - Patentability- Patent acts - Governing laws - History of patent laws and acts - Patent administration -
Patenting process – Patent application - Patent search – Prosecution – Publication – Examination – Opposition –
Grant - Renewal - Patent rights - International code for patents.
Introduction to Patents vis-à-vis economics
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Tom Kelly, The Art of Innovation, Doubleday- Random House Inc., USA, 2001.
2. Managing Creativity and Innovation (Harvard Business Essentials), Harvard Business School, 2003
References
1. Brain Twiss, Managing Technological Innovation, Pitman Publishing Ltd., 1992.
2. Harry B. Watton, New Product Planning, Prentice Hall Inc., 1992.
3. Paul Birch and Brian Clegg, Business Creativity – A Guide for Managers, Kogan Page- London- 1995.
4. Leigh L. Thompson and Hoon-Seok Choi, Creativity and Innovation in Organizational Teams, Lawrence
Erlbaum Associates, USA, 2006.
5. Paul E. Plsek, Creativity- Innovations and Quality, Irwin Professional, USA, 1997.
6. Alan G. Robinson and Sam Stern, Corporate Creativity: How Innovation and Improvement Actually
Happen, Berrett-Koehler Publishers, USA, 1998.
11C024 REMOTE SENSING AND GIS

3 0 0 3.0
 To impact knowledge on the principles of Remote Sensing and its limitations

 To impact knowledge on the basic characteristics of remote sensing imagery
 To provide a basic understanding of GIS modeling concepts, components, requirements and applications

1. Analyze a remotely sensed data using the scientific method to address an inquiry based study
2. Acquire and create spatial data from satellite imagery, printed maps, online sources, GPS, etc.
3. Develop spatial and temporal models for presentation, analysis and decision-making
4. Achieve competency in the use of the RS and GIS software packages
5. Designing and executing a workflow using RS and GIS techniques appropriate to an applied field
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

Examination† examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define EMR.
2. State Stefan-Boltzman and Wein‘s Displacement Law.
3. List out the major components of GIS.
4. Define the term MAP.
5. What are file formats for vector spatial data?
6. What are the different types of modeling adopted in GIS?
7. What is meant by vector data & Raster data?
8. What is DTM?
9. What are the COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) of land use classification?
10. Define LIS.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain with sketches the components of a remote sensing system.

2. Distinguish between atmospheric blinds and atmospheric windows.
†
3. Describe the spectral reflectance curves.

4. List out the major components of GIS.
5. Mention any eight application areas of remote sensing.
6. List out the various elements of visual image interpretation.
7. What do you mean by overlay?
8. With a neat sketch describe raster and vector data representation
9. How is DEM derived?
10. State various schemes and levels of LULC classification systems with RS data
APPLY
1. Explain elaborately the application of GIS in Resource management?

2. Explain how RS and GIS techniques are used in Land Information System.
3. Explain the role of RS and GIS in the land use/land cover mapping.
4. What are the maps derived from DEM? Where are they used?
5. With a neat flow chart diagram explain the methodology adopted in water resources management and
monitoring using RS and GIS techniques
Unit I
Remote Sensing
Definition and its components - Electromagnetic spectrum – wavelength regions important to remote sensing –
Wave theory, Particle theory, Stefan-Boltzman and Wein‘s Displacement Law – Atmospheric scattering, absorption
– Atmospheric windows – spectral signature concepts – typical spectral reflective characteristics of earth surface,
water, vegetation and soil- – Platform and Sensors.
Indian remote sensing satellites
9 Hours
Unit II
Image Interpretation and Analysis
Types of Data Products – Types of image interpretation – Basic elements of image interpretation - Visual
interpretation keys – Digital Image Processing – Pre-processing – Image enhancement techniques – Multispectral
Image classification – Supervised and unsupervised.
Indian remote sensing data policy
9 Hours
Unit III
Geographic Information System
Maps –Map projections – Types of map projections- GIS definition – Basic components of GIS –- Data type –
Spatial and non-spatial data – Database concepts – Files and data formats – Vector and Raster data structures, Data
compression, Edge matching.
Standard RS and GIS packages
9 Hours
Unit IV
Data Input Editing and Analysis
Data stream – Input methods –GPS for data capture-Editing- Data Retrieval – Query – Simple Analysis – Spatial
Analysis – Overlay – Vector Data Analysis – Raster Data Analysis- Topological analysis – Modeling surfaces –
DEM –DTM – Slope Model - Integration of Remote Sensing and GIS.
Data input by digitization and scanning
9 Hours
Unit V
RS and GIS Applications in Resource Management
Fields of Applications- Land use and Land cover classification – Natural Resources – Agriculture – Soil – Water
Resources – Wasteland Management - Social Resources - Cadastral Records – Land Information System.
RS and GIS applications in Highway alignment
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. M. Anji Reddy, Remote sensing and Geographical Information Systems, Third Edition, BS Publications,
India, 2002.
References
1. T.M. Lillesand and R.W. Kicter, Remote Sensing and Image interpretation, John Willey and sons, inc. New
York, 2002.
2. Sabins, F.F.Jr, Remote sensing principles and interpretation, W.H.Freeman & Co., 1978.
3. Paul A Longley, Michael F Goodchild, Geographical Information Systems Volume I and II, Second
Edition, John Wiley Publications, 1999.
4. P.A, Burrough, Principles of GIS for Land Resources Assessment, Oxford Publication, 2000
5. Michael N Demers, Fundamentals of Geographical Information Systems, Second Edition, John Wiley
Publications, 2002
11C025 GREEN BUILDINGS

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on the sustainable construction strategies.

 To introduce the concept of green buildings.
sustainability
1. Select a suitable sustainable construction strategies and to introduce the concept of green buildings .
2. Determine the building rating systems and the process and implementation of green buildings
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Test Test Model Semester End

Sl. No.
I† II† Examination† Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate - - - -
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is a green building?
2. Why green buildings are required?
3. What are the merits and demerits of a green building?
4. What is building rating system?
5. What is heat island mitigation?
6. What are the methods for building envelope?
7. Give the Green building materials issues and priorities?
8. Difference between green building buildings and green materials.
9. What are the Essentials of building commissioning?
10. What are the Future directions in green buildings?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the Relationship between comfort level and performance ability?
2. Give a Case study of a green building.
3. Explain Smart buildings and energy management systems.
†
4. How a design for deconstruction and disassembly should be performed?

5. Explain Construction and demolition waste management.
APPLY
Explain the planning considerations of green building with reference to Indian codes and its future directions.
ANALYZE
1. Explain Contemporary and future ecological designs for a green building and LEED building assessment
standard.
2. Explain the economics of green buildings and Quantifying green building costs.
Unit I
Sustainable Construction and Green Building Requirements
Ethics and sustainability – Increased Co2 trade – Sustainable construction – Major environmental and resource
concerns – Green building movement and obstacles – Green building requirements – Perceived use – Relationship
between comfort level and performance ability
Perceived use of green building
9 Hours
Unit II
Green Building Process and Assessment
Conventional versus green building delivery systems – Execution of green building process – Integrated design
process – Ecological design – Merits and demerits – Historical perspective – Contemporary and future ecological
designs – LEED building assessment standard – LEED certification process – International building assessment
standards – Building rating system and its future – Case study of a green building
Case study of a green building
9 Hours
Unit III
Sustainable landscaping, Energy and Atmosphere
Land and landscape approaches for green buildings – sustainable landscapes – Enhancing ecosystems – Storm water
management – Heat island mitigation – Building energy issues – Building energy design strategies – Building
envelope – Active mechanical systems – Electrical power systems – Innovative energy optimization strategies –
Smart buildings and energy management systems – Ozone depleting chemicals in HVAC&R and fire suppression
Storm water management
9 Hours
Unit IV
Building Hydrologic System and Material Loops
Energy policy act of 1992 – High performance building hydrologic strategy – High performance building water
supply strategy – High performance building wastewater strategy – Landscaping water efficiency – Green building
materials issues and priorities – Difference between green building buildings and green building materials – LCA of
building materials and products - Emerging construction materials and products – Design for deconstruction and
disassembly – Closing material loops in practice
High performance building wastewater strategy
9 Hours
Unit V
Green Building Implementation
Site protection planning – Health and safety planning – Construction and demolition waste management – Reducing
the footprint of construction operations – Essentials of building commissioning – Costs and benefits of building
commissioning – Case for high performance green buildings – The economics of green buildings – Quantifying
green building costs – Future directions in green buildings
Case for high performance green buildings
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Charles. J. Kibert, Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design and Delivery, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc., New Jersey, 2008
2. M. Bauer, P. Mosle and M. Schwarz, Green Building: Guidebook for Sustainable Architecture, Springer -
Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2010
References
1. Jerry Yudelson, Marketing Green Building Services: Strategies for success, Elsevier, 2008
2. Jerry Yudelson, Marketing Green Buildings: Guide for Engineering, Construction and Architecture, The
Fairmont Press Inc., 2006
3. Angela. M. Dean, Green by Design: Creating a Home for Sustainable Living, Gibbs Smith Publication,
2003
11C026 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES

3 1 0 3.5
 To impart knowledge on prefabricated elements and the technologies used for fabrication and erection
 To impart knowledge on the applications of prefabricated elements in construction
sustainability
1. Understand the general principles of fabrication

2. Design of simple rectangular beams and I beams
3. Demonstrate the suitable techniques for erection of different types of members like beams, slabs, wall
panels and columns
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out the various types of prefabrication

2. Compare prefabrication with monolithic construction.
3. What are ribbed floor panels?
4. What are the various choices of production setup?
5. Name the Manufacturing methods of prefabrication
6. Recall the equipments for hoisting and erection
7. What are the techniques for erection of different types of members?
8. What is Purlin?
9. What are the different types of erection techniques of beams?
10. What is disuniting of structures?
11. Define dimensional tolerance
UNDERSTAND
1. Differentiate site and plant prefabrication

2. Explain the designing procedures of precast unit for factory structures
†
3. How can prefabricate structures made economical?

4. What are the various types of footings for prefabricated elements?
5. Predict the various types of joints for different structural connections
6. Explain in detail about the Stationary and mobile production technology
7. Discuss about the planning of production setup
8. Identify the technique used for erection of column
9. Discuss about the various parts of roof trusses
APPLY / EVALUATE
1. How will you eliminate the erection stresses?

2. What are the provisions made for non-structural fastenings?
3. What are the various effective sealing techniques of joints for water proofing?
4. Explain the acceleration of concrete hardening
5. Sketch the vacuum lifting pads
6. Employ the use of vacuum lifting pads
7. Design single span single storeyed frame
8. Discuss the detailing of slabs, beams and columns
Unit I
General Principles of Fabrication
Comparison with monolithic construction – Types of prefabrication – site and plant prefabrication - Economy of
prefabrication – Modular coordination – Standardization – Planning for Components of prefabricated structures –
Disuniting of structures – Design of simple rectangular beams and I beams – Handling and erection stresses –
Elimination of erection stresses – Beams, columns – Symmetrical frames
9 Hours
Unit II
Prefabricated Elements
Roof and floor panels, ribbed floor panels – wall panels – footings – Joints for different structural connections –
Effective sealing of joints for water proofing – Provisions for non-structural fastenings – Expansion joints in pre-
cast construction.
9 Hours
Unit III
Production Technology
Choice of production setup – Manufacturing methods – Stationary and mobile production – Planning of production
setup – Storage of precast elements – Dimensional tolerances – Acceleration of concrete hardening.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Hoisting Technology
Equipments for hoisting and erection – Techniques for erection of different types of members like Beams, Slabs,
Wall panels and Columns – Vacuum lifting pads.
9 Hours
Unit V
Applications
Designing and detailing of precast unit for factory structures – Purlins, Principal rafters, roof trusses, lattice girders,
gable frames – Single span single storeyed frames – Single storeyed buildings – slabs, beams and columns.
9 Hours
Textbook
1. L. Mokk, Prefabricated Concrete for Industrial and Public Structures, Publishing House of the Hungarian
Academy of Sciences, Budapest, 2007.
References
1. T. Koncz, Manual of Precast Concrete Construction, Vol. I, II, III & IV, Berlin, 1971
2. B. Lewicki, Building with Large Prefabricates, Elsevier Publishing Company, Amsterdam, London, New
York, 1998
3. Structural Design Manual, Precast Concrete Connection Details, Society for the Studies in the use of
Precast Concrete, Netherland Betor Verlag, 2009
11C027 CONTEMPORARY LANDSCAPES

3 0 0 3.0
Unit I
Introduction
Introduction to Landscape Architecture
3 Hours
Unit II
Designs
Contemporary designs- design, shape, and nourish greenscapes within existing ecosystems
6 Hours
Unit III
Features of Landscapes
Types of Gardens - Garden Designs - Paving - Retaining Walls - Decks & Pergolas - Water Features - Lighting
Systems - Irrigation Systems.
6 Hours
Unit IV
The Evolution of the Modern Landscape
Industrialization and urbanization – impacts and development of the concept of public open spaces, open space
development in new towns, parks movement. Open space development and its urban design and planning context,
Early industrial towns and the garden city movement. Public park as a major component of urban landscape, the
works of F.L.Ohmstead, and other pioneers. Open space development and Close conceptual relationship between
Town planning, urban design and landscape architecture. Examples.
15 Hours
Unit V
Modern Landscape Concepts
The Modern Movement, Contemporary Concepts And Concerns Changing concepts of space and the relationship of
architecture to landscape. Study of selected works of modern architects and landscape architects. Postwar
development in Europe. The influence of Ian Mcharg on Landscape architecture. The works of Jellicoe, Burle Marx
and others. Concept of sustainable landscape development, Cultural landscapes their definition, identification,
characteristics, policies, Artistic sensibility in landscape architecture and land art, New development in urban
Landscape design.
15 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Books and References
1. Geoffrey and Susan Jellico, The landscape of Man, Thames & Hudson Publication, 1995
2. Robert Holden, New landscape Design, Lawrence king publishing, UK, 2003
11C028 SUSTAINABLE LANDSCAPE AND GREEN BUILDING DESIGN DESIGNS

3 0 0 3.0
Unit I
Introduction
Attitudes to architecture: a historical perspective- General premises and strategies for sustainable and green design-
COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) and basis- Eco-mimicry as a design tool based on ecosystem analogytheoretical
basis for a sustainable and eco friendly design.
9 Hours
Unit II
Eco House
The form of the house: the building as an analogy- design from first principles: conserving energy; working with
climate: passive solar design; minimizing new resources; respect for users; respect for site and holism- photovoltaics
and solar hot water systems; water usage; small scale wind systems and hydro power; Case studies- Studio project
on design of eco houses: context specific.
9 Hours
Unit III
Environmental Impact of Building Materials
Measuring the impact of building materials- calculating embodied energy- recycling and embodied energy-
processing and embodied energy- time and embodied energy- embodied energy of different building materials- low
energy building and masonry materials- life cycle analysis- Case studies and analysis.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Green Construction and Environmental Quality
Sustainable architecture and Green Building: definition- Green building Evaluation Systems; LEED Certification;
Green Globe Certification; Case studies which look at the environmental approach- renewable energy- controlling
the water cycle- impact of materials on the environment – optimizing construction- site management- environmental
management of buildings
9 Hours
Unit V
Sustainable and Green Building Design Studio
This studio will explore collaborative learning to explore, investigate and apply various parameters of sustainability
for design development of projected building/ urban scenarios
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
1. Ken Yeang; Eco design - A Manual for Ecological design, Wiley- Academy; 2006
2. Thomas E Glavinich; Green Building Construction; Wiley; 2008
3. Brenda and Robert Vale; Green Architecture- Design for a Sustainable Future; Thames and Hudson; 1996
4. Daniel Vallero and Chris Brasier; Sustainable Design- The science of sustainability and Green Engineering;
Wiley; 2008
11CO29 ECOLOGICAL LANDSCAPE PLANNING

3 0 0 3.0
Unit I
Ecology
Understanding the ecosystem and their functioning –– components of ecosystem - natural process- Fundamentals of
ecology - Ecological processes and dynamics– understanding ecological concepts like population growth,
regulation, carrying capacity- colonization and succession - stability and resilience of ecosystem – ecosystem
degradation.
9 Hours
Unit II
Landscape Ecology
Introduction to landscape ecology – formation of various landforms – landforms and landscape process – pattern
and structure of landscapes– concepts of patch, corridor and matrix - landscape dynamics and function – topological
and chorological process within landscape - concept of landscape metrics – understanding dynamic interaction
between landscape structure and function – ecological services of landscape.
9 Hours
Unit III
Landscape Planning
Relationship between man and nature – analytical aspect of landscape - the natural and cultural setting - evolution
of landscape planning –concepts and projects of McHarg, Carl Steinite, Warren Manning, Augus Hills, Phil Lewis –
Izank Zonneveld, Ervin Zube - landscape planning models – METLAND concept
9 Hours
Unit IV
Process in Landscape Planning
The purpose of landscape planning – domain and context for landscape planning – principles of planning –
procedure in landscape planning - problem defining, goal setting, inventory and analysis - basic of collecting and
analyzing, projecting and presenting data in landscape planning, visual assessment and aesthetic dimension.–
Suitability analysis – techniques for identifying preferences - Planning options – proposing landscape plan.
9 Hours
Unit V
Case Studies: Landscape Planning
Reclamation and restoration of derelict landscapes - conservation and preservation of ecological fragile areas such as
wetlands, creeks etc. - conservation ordinances. Case studies on landscape regional planning - policies and
landscape.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
1. Richard T.T.Forman & Michel Godron , Landscape Ecology, John Wiley & Sons; 1986
2. Tom Turner, Landscape Planning and Environmental Impact Design, UCL Press, London, 1998.
3. Geoffrey and Susan Jellico, The landscape of Man, Thames & Hudson Publication, 1995
4. Robert Holden, New landscape Design, Lawrence king publishing, UK, 2003
5. Design for Human Ecosystems: Landscape, Land Use and Natural Resources, Van Nostrand Rheinhold
11CO30 LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION I

3 1 0 3.5
Unit I
Landscape Graphics
Symbols of representation of landscape elements in plan, elevation and section.
5 Hours
Unit II
Design of Landforms
Contours – representation of landforms and landform design, interpolation of contours, slope analysis, uses and
function.
Grading – symbols and abbreviations, basic grading exercises, grading alignment of paths/roads, angle of repose and
use of retaining walls.
15 Hours
Unit III
Earthwork Formation
Earth works – principles of earth work, cut and fill calculations – borrow pit method, average end area method,
average spot level method, precautions taken in cut and fill methods in relation to soil conditions, amount of
precipitation etc.,
12 Hours
Unit IV
Hard Landscapes
Design and detail of hard landscapes – Roads, paving, barriers, edge conditions – functions, types, criteria for
selection, design aspects, details.
12 Hours
Unit V
Outdoor Furniture
Criteria for the selection of materials and specifications for the street furniture in various environments. Design of
signage and simple outdoor structures like pavilions, gazebos etc., Use of waste materials in landscape, recycling
and reuse of materials, their impact on landscape design. Preparation of working drawings for hard landscaping and
services.
16 Hours
Total: 45 +15 Hours
LIST OF STUDIO WORKS
1. Simple site planning exercises - use of plant materials for defining and structuring the open spaces,
landscape treatment in relation to the buildings, understanding the aesthetic qualities of the plant materials
and their associations.
2. Campus landscape Design
3. Group Housing Design - specialized human landscapes at different situations
4. Park and Garden Design - Understanding the function and structuring of outdoor space would be the
underlying theme

1. Strom Steven, Site engineering for landscape Architects, John wiley and sons Inc.,2004.
2. Charles.W.Harris & Nicholas T. Dines, Time saver Standards for Landscape Architecture, Mc.
Graw Hill.
3. Jack E. Ingels, Landscaping – Principles & Practices , Pelmer Publishers Inc., 1992
4. Grant W Reid, Landscape Graphics, Watson – Guptill publication, New York, 1987.
5. David Sauter, Landscape Construction, Pelmer Thomson Learning, 2000.
6. Michael Little wood, Landscape Detailing Volume I -IV, Architectural Press, 1993.
7. Naoki Mukoda, Street furniture, Bijutsu shuppan – sha Ltd., 1990.
11C031 LANDSCAPE PLANTING DESIGN

3 0 0 3.0
Unit I
Introduction to Planting Design
Introduction to planting design. Plants as living materials, landscape architect‘s view of plants. Plants as structural,
functional and decorative elements. Structural characteristics of plants. Spatial functions of plants, ground level
planting, below knee height, knee to eye level, above eye level planting, tree planting.
9 Hours
Unit II
Creating Spaces with Plants
Experience of spaces, use of planting to manipulate spatial experience, elements of spatial composition – enclosure,
dynamics and focus. Plant associations. Plant communities, Designing with canopy layers – 3 layers, 2 layers and
single layer. Plants as a part of integral habitats.
9 Hours
Unit III
Visual Composition in Planting Design
Subjective and objective responses to plant material. A study on form, shape, colour, texture, growth characteristics
and suitability to different environments. Principles of visual composition- harmony and contrast, Balance,
Emphasis, Sequence, Scale, Unity and variety in planting design.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Planting Design for Habitat Creation
Planting strategies and species for various types of habitats – wooded areas, grassland and meadows, wetlands,
coastal edges, waterside and aquatic planting, slope retention, and plants for restoration of disturbed habitats.
9 Hours
Unit V
Applications in Practice
Study of local plant materials, their botanical, common and regional names, growth characteristics and application in
design. Visit to nurseries. Introduction to soft landscape working drawings, planting plans, specifications and
estimation.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
References:
1. Nick Robinson, The Planting Design Hand book, Gower Pub., 1998
2. Brian Hackett, Planting Design, McGraw hill, 1979.
3. Bose. T. K. and Choudhary, Tropical Garden Plants in Colour, Horticulture and Allied Publishers, 1991.
4. Iyengar Gopalaswamy, Complete Gardening in India, Gopalaswamy Partha sarathy, 1991.
5. M.S. Randhawa, Flowering trees of India, National Book Trust , India, 1983.
6. Design with Nature, by Ian McHarg
7. Landscape Graphics By Grant Reid
11C032 ADVANCED LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION II

3 1 0 3.5
Unit I
Outdoor Lighting
Definition of technical terms, types of electrical lighting, types of fixtures, auxiliary fixtures. Principles of design
for outdoor illumination, design and type of effects with electrical lighting. Safety precautions and drawbacks of
electrical lighting, electrical accessories and their installation. Solar energy and lighting.
12 Hours
Unit II
Play Area and Terrace Landscaping
Design of play areas -Totlots to play grounds. Design and detail of play equipments. Considerations, design and
detail for terrace landscaping, concept of green roof - intensive and extensive.
12 Hours
Unit III
Water Features
Design of water features such as swimming pools, cascades, fountains etc., and their technical requirements.
Consideration for design and detail. Water bodies and natural ponds. Design of irrigation system – landscape area
types, COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs) and design, water needs and sources, application, methods of installation.
Control systems, scheduling and maintenance.
12 Hours
Unit IV
Storm Water Management
Drainage – surface drainage, calculation of surface run off, design of surface and storm water drainage, design of
swales and gutters.
12 Hours
Unit V
Water Resources Planning
Water shed and their characteristics, urban storm water drainage systems, protection of natural water bodies, water
retention structures, water harvesting techniques and devices.
12 Hours
LIST OF STUDIO WORKS
1. The studio exercises involving urban context
2. Exercise on historical, industrial, Instutional and recreational landscape
3. Exercise on ecologically sustainable development
Books and References:
1. David Sauter, Landscape Construction, Pelmer Thomson Learning, 2000.

2. Michael Little wood, Landscape Detailing Volume I-IV, Architectural Press, 1993.
3. Roger Narboni, Lighting the Landscapes- Art Design technologies, Birkhauser, Switzerland, 2004.
4. Halpeth, T.Senthilkumar, G.Harikumar, Light Right, TERI, New Delhi, 2004.
5. Charles.W.Harris & Nicholas T. Dines, Time saver Standards for Landscape Architecture, Mc. Graw Hill.
11C033 LANDSCAPE PLANTING AND HORTICULTURAL PRACTICES

3 0 0 3.0
Unit I
Characteristics of Plant Materials
Classification of plant kingdom, rules of nomenclature and identification. Plant processes, water relation, mineral
nutrition, photosynthesis and respiration. Stem, root and leaf relationship, growth and flowering, response to stimuli
and modification. Plant multiplication and adaptation.
9 Hours
Unit II
Floristic Regions of India
Different floristic regions and forest types of India. Dominant, endemic, occasional, prevalent species in select
types.
9 Hours
Unit III
Plant Propagation
Nursery establishment and plant propagation. Establishment and maintenance of grass, shrubs and trees with respect
to ground preparation, planting and transplanting, protection of plants during and after planting.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Horticultural Practice
Plant nutrition and supplements. Fertilizers and Manures- types, methods of applications, advantages and
disadvantages. Common plant pests, diseases and their control, insecticides and their application, weed control.
Sustainable practices in pest management and weed control. Water budgeting .
9 Hours
Unit V
Landscape Maintenance
Maintenance methodology, maintenance economics and maintenance details for all soft landscape. Equipment for
landscape maintenance.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
1. Raunkier.C., the Life forms of Plants and statistical plant geography, 1934.
2. Venkateswaralu.V.A., Text book of Botany, Vol III, Guntur.
3. Lawrence.H.M., Taxonomy of vascular plants, Oxford, IBH, 1964.
4. Rao.K.N.R. and Krishnamurthy.K.N., Angiosperms, S.Viswanathan Printers and publishers.
5. G.S.Puri, Forest types of India.
11C034 URBAN LANDSCAPE DESIGN

3 0 0 3.0
Unit I
Introduction
City and pattern – hierarchy of streets and squares – spatial organization and land use – road net works and basic
services. Open spaces with in urban environment.
9 Hours
Unit II
Urban Spaces
Cultural, social and aesthetic value of urban spaces and its perception, Imageability, Townscape elements. Urban
space enhancement.
9 Hours
Unit III
Open Space System
Open space development in urban design context. Evolution of public park as a major component of urban
landscape. Open space development in new towns. Park systems, water fronts. Green infrastructure. Urban ecology,
urban water sheds.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Elements in Urban Landscape
Design of public parks, roads, green ways, parkways, promenade and plaza. Public art.
Plant selection criteria, furnishings and lighting of public space, maintenance and management of public spaces and
parks.
9 Hours
Unit V
Case Studies
Contemporary urban landscape issues. Case studies-Study, understanding and analysis of known examples at the
national and international levels.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
1. Garden Cullen, The concise Townscape, Architectural press, London.

2. Kevin Lynch, Image of City, Cambridge, MA, 1961.
3. Henry F. Arnold, Trees in Urban Design, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company.
4. Matthew Carmona, Tim Heath, Public places – Urban spaces, Architectural press, 2003.
5. Michael Hough, Cities and natural process, Routledge, 1995.
6. Donald Watson, Alan plattns, Roberta shibley, Time savers standards for urban design, McGraw hill, 2003.
7. Elements and total concept of urban landscape design, Graphic –sha publishing Co, 2001.
8. Tom turner, city as landscape, Eand FN spon, 1996.
9. Cliff Tandy, Handbook of urban Landscape, Architectural Press, 1970.
10. Landscape Architecture Design By D.K Ching
11O0PA NANO SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on nanoscience and technology.

 To create an awareness on the nanomaterials.
 At the end of the course the students are familiar with nanomaterials and their applications.
1. Making to learn properties of nanomaterials.

2. Study the different types of techniques used to develop the nanomaterials.
3. Understanding the various applications of nanomaterials in day-to-day life.
4. Utilization of nanomaterials into medical and industries to develop technology.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

S.No. Test I† Test II†
1 Remember 25 25 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define nanoscale.
2. Give the differences between nano and thin materials.
3. Give the usage of nanomaterials in medical field.
4. What are the techniques used to find properties of materials?
5. What are the day-to-day life applications of nanomaterials?
6. What do you mean by total energy of the system?
7. What do you mean by top down and bottom up approach?
8. How physical properties vary while converting the material into nano size?
9. What is SWCNT and MWCNT?
10. What are the applications of CNT?
11. Mention the general characterization techniques of nanomaterials.
12. How electron microscopy differ from scanning electron microscopy?
13. Define diffraction.
14. Write the different diffraction techniques to analyse the properties of nanomaterials.
15. What is meant by surface analysis of nanomaterials?
16. What are quantum dots?
17. Write the importance of self-assembly technique.
†
18. What is organic FET?

19. State the principle of LED.
20. Why nanomaterials are used as energy storage device?
21. Write the bio medical applications of nanomaterials.
22. List the advantages of nanomaterials as compared to bulk materials.
23. Which is having high efficiency among injection and quantum cascade laser?
24. Write the uses of FET.
25. What is nano magnet?
26. Mention the applications of nanomagnets in industries.
27. Write the advantages of nano robot in medical field.
UNDERSTAND
1. How the nano dimension particle varies with bulk one?

2. Explain the different classifications of nanostructures.
3. Elucidate the significance of MWCNT over SWCNT.
4. Explain structural, electrical, mechanical properties of nanoscale materials.
5. What are the applications of CNT?
6. Why the electrical properties are more important as compared to other properties of nanomaterials?
7. How nanomaterials are produced by machining process?
8. Give the importance of vapor phase deposition method for the production of nanomaterials.
9. Explain the sol-gel technique of nanomaterial production.
10. How the nanomaterials are analyzed in scanning electron microscopic technique?
11. Elucidate how nanomaterials are produced by template method?
12. List the general classifications of characterization methods of nanomaterials.
13. Explain how FTIR is used to analyze the bonding in nanomaterials?
14. Why the TEM is widely used than SEM? Explain.
15. What are the advantages and disadvantages of TEM?
16. Explain the quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures.
17. Explain the different fabrication techniques of nanoscale materials.
18. Explicate in which way thermally annealed quantum well technique is better than epitaxial growth
technique?
19. Explain the electro statically induced quantum dots and quantum wire technique.
20. Why semi conducting nano material is more important than other nanomaterials?
21. What are the advantages of nanomagnetic materials?
22. How nanomaterials are used in organic FET?
23. Why the organic LEDs are manufactured from nanomaterials?
24. How nanomaterials are used in quantum cascade laser?
25. Why nano photo voltaic fuel cells are used?
26. Explain the bio medical applications of nanodevices.
APPLY
1. Clarify the effects of nanometer length scale of particles.

2. Give the reason for the effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties.
3. Explain how the size of the particle will effect on their mechanical and structural properties of the material?
4. Why sol gel method is used widely to synthesis nanomaterials?
5. Templating method is better than physical vapor deposition method to synthesis nanomaterials. Why?
6. Why ordering of the nano system is more important? Give reason.
7. Explain how nanomaterials are characterized by imaging techniques?
8. Why diffraction techniques are used to characterize the nanomaterials?
9. Explain how nanomaterials are analyzed by transmission electron microscope?
10. Clarify the differences between self-assembly and self-organization.
11. Explain how organic light emitting diode overcomes the drawback of LCD?
12. How we can use CNT as a storage device in battery?
13. Why nanomaterials are used in optical memory devices?
14. How we can store nano particles?
ANALYZE/ EVALUATE
1. Distinguish between SWCNT and MWCNT.

2. Compare organic FET and organic LED.
3. Why nano structured particles are found in potential applications?
4. Give the relation between properties and applications of nano particles.
5. Explain with relevant example about the synthesize of nano structured materials employing self-assembly
and template based methods.
6. Analyze the relation between magnetic and nanomaterials.
Unit I
Nano Scale Materials
Introduction-classification of nanostructures, nanoscale architecture – effects of the nanometer length scale –
changes to the system total energy, changes to the system structures– effect of nanoscale dimensions on various
properties – structural, thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic, optical and electronic properties.
Differences between bulk and nanomaterials and their physical properties. 9 Hours
Unit II
Nanomaterials Synthesis Methods
Fabrication methods – top down processes – milling, litho graphics, machining process – bottom-up process – vapor
phase deposition methods, plasma-assisted deposition process, colloidal and solgel methods – methods for
templating the growth of nanomaterials – ordering of nanosystems, self-assembly and self-organization.
Magnetron sputtering process to obtain nanomaterials. 9 Hours
Unit III
Nano Characterization Techniques
General classification of characterization methods – analytical and imaging techniques – microscopy techniques -
electron microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, atomic force microscopy –
diffraction techniques – spectroscopy techniques-X-ray spectroscopy.
Electrical properties of nanomaterials. 9 Hours
Unit IV
Inorganic Semiconductor Nanostructures
Quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures - quantum wells, quantum wires, quantum dots, super
lattices– fabrication techniques – requirements, epitaxial growth, lithography and etching, electrostatically induced
dots and wires, quantum well width fluctuations, thermally annealed quantum wells and self-assembly techniques .
Quantum efficiency of semiconductor nanomaterials. 9 Hours
Unit V
Nanodevices and Applications
Organic FET- principle, description, requirements, integrated circuits- organic LED‘s – basic processes, carrier
injection, excitons, optimization - organic photovoltaic cells- carbon nano tubes- structure, synthesis and electronic
properties -applications- fuel cells- nano motors -bio nano particles-nano – objects.
Applications of nano materials in biological field. 9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Robert W. Kelsall, Ian W. Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John Wiley and
Sons Ltd, 2005.
2. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, McGraw – Hill
Education (India) Ltd, 2007.
3. Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology, Kluwer publishers, 2002.
4. B. Wang, Drug Delivery: Principles and Applications,Wiley Interscience 2005.
References
1. Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nanostructuring Techniques,

Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co.2004.
2. William Goddard, Donald .W.Brenner, Handbook of Nano Science Engineering and Technology, CRC
Press, 2004.
3. Bharat Bhushan, Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology, 2004.
4. Charles P.Poole, Frank J Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley and Sons, 2003.
5. Mark Ratner, Daniel Ratner, Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea, Prentice Hall,
2003.
11O0PB LASER TECHNOLOGY

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on laser principles.

 To create expertise on the applications of laser in various engineering fields.
 At the end of the course the students are familiar with generation and applications of laser in various
engineering fields.
1. Study the basic principle of laser and different types of lasers.

2. Analyze the function resonant cavity.
3. Describe the various techniques involved in the laser materials and determine the performance of laser
materials.
4. Determine the measurement of distance, length, velocity, acceleration, current, voltage and atmospheric
effect.
5. Design different types of lasers and apply in the medical field.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 25 25 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is a laser? How the basic laser action is achieved?

2. Distinguish between spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
3. What is population inversion?
4. Mention the important characteristics of laser.
5. How four level laser is more efficient than the three level laser?
6. What is a resonant cavity?
7. What role does an optical resonant cavity play in a laser?
8. What are the host materials for solid lasers?
9. Mention the different techniques involved in lasers.
10. Define atmospheric effect.
11. How will you measure the distance using laser?
12. What is the basic principle behind the holography?
†
13. Mention the medical applications of lasers.
UNDERSTAND
1. Write the conditions needed for laser action.

2. What is meant by pumping of atoms?
3. How optical excitation occurs in three level lasers?
4. What is the principle of laser action?
5. Compare the activator and host materials for solid lasers.
6. Distinguish between Czochralski and Kyropoulous techniques.
7. How will you determine the velocity of laser source?
8. List the applications of laser in welding and cutting.
9. Why laser is called as non-material knife?
APPLY
1. The first line of the principal series of sodium is the D line at 580 nm. This corresponds to a transition from
the first excited state (3p) to the ground state (3s). What is the energy in electron volts of the first excited
state?
2. What is the ratio of the stimulated emission and spontaneous emission at a temperature of 250 oC for the
sodium D line?
3. Calculate the threshold condition for the ruby laser in which the appropriate parameters are as follows: ν o
=4.3x 1014 Hz; Δνo=1.5x1011 Hz; no= 1.76; τsp= 4.3x10-3 s; τphoton=6x10-9s.
4. A He-Ne laser emits light at a wavelength of 632.8 nm and has an output power of 2.3mW. How many
photons are emitted in each minute by this laser when operating?
5. Calculate the wavelength of emission from a GaAs semiconductor laser whose band gap energy is
1.44 eV.
ANALYZE
1. Why laser beam should be monochromatic?

2. How the population inversion happening in lasers?
3. Write the reaction for excimer laser action.
4. Which method is used to achieve population inversion in a dye laser?
5. Why we cannot use ordinary light source for LIDAR?
6. How the optical disk data storage plays a vital role in computer memory storages?
EVALUATE
1. The life time of the excited state (2p) for spontaneous emission is 1.6x 10 -9s. The energy difference
between the excited state (2p) and the ground state (2s) is 10.2eV. Find the value of stimulated emission
coefficient during a transition from an excited state (2p) to the ground state.
2. A laser beam can be focused on an area equal to the square of its wavelength (λ2). For a He-Ne laser, λ =
6328Ǻ. If the laser radiates energy at the rate of 1mW, find the intensity of the focused beam.
3. Transition occurs between a metastable state E3 and an energy state E2 just above the ground state. If
emission is at 1.1μm and E2= 0.4x10-19J, find the energy of the E3 state.
Unit I
Laser Fundamentals
Introduction - principle - spontaneous emission - stimulated emission - population inversion-Pumping mechanisms -
characteristics. Types of lasers –principle, construction, working, energy level diagram and applications of dye laser
– chemical laser – excimer laser.
Laser action. 9 Hours
Unit II
Threshold Condition
Einstein coefficients A and B – spontaneous life time – light amplification – principle of laser action – laser
oscillations – resonant cavity – modes of a laser.
Conditions involved in laser production. 9 Hours
Unit III
Laser Materials
Activator and host materials for solid lasers - growth techniques for solid laser materials - Bridgman and Stock-
Berger technique – advantages and disadvantages - Czochralski and Kyropoulous techniques – merits and demerits.
Techniques of producing laser. 9 Hours
Unit IV
Laser in Science
Introduction – harmonic generation – stimulated Raman emission – self focusing – laser and ether drift – rotation of
the earth – photon statistics.
Applications of Laser in ranging. 9 Hours
Unit V
Laser in Industry
Introduction – Applications in material processing: laser welding – hole drilling – laser cutting – laser tracking –
Lidar – laser in medicine.
Applications of Laser in sensors. 9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. K.Thiyagarajan and A.K.Ghatak, LASER:Theory and applications. Macmillan India Limited, 2000.
2. M. N. Avadhanulu, An Introduction To Lasers Theory And Applications, S. Chand Publisher, 2001.
References
1. K.P.R.Nair, Atoms, Molecules and Lasers, Narosa Publishing House, 2009.

2. K. R. Nambiar, Lasers: Principles Types And Applications, New Age International Publications, 2006.
3. Alphan Sennaroglu, Solid-State Lasers and Applications, CRC Press, 2006
11O0PC ELECTRO OPTIC MATERIALS
3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on electro-optic materials.

 To develop fundamental understanding of various electro-optic materials in communication.
1. Understanding the mechanism involved in the laser action.

2. Knowing the birefringence and optical property of the material.
3. Implementing the above phenomenon for modulators.
4. Realize the special optical properties of the system.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 25 25 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define laser action.

2. Give the properties of LASER.
3. Differentiate between stimulated and spontaneous emissions.
4. Define continuous and discrete time signals.
5. Define anisotropic media.
6. What is an acoustic optic effect?
7. Define a liquid crystal.
8. Mention the different types of polarizing devices.
9. Give examples for direct and indirect band gap materials.
10. Highlight the usage of a NLO material.
UNDERSTAND
1. How the population inversion state in laser is achieved?

2. Give examples for continuous and discrete time signals.
3. Elucidate the importance of coherence in laser action.
†
4. Why birefringence property in an optical material is formed?

5. In which effect KDP crystal is working?
6. How the co-directional coupling occurs?
7. List out the conditions in which the NLO property of a material emerges.
8. What is the purpose of switching to quantum mechanics from classical mechanics?
9. Why we prefer LCD displays rather than CRT displays?
10. What are the advantages of injection laser diode?
APPLY
1. Find the intensity of a laser beam of 10mW power and having a diameter of 1.3 mm. Assume the intensity
to be uniform across the beam. Given: P=10mW, d= 1.3 mm.
2. Discuss the three level pumping scheme for laser action.
3. Why is the optical resonator required in lasers?
4. Where can we find the practical applications of wave plates?
5. How to elevate the contrast ratio in display devices which uses in the nematic structures?
6. Non linearity in glasses occurs. Justify the argument.
ANALYZE/ EVALUATE
1. Compare ordinary and laser light properties.

2. Differentiate wave refractive index and ray refractive index.
3. Differentiate longitudinal and transverse electro optic effects.
4. Bring out the importance of electro optic devices.
Unit I
Basics of Lasers
Introduction – Einstein coefficients – laser beam characteristics – spontaneous and stimulated emission population
inversion - light amplification – threshold condition – laser rate equations – two level laser – three level laser –
mode selection – transverse mode – longitudinal mode.
Spatial and temporal coherence.
9 Hours
Unit II
Wave Propagation in Anisotropic Media
Introduction – double refraction – polarization devices - Nicol prism – Glan-Thomson prism – retardation plates –
Soleil Babinet compensator – Plane waves in anisotropic media – wave refractive index - ray refractive index - ray
velocity surface – index ellipsoid.
Optical activity.
9 Hours
Unit III
Electro Optic Effect
Introduction – KDP crystals – longitudinal mode – phase modulation – amplitude modulation – transverse mode.
Acousto-optic effect – small Bragg angle diffraction – large Bragg angle diffraction – codirectional coupling –
contradirectional coupling - applications.
Modulators.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Non Linear Optics
Introduction – self focusing phenomenon – second harmonic generation – phase matching – birefringent phase
matching – quasi phase matching – frequency mixing. Semiconductors – measurement of third order optical non-
linearities in semiconductors.
Frequency doubling nature of materials.
9 Hours
Unit V
Electro Optic Devices
Introduction – light emitting diode – direct and indirect band gap materials – homo junction – hetero junction –
advantages – disadvantages – applications. Injection laser diode – characteristics – advantages – disadvantages.
Liquid crystal displays – dynamic scattering – field effect – advantages – disadvantages.
Optoelectronic devices.
9 Hours
Total 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Ajoy Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, Optical electronics, Cambridge University Press, 7th reprint 2006.
2. B. Somanathan Nair, Electronic devices and applications, Prentice - Hall of India private limited, 2010.
3. Frank L. Pedrotti, S. J. Leno S. Pedrotti and Leno M. Pedrotti, Introduction to optics, Pearson Prentice
Hall, 2008.
References
1. Ji - ping Huang and K.M.Yu, New Non Linear Optical Materials, Nova, Science Publishers, 2007.
2. S.C. Gupta, Opto electronic devices and systems, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt. Ltd, 2005
11O0PD VACUUM SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart a sound knowledge on the vacuum science.

 To develop the necessary background to perform projects involving vacuum and deposition techniques.
1. Understanding the fundamentals of vacuum technology.

2. Understanding the various measuring instruments of vacuum.
3. Utilization of various components to create high vacuum.
4. Utilization of various components to measure the vacuum
5. Solution for the problems connected with high vacuum.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 25 25 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define the term mean free path.

2. Give the pressure ranges of low and medium vacuum.
3. State Avogadro‘s law.
4. List out the assumptions of kinetic theory.
5. What are the types of pump used to create vacuum?
6. What are the gauges that are used to measure the vacuum?
7. Name the direct reading gauges and indirect reading gauges.
8. Name the operation limits of penning gauge.
9. Name the ultra high vacuum gauges.
10. List out the methods of leak detection.
11. Give the importance of baffles and traps.
12. Mention the gauges that can measure ultra high vacuum.
13. Define throughput.
14. Give the Ohm‘s law of vacuum technology.
15. Name the sorbent materials that have widespread use in vacuum production.
†
UNDERSTAND
1. How will you measure the pumping speed in a vacuum unit?

2. How will you seal the substance outside to maintain high vacuum?
3. Why does constant volume method have the disadvantage in measuring the pumping speed?
4. Differentiate between the pirani gauge and penning gauge.
5. Differentiate the primary gauges from secondary gauges.
6. How is the pumping speed measured?
7. How does a rotary pump produce a low pressure?
8. Derive the relation between the effective pumping speed and conductance of the evacuation pipe.
9. Explain the designing of UHV evacuation systems.
10. How are the vacuum surfaces cleaned?
APPLY
1. How will you deposit the material from the plasma etching method?
2. Why is cold cathode ionization gauges preferred to hot cathode gauges?
3. Explain the applications of turbomolecular pump.
4. A vacuum chamber has a volume of 100 litres and an operating gas load of 7.5 x 10 -5 torr-lites/sec. The
desired operating pressure is 7.5 x 10 -8 Torr. Connections between the chamber and diffusion pump and
the diffusion pump and rotary pump are to meet good design practice (assume SE/SD=1/5). Calculate the
pumping speed at the chamber, the minimum connecting pipe conductance and the minimum speed
required for the backing pump together with the minimum diffusion pump speed required to meet these
requirements.
5. Surface to volume ratio plays a major role in pumping systems. Why?
ANALYZE/ EVALUATE
1. Why is the diffusion pump widely used in scientific instruments?

2. Oil diffusion pump system can be used as a high vacuum pumping system. Why?
3. Compare real and virtual leaks.
Unit I
Vacuum Systems
Introduction – units of vacuum – kinetic aspects of gases in a vacuum chamber – physical parameters at low
pressures – classification of vacuum ranges – gas flow at low pressures – throughput and pumping speed –
flow rate and conductance.
Evacuation rate – out gassing – gas flow – turbulent flow. 9 Hours
Unit II
Production of Vacuum
Classification of vacuum pumps – rotary vane pumps – roots blowers – diffusion pumps – molecular drag and turbo-
molecular pumps – sorption pumps – gettering and ion pumping – cryopumping measurement of pumping speed.
Noble pumps for inert gases. 9 Hours
Unit III
Pressure Measurement
Classification of gauges – mechanical gauges – McLeod gauge – thermal conductivity gauges – Hot cathode
ionization gauges – Bayard - Alpert gauge – cold cathode ionization gauges – Penning gauge – magnetron gauge.
Measurement problems in partial pressure analysis. 9 Hours
Unit IV
Vacuum Materials and Leak Detection
Sources of gases and vapours – materials for vacuum system – vacuum seals – vacuum valves – traps and baffles –
leak detection – pressure test – spark-coil test – leak testing using vacuum gauges – halogen leak detector – mass-
spectrometric leak detector.
Special design considerations – glass to metal seals – high voltage metal feedthrough. 9 Hours
Unit V
Applications of Vacuum Systems
Design considerations – vacuum system for surface analysis – space simulators – vacuum based coating units for
thin film deposition – thermal evaporation – sputtering process – chemical vapor deposition - metallurgical
applications.
Plasma etching – pulsed vapour deposition – PE chemical vapour deposition. 9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Rao V.V, Ghosh T.B, Chopra K.L, Vacuum science and technology, Allied Publishers Limited, 2005.
2. Dorothy M. Hoffman, John H. Thomas, Bawa Singh, Handbook of Vacuum science and technology,
Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 1997.
References
1. David M. Hata, Introduction to vacuum technology, Pearson Printice Hall, 2007.

2. John F. O'Hanlon, A user’s guide to vacuum technology, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.
3. Chambers.A, Modern vacuum physic, Chapman & Hall, CRC Press, 2005.
11O0PE SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS AND DEVICES
3 0 0 3.0
 To improve knowledge on semiconducting materials.

 To develop the necessary understanding of semiconducting materials and their applications.

1. Understanding the mechanism involved in the semiconductors.
2. Knowing the current components and current gain of the material.
3. Implementing the above phenomenon for transistors.
4. Realize the special properties of the semiconductors.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 25 25 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What properties are desirable in semiconductors?

2. Explain the Kronig-Penny model.
3. Define drift current density.
4. What is meant by breakdown?
5. Explain the minority carrier distribution in p-n junction diode.
6. Define temperature effect.
7. What is the basic principle of bipolar junction transistor?
8. Define current crowding.
9. What are optoelectronic devices?
10. Describe the operation of a laser diode.
UNDERSTAND
1. How does conductivity of a semiconductor change with rise in its temperature?

2. How does the thickness of the depletion layer in a p-n junction vary with increase in reverse bias?
3. How does the energy gap in an intrinsic semiconductor vary, when doped with a pentavalent impurity?
4. Explain the mobility effects on carrier density.
†
5. What do you understand by the term ―holes‖ in a semiconductor? Explain how they move under the
influence of electric field.
6. What is the a.c response of the p-n diode?
7. How is the solar cell functioning?
APPLY
1. In general what is the relation between density of states and energy?

2. What is meant by the term, doping of an intrinsic semiconductor?
3. Give the ratio of the number of holes and the number of conduction electrons in an intrinsic semiconductor.
4. Write the function of base region of a bipolar junction transistor.
5. Sketch the energy bands of a forward-biased degenerately doped pn junction and indicate how population
inversion occurs.
ANALYZE/ EVALUATE
1. What types of charge-carriers are there in a n-type semiconductor?

2. What are the disadvantages of using laser diode?
3. What are the defect levels in semiconductors?
4. Consider an optical cavity. If N>>1, show that the wavelength separation between two adjacent resonant
modes is ∆λ=λ2/2L.
Unit I
Properties of Semiconductor
Energy bands – allowed and forbidden energy bands – Kronig Penny model – electrical conductivity in solids based
on energy bands - band model – electron effective mass – concept of holes in semiconductor – density of states –
extension to semiconductors.
k-space diagram 9 Hours
Unit II
Carrier Transport Properties
Carrier drift – drift current density – mobility effects on carrier density – conductivity in semiconductor – carrier
transport by diffusion – diffusion current density – total current density – breakdown phenomena – avalanche
breakdown.
Graded Impurity Distribution 9 Hours
Unit III
P-N Junction Diode
Qualitative description of charge flow in p-n junction – boundary condition – minority carrier distribution – ideal
p-n junction current – temperature effects – applications – the turn on transient and turn off transient.
Charge storage and diode Transients 9 Hours
Unit IV
Bipolar Junction Transistor
Introduction to basic principle of operation – the modes of operation – amplification – minority carrier distribution
in forward active mode – non-ideal effects – base with modulation – high injection emitter band gap narrowing –
current clouding – breakdown voltage – voltage in open emitter configuration and open base configuration
Frequency Limitations 9 Hours
Unit V
Opto Electronic Devices
Optical absorption in a semiconductor, photon absorption coefficient – electron hole pair generation - solar cell –
homo junction and hetero junction - Photo transistor – laser diode, the optical cavity, optical absorption, loss and
gain - threshold current.
Photoluminescence and Electroluminescence 9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Donald A Neamen, Semiconductor physics and devices, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
2. Albert Malvino,David J Bafes, Electronic Principles, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
References
1. M.S. Tyagi, Introduction to Semiconductor materials and devices, John Wiley and sons, 2008.
2. S.M. Sze & K.Ng. Kwok, Physics of semiconductor devices, John Wiley and sons, 2008.
3. M. K. Achuthanand and K.N. Bhat, Fundamentals of semiconductor devices, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
11O0YA POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND PROCESSING

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of polymer science, chemistry of polymers and
its processing.
 To make understand the principles and applications of advanced polymer materials.
 Knowledge and application of different polymers and its processing.
1. Understanding the various types of polymers and its industrial application.

2. Compute the efficiency of polymer materials.
3. Development of eco-friendly materials.
4. Realize the advantages of nanocomposites polymers.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 10 10
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define polymer and degree of polymerization.

2. What is functionality of a polymer? Give example.
3. What is the nomenclature of a polymer?
4. Discuss the addition and chain growth polymerization with example.
5. What is copolymerization? What are the different types of copolymers?
6. Write the mechanism of addition polymerization.
7. Explain briefly the various constituents of a plastic, with example.
8. Distinguish between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics.
9. List the various additives in processing of plastics. What are their functions?
10. Explain homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization.
11. Write the differences between melt and interfacial polycondensation.
12. Briefly explain about emulsion polymerization.
13. Explain compression and extrusion moulding of plastics with diagram.
14. What is extrusion and injection moulding? Discuss with diagram.
15. Name any four compounding ingredients of plastics. Write their functions with example.
†
16. What is calendaring?

17. Write short account on reinforced plastics.
18. Outline the method of lubrication of plastic material.
19. Explain about crosslinking and blowing agents with examples.
20. Write an account of flame retardant polymers.
21. Write short notes on melt, dry and wet spinning process.
22. Give the classification of foaming polymers with examples.
23. Explain with examples the relationship between structure and properties of polymers.
24. Describe about coordination and ring opening polymerization.
UNDERSTAND
1. Write the important of plasticizers and UV stabilizers?

2. Compare addition and condensation polymerization reaction with example for each type .
3. Give the classification of foaming polymers with examples.
4. Suggest different types of additives for preparing reinforced polymers?
5. What are the different types of polymeric resins?
6. Give the significances of antioxidants and antiozonants additives.
7. What are the functions of ingredients of polymers?
8. List the importance of cross- linkers.
APPLY
1. How polymers are classified based on source and application?

2. What are the polymers that can be calendared into sheets?
3. Give examples for thermosetting and thermoplastic polymers.
4. What are the polymers suited for compression and injection moulding?
5. What are the articles produced by blow moulding?
ANALYZE / EVALUATE
1. What are the polymers suitable for insulations?

2. Write the special properties of teflon?
3. How the vinyl chloride is converted into polymer?
4. How nylon 6 is prepared?
5. What is the process involved in manufacturing cellophane sheets?
6. What are the different zones involved in simple extrusion polymer process?
7. Bring out the differences between thermoforming and vacuum-forming process?
Unit I
Principles of Polymer Science
Polymerization reactions - types – examples - degree of polymerization and average molecular weights.
Thermoplastics and thermosetting resins - examples. Electrical - mechanical - thermal properties related to chemical
structure. Insulating materials - polymer alloys - composites.
Importance of glass transition temperature.
9 Hours
Unit II
Polymerization Mechanism
Addition polymerization - free radical mechanism - cationic and anionic polymerization - copolymerization -
condensation polymerization –nylon 6,6, ring opening polymerization –nylon 6, coordination polymerization -.
Preparation, properties and industrial applications of polystyrene and bakelite.
Application of industrial polymers.
9 Hours
Unit III
Polymerization Techniques
Homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization – bulk polymerization- PMMA,PVC, solution polymerization -
polyacrylic acid, suspension polymerization-preparation of ion exchange resins, emulsion polymerization-synthetic
rubber. Melt solution and interfacial polycondensation. Salient features, advantages and disadvantages of bulk and
emulsion polymerization.
Preparation of biodegradable polymers.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Additives for Polymers
Moulding constituents-fillers, plasticizers, lubricants, anti-aging additives, antioxidants, antiozonants, UV
stabilizers, flame retardants, colorants, blow agents, crosslinking agents -functions-significance with suitable
examples and applications in industrial processing.
Ecofriendly sustainable additives.
9 Hours
Unit V
Polymer Processing
Compression – injection - extrusion and blow mouldings. Film casting - calendering. Thermoforming and vacuum
formed polystyrene, foamed polyurethanes. Fibre spinning - melt, dry and wet spinning. Composite fabrication -
hand-layup - filament winding and pultrusion.
Application of fibre reinforced plastics.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. V. R. Gowarikar, N. V. Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New Age International (P)
Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
2. Joel R. Fried, Polymer Science and Technology, Prentice Hall of India (P). Ltd., 2005.
References
1. F. W. Billmeyer, Text Book of Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2007.
2. Barbara H. Stuart, Polymer Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2002.
3. George Odian , Principles of Polymerization, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2004.
4. R. J. Young and P. A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, Nelson Thornes Ltd., 2002.
11O0YB ENERGY STORING DEVICES AND FUEL CELLS

3 0 0 3.0
 To make students understand the concept and working of different types of batteries and to analyze
batteries used in electric vehicles.
 To make students learn about the concept of fuel cells, its types and to relate the factors of energy and
environment.
 Students develop the skill of analyzing various energy storing devices and fuel cells at the end of the
semester.
1. Understanding the various types of cells and energy storage devices.

2. Compute the efficiency of cells.
3. Development of eco-friendly energy sources.
4. Realize the advantages of energy storage and fuel cells.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 10 10
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are dry cells?

2. What are alkaline batteries?
3. State Ohms law.
4. Write the functions of ultra-capacitor.
5. Is lead acid battery thermodynamically reversible cell?
6. Differentiate between electrochemical and electrolytic cells.
7. Name the electrolyte present in the Li battery.
8. Mention the role of heart pacemaker in cardiology.
9. Classify the types of fuel cell.
10. Differentiate between diode and electrode.
11. What is meant by redox reaction?
12. What are the advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell?
†
13. Name the factors which are affecting the efficiency of fuel cell.
14. What are eco-friendly cell?
UNDERSTAND
1. How do you assess the life cycle of fuel cells?

2. What is the role of impurities in photovoltaic cells?
3. How do you convert the chemical energy into electrical energy?
4. Suggest any two secondary storage devices for automobiles.
5. What types of cells are used in space applications?
6. Construct the alkaline fuel cell.
7. How do you harvest the energy from tides?
8. What are natural geysers?
9. Differentiate between photo electrochemical and photovoltaic cells.
APPLY
1. What are passive solar heat collectors?

2. What are active solar heat collectors?
3. Lithium battery is the cell of future - Justify.
4. Write the anodic reaction and cathodic reactions of NICAD battery.
5. Is the dry cell follows thermodynamic reversibility rule?
6. What types of vehicles typically use methanol?
7. What are the economic impacts of using hybrid electric vehicles?
ANALYZE / EVALUATE
1. How does a fuel cell differ from traditional methods of energy generation (like batteries)?
2. What are the feedstocks can be used to make biodiesel?
3. What is DuPont‘s experience in fuel cells?
4. How the biomass is converted into biofuel?
5. What are the effects of gasoline and ethanol emissions on the environment?
6. What are the effects of diesel and biodiesel emissions on the environment?
7. How do you obtain ethanol from lignocellulosic biomass?
8. What is meant by green technology?
Unit I
Batteries
Characteristics - voltage, current, capacity, electricity storage density, power, discharge rate, cycle life, energy
efficiency, shelf life. Primary batteries- zinc-carbon, magnesium, alkaline, manganous dioxide, mercuric oxide,
silver oxide batteries-Recycling/Safe disposal of used cells.
Document the various batteries and its characteristics used in mobile phones and lap tops.
9 Hours
Unit II
Batteries for Electric Vehicles
Secondary batteries- Introduction, cell reactions, cell representations and applications- lead acid, nickel-cadmium
and lithium ion batteries - rechargeable zinc alkaline battery. Reserve batteries: Zinc-silver oxide, lithium anode cell,
photogalvanic cells. Battery specifications for cars and automobiles.
Development of batteries for satellites.
9 Hours
Unit III
Types of Fuel Cells
Importance and classification of fuel cells - description, working principle, components, applications and
environmental aspects of the following types of fuel cells: alkaline fuel cells, phosphoric acid, solid oxide, molten
carbonate and direct methanol fuel cells.
Fuel cells for space applications.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Hydrogen as a Fuel
Sources of hydrogen – production of hydrogen- electrolysis- photocatalytic water splitting – biomass pyrolysis -gas
clean up – methods of hydrogen storage- high pressurized gas -liquid hydrogen type -metal hydride – hydrogen as
engine fuel – features, application of hydrogen technologies in the future- limitations.
Cryogenic fuels.
9 Hours
Unit V
Energy and Environment
Future prospects-renewable energy and efficiency of renewable fuels – economy of hydrogen energy – life cycle
assessment of fuel cell systems. Solar Cells: Energy conversion devices, photovoltaic and photoelectrochemical
cells – photobiochemical conversion cell.
Bio-fuels from natural resources.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. M. Aulice Scibioh and B. Viswanathan, Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications, University Press, India,
2006.
2. F. Barbir, PEM fuel cells: Theory and practice,Elsevier, Burlington, MA, 2005.
3. M. R. Dell Ronald and A. J. David, Understanding Batteries, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2001.
References
1. M. A. Christopher Brett, Electrochemistry: Principles, Methods and Applications, Oxford University, 2004.
2. J. S. Newman and K. E. Thomas-Alyea, Electrochemical Systems, Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, 2004.
3. G. Hoogers, Fuel Cell Handbook, CRC, Boca Raton, FL, 2003.
4. Lindon David, Handbook of Batteries, McGraw Hill, 2002.
5. H. A. Kiehne , Battery Technology Hand Book,. Expert Verlag , Renningen Malsheim, 2003.
11O0YC CHEMISTRY OF NANOMATERIALS
3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of nanochemistry including synthesis.
 To make students understand the principles and applications of nanomaterials.
 Knowledge about the characterization and applications of nanomaterials.

1. Understanding the various methods of synthesis and characterization techniques of nanomaterials.
2. Compute new preparation methodologies.
3. Utilization of nanomaterials in various emerging fields.
4. Realize the importance of nanoscience and its applications in day to day life.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 25 25 15 15
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What do you mean by nano?

2. Define nanotechnology.
3. Define nanoscience.
4. Define top down and bottom up approach.
5. Define nanostructured material. Classify nanomaterials and give examples for them.
6. List any four day to day commercial applications of nanotechnology.
7. Write down any four challenges that are faced by researchers in nanotechnology.
8. Define carbon nanotube.
9. Define bucky ball.
10. Define nanocomposite. What are the types of nanocomposites?
11. List any four material characterization techniques.
12. List any four bottom up approaches for the synthesis of nanopowders.
13. What is biomimetic approach?
14. Explain Feynman‘s statement.
15. What is the dimension of quantum dot?
16. Explain the principle behind lithography.
17. Mention the different types of lithography.
18. What is meant by photolithography?
19. Explain the principle behind vapour phase deposition.
†
20. What is meant by chemical vapour deposition?

21. Explain sputtering.
22. What is meant by plasma enhanced CVD?
23. What is meant by bubblers?
24. Explain the principle behind MOVPE.
25. What are colloids?
26. What is nanosafety?
27. What is meant by surface induced effect?
28. How are nanomaterials defined?
29. What are the uses of nanoparticles in consumer products?
UNDERSTAND
1. What is the difference between nanoscience and nanotechnology?

2. When and where Feynman delivered his lecture on nanotechnology and what is the name of his classical
lecture?
3. What are the induced effects due to increase in surface area of nanoparticles?
4. What are the advantages and disadvantages in mechanical synthesis of nanopowders?
5. What are the characteristics of nanoparticles that should be possesed by any fabrication technique?
6. On what principle mechanical milling is based on?
7. How is LPE used to obtain nanowire or nanorods?
8. How is the template used to obtain nanowire or nanorods?
9. What is the role of nanotechnology in water purification?
10. Differentiate self-assembly from self-organisation.
11. How nanoparticles are stored?
12. List the important physical and chemical properties of nanomaterials?
13. How are nanomaterials detected and analysed?
14. How are nanomaterials prepared for biological testing?
15. What are the physical and chemical properties of nanoparticles?
16. How are nanoparticles formed?
17. Discuss the health effects of nanoparticles?
APPLY
1. Why do we want nanotechnology in our life?

2. What is the role of nanotechnology in medicinal field?
3. Expand AFM.
4. What is the grain size range of nanostructure materials?
5. Differentiate top-down from bottom-up approach needed for nanosynthesis.
6. Why do nanostructured particles find potential applications?
7. How nanostructured particles are used in health applications?
ANALYZE/ EVALUATE
1. Compare the relative merits of chemical, physical, biological and hybrid methods for the preparation of
nanomaterials.
2. Compare the relative merits of the usage of photons and particles in lithography.
3. Differentiate glow discharge from RF sputtering.
4. How can we reduce/save our energy resources by using nanotechnology?
5. What is the relation between properties and applications of nanoparticles?
6. What is the current status of nanoscience and nanotechnology?
7. What are the potential harmful effects of nanoparticles?
Unit I
Nanoworld
Introduction – History of nanomaterials – concepts of nanomaterials – size and confinement effects – nanoscience –
nanotechnology – Moor‘s law. Properties – electronic, optical, magnetic, thermal, mechanical and electrochemical
properties. Nanobiotechnology – molecular motors – optical tweezers.
First industrial revolution to the nano revolution.

9 Hours
Unit II
Synthesis of Nanoparticles
Introduction – hydrolysis-oxidation - thermolysis – metathesis - solvothermal methods. Sonochemistry: nanometals -
powders of metallic nanoparticles - metallic colloids and alloys - polymer metal composites - metallic oxides - rare
earth oxides - mesoporous materials - mixed oxides. Sono electrochemistry - nanocrystalline materials. Microwave
heating - microwave synthesis of nanometallic particles.
Magnetron sputtering process to obtain nanomaterials.
9 Hours
Unit III
Types and Functionalization of Nanomaterials
Polymer nanoparticles, micro, meso and nanoporous materials. Organic – inorganic hybrids, zeolites,
nanocomposites, self-assembled monolayers, semiconductor quantum dots, nanofibres, supramolecular
nanostructures. functionalization of nanomaterials – stabilization methods. Reactivity of ω-functional groups on
ligand shells.
Implications of nanoscience and nanotechnology on society.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Physical and Chemical Characterization
Electron microscopes: scanning electron microscope (SEM) – transmission electron microscope (TEM) – atomic
force microscope (AFM): working principle – instrumentation – applications. UV-visible spectroscopy: principle –
instrumentation (block diagram only) – applications. FT-IR spectroscopy: introduction – instrumentation (block
diagram only) – applications –merits and demerits.
Nanoscience and technology research institution.
9 Hours
Unit V
Applications of Nanomaterials
Nanocatalysis, colorants and pigments, self-cleaning – lotus effect, anti-reflective coatings, antibacterial coatings,
photocatalysis, nanofilters for air and water purifiers. Thermal insulation – aerogels, smart sunglasses and
transparent conducting oxides – molecular sieves – nanosponges.
Harnessing nanotechnology for economic and social development.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. C N R Rao, Nanoworld – An Introduction to Nanoscience and Technology, Jawaharlal Nehru centre for
advanced scientific research, Bangalore, India, 2010.
2. C N R Rao, A Muller and A K Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
Applications, Vol. 1 & 2, John-Wiley and Sons, 2005.
3. T Pradeep, Nano: The Essentials, Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, 1st Edn., Tata Mcgraw
Hill publishing company, 2007.
References
1. Geoffrey A Ozin, André C Arsenault, Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials, Royal

Society of Chemistry, 2009.
2. G B Sergeev, Nanochemistry, 1st Edn.,Elsevier, 2006.
3. S Chen, Functional Nanomaterials: A Chemistry and Engineering Perspective (Nanostructure Science and
Technology), Springer, 2010.
4. Yury Gogotsi, Nanomaterials Handbook, Taylor and Francis group, USA, 2006.
11O0YD CORROSION SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0
 To impart knowledge about the various types of corrosion and its mechanism.
 To make students understand the various methods of corrosion control, corrosion testing and monitoring.
 Students acquire the basic knowledge about corrosion and its control.
1. Understand why corrosion related problems are complex and interrelated in the engineering field.
2. Compare the mechanism of dry corrosion and electrochemical corrosion to support corrosion minimizing
techniques in metals and its alloys.
3. Characterize and analyze different forms of corrosion and its study techniques.
4. Classify and understand about the relationship between corrosion and its environment.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 25 25 15 15
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is corrosion?
2. What are the types of corrosion?
3. Define dry corrosion. Explain the mechanism.
4. Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion.
5. What are the units to measure corrosion rate?
6. Galvanic corrosion. Discuss.
7. Describe the Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their limitations.
8. List out the different forms of corrosion. Explain.
9. What are inhibitors?
10. Explain the mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation and its types.
11. Write the working principle of Tafel polarization techniques.
12. How polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion products?
13. Define cathodic protection. List its types.
14. What are non-electrochemical and electrochemical methods of corrosion testing and monitoring?
15. What is Tafel linear polarization?
†
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain why corrosion rate of metal is faster in aqueous solution than atmosphere air?
2. What are the factors influencing the corrosion rate? Explain.
3. Discuss the Pilling-Bedworth rule.
4. Differentiate between electrochemical and dry corrosion.
5. How inhibitors are used to protect the corrosion rate of the metal? Explain.
6. What are consequences of Pilling-Bedworth ratio?
7. List the difference between filliform corrosion and pitting corrosion.
APPLY
1. Compare the effects of corrosion products.

2. Why pitting corrosion is localized corrosion? Explain.
3. Describe alternatives to protective coatings.
4. Identify different forms of corrosion in the metal surface.
5. Explain how we could reduce corrosion of metals.
6. What are the measures to be taken to reduce corrosion fatiques?
7. What are the major implications of enhanced techniques of corrosion product analysis?
ANALYZE/ EVALUATE
1. List reasons why it is important to study of corrosion.

2. How Tafel polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion products?
3. Explain how we could reduce corrosion of metals?
Unit I
Introduction to Corrosion
Importance and cost of corrosion – spontaneity of corrosion – passivation - importance of corrosion prevention in
various industries - the direct and indirect loss of corrosion- galvanic corrosion: area relationship in both active and
passive states of metals - Pilling Bed worth ratio and its consequences - units of corrosion rate - mdd and mpy -
importance of pitting factor - Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their advantages and disadvantages .
Corrosion of metals by other gases.
9 Hours
Unit II
Forms of Corrosion
Different forms of corrosion - uniform corrosion-galvanic corrosion, crevice corrosion, pitting corrosion,
intergranular corrosion, selective leaching, erosion corrosion, stress corrosion- high temperature oxidation, kinetics
of protective film formation and catastrophic oxidation corrosion.
Industrial boiler corrosion, cathodic and anodic inhibitors
9 Hours
Unit III
Mechanisms of Corrosion
Hydrogen embrittlement- cracking, corrosion fatigue - filliform corrosion, fretting damage and microbes induced
corrosion. Mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation - thick layer and thin layer - insitu corrosion scale
analysis.
Analyze the rust formation in mild steel using weight loss method
9 Hours
Unit IV
Cathodic and Anodic Protection Engineering
Fundamentals of cathodic protection - types of cathodic protection systems and anodes. Life time calculations -
rectifier selection. Stray current corrosion problems and its prevention. Coating for various cathodic protection
system and their assessment- inhibitors - corrosion of steels. Anodic protection-Design for corrosion control.
Role of paints and pigments to protect the corrosive environment
9 Hours
Unit V
Corrosion Testing and Monitoring
Corrosion testing and monitoring - electrochemical methods of polarization- Tafel extrapolation polarization, linear
polarization, impedance techniques-Weight loss method - susceptibility test – testing for intergranular susceptibility
and stress corrosion.
Analyze the instruments for monitoring the corrosion.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbooks
1. Zaki Ahmad, Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control, Elsevier Science and
Technology Books, 2006.
2. R. Winstone Revie and Herbert H. Uhlig, Corrosion and Corrosion Control: An Introduction to Corrosion
Science and Engineering, John Wiley & Science, 2008.
3. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2008.
References
1. ASM Hand Book, Vol. 13, Corrosion, ASM International, 2005.

2. Pierre R. Roberge, Hand Book of Corrosion Engineering, McGraw Hill, New York, 2000.
3. Denny A. Jones, Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Prentice Hall Inc., 2004.
4. A.W. Peabody, Control of Pipeline Corrosion, NACE International, Houston, 2001.
11O001 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I

3 0 0 3.0
 To gain knowledge on basics of Entrepreneurship

 To gain knowledge of business entity, source of capital and financially evaluate the project
 To gain knowledge on production and manufacturing system.


1. Entrepreneurial thinking
2. Innovation techniques in developing business
3. Legal aspects of a business
4. Skills on finance and cash flow
5. Skills on planning operations
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 10 10 10 10
5 Evaluate 20 20 20 20
6 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is entrepreneurship?
2. What are the factors that motivate people to go into business?
3. Define a small-scale industry.
4. Define tiny industry.
5. Who is an intrapreneur?
6. State functions of SISI.
7. What is serial entrepreneur?
8. What is Technopreneurship?
9. What is reversal method?
10. What is brainstorming?
11. What do you mean by term business idea?
12. Mention any two schemes Indian government provides to the development of entrepreneurship.
13. What is a project report?
14. What is project scheduling?
15. Mention any four techniques available for project scheduling.
†The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and Model Examination will be
16. What is contract act?

17. Define MOU.
18. What are al the types of sources of finance for an entrepreneur?
19. Mention any five external sources of finance to an entrepreneur.
20. Classify the financial needs of an organization.
21. What is short term finance?
22. What is return on capital?
23. What is capital budgeting?
24. What is product design?
25. What is quality council?
26. What is inventory?
27. What is lean manufacturing?
UNDERSTAND
1. Why is entrepreneurship important of growth of a nation?

2. Mention the essential quality required for someone to be an entrepreneur.
3. Why is motivational theories important for an entrepreneur?
4. How is network analysis helpful to the development of an entrepreneur?
5. Mention the essential requirements for a virtual capital.
6. How under-capitalization affects an entrepreneur.
7. Differentiate proprietorship and partnership.
8. Mention the causes of dissolution of a firm.
9. How important is the support of IDBI to an entrepreneur?
10. What are the salient features of New Small Enterprise Policy, 1991?
11. Why scheduling is very important for a production design?
APPLY / EVALUATE
1.If you want to become as an entrepreneur, what will be your idea?

2.Select any one of the creative idea generation method and suggest an innovation that you can implement in
your business.
3. Write a short notes on various legal aspects that you have to consider to run you business.
4. How will you generate you capital and other financial supports?
5. In case of getting enough financial support, plan your business and plot the various stages using any of the
tools or techniques.
CREATE
1. Draft a sample project report for your business.

2. Do a network analysis using PERT and CPM for your business plan.
3. Write a brief report to apply to a financial organization for seeking financial support to your business.
Unit I
Basics of Entrepreneurship
Entrepreneurship Competence, Entrepreneurship as a career, Intrapreneurship, Social entrepreneurship, Serial
entrepreneurship (Cases), Technopreneurship.
Entrepreneurial Motivation
6 Hours
Unit II
Generation of Ideas
Creativity and Innovation (Cases), Lateral thinking, Generation of alternatives (Cases), Fractionation, Reversal
Method, Brain storming
Utilization of Patent Databases
8 Hours
Unit III
Legal Aspects of Business
Contract Act, Sale of Goods Act, Negotiable Instruments – Promissory Note, Bills and Cheques, Partnership,
Limited Liability Partnership (LLP), Companies Act – Kinds, Formation, Memorandum of Association, Articles of
Association (Cases).
Business Plan Writing
10 Hours
Unit IV
Business Finance
Project evaluation and investment criteria (Cases), Sources of finance, Financial statements, Break even analysis,
Cash flow analysis.
Calculation of Return on Investment
11 Hours
Unit V
Operations Management
Importance – Functions –Deciding on the production system – Facility decisions: Plant location, Plant Layout
(Cases), Capacity requirement planning – Inventory management (Cases) – Lean manufacturing.
Project Planning
10 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. Donald F. kuratko, Entrepreneurship – Theory, Process & Practice, South western cengage learnng, USA,
2009.
References
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Reviews, Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
4. Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier, Operations Management, Thomson Learning Inc, 2007.
5. Edward De Bono, Lateral Thinking, Penguin Books, 1990.
6. http://www.enterweb.org
7. http://www.internationalentrepreneurship.com/asia_entrepreneur/India_entrepreneur.asp
8. http://indiakellogg.wordpress.com
11O002 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT II

3 0 0 3.0
COURSE OBJECTIVES (Cos)
 Evolve the marketing mix for promoting the product / services

 Handle the human resources and taxation
 Understand Government industrial policies / support provided and prepare a business plan.

1. Increase in awareness of the entrepreneurship Development for engineering decisions.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Model Semester End

1 Remember 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 10 10 10 10
5 Evaluate 10 10 10 10
6 Create -- -- 05 05
Total 100 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Who are Fabian Entrepreneur?

2. Explain the Views on Schumpeter on Entrepreneurship?
3. Mention the three functions of NSIC?
4. Narrate the role of IDBI in the development of Entrepreneurship?
5. What are Project COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs)?
6. What are the stages in a Project Lifecycle?
7. Give the meaning of Feasibility Report?
8. Explain the objective of Entrepreneurial Training?
9. What is Motivating Training?
10. Who is a Small Scale Entrepreneur?
11. How to develop Rural Entrepreneur?
12. What are the Social Problems of Women Entrepreneur?
13. Differentiate between entrepreneur and entrepreneurship.
14. What are the types of entrepreneurs?
15. Explain the various qualities of entrepreneur.
16. Briefly explain the different merchant castes in India.
17. What is entrepreneurship training?
† The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and Model Examination will be
18. Discuss any three programmes supporting women entrepreneurs.

19. Write a note on the role of NISIET.
20. What are the challenges and opportunities available in SSI's?
UNDERSTAND
1. Narrate any six differences between a Manager and an Entrepreneur?

2. Explain briefly various types of Entrepreneur?
3. What are the elements of EDP?
4. What is the role played the commercial banks in the development of Entrepreneur?
5. How would you Classify Projects?
6. What are the stages in project Formulation?
7. What are the target groups of EDP?
8. What are the major problems faced by Small Entrepreneur?
9. What are the problems & prospects for women entrepreneur in India?
APPLY / EVALUTE
1. Describe the various functions performed by Entrepreneurs?

2. Explain the role of different agencies in the development of Entrepreneur?
3. Discuss the criteria for selecting a particular project?
4. Describe the role of Entrepreneur in the Development of Country?
5. Define business idea. Elaborate the problems and opportunities for an entrepreneur.
6. Elaborate the schemes offered by Commercial banks for development of entrepreneurship.
7. Explain the significant role played by DIC & SISI for the development of entrepreneurship.
8. Design a short Entrepreneurship development programme for farmer
9. Discuss the role and importance of the following institutions in promoting, training and developing
entrepreneurs in India:
CREATE
1. All economy is the effect for which entrepreneurship is the cause"-Discuss.

2. Review the entrepreneurial growth by the communities of south India.
3. What are the problems of Women entrepreneurs and discuss the ways to overcome these
barriers?
4. Discuss the importance of small scale industries in India.
5. Critically examine the growth and development of ancillarisation in India.
6. Discuss the various sources and collection of credit information of entrepreneurs.
7. Briefly explain the recommendation and policy implication for survival of SME's.
8. Discuss the role of the Government both at the Central and State level in motivating and developing
entrepreneurship in India.
9. ―Developing countries like India need imitative entrepreneurs rather than innovative entrepreneurs‖. Do
you agree? Justify your answer with examples.
10. What are the reasons of very few women becoming entrepreneurs in a developing country like India?
Whether Indian women entrepreneurs have now made an impact and shown that they too can contribute in
economic development of the country? Discuss with examples.
11. Discuss the ―Culture of Entrepreneurship‖ and its role in economic development of a nation. What factors
contribute to nurturing such a culture?
Unit I
Marketing Management
Formulating Marketing strategies, The marketing plan, Deciding on the marketing mix (Cases), Interactive
marketing, Marketing through social networks, Below the line marketing, International marketing - Modes of Entry,
Strategies (Cases).
Five P's of marketing, SSI Policy Statement
10 Hours
Unit II
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Planning (Cases), Recruitment, Selection, Training and Development, HRIS, Factories Act 1948
(an over view)
Global Trends in Human Resource Management
10 Hours
Unit III
Business Taxation
Direct taxation – Income tax, Corporate tax, MAT, Tax holidays, Wealth tax, Professional tax (Cases). Indirect
taxation – Excise duty, Customs, Sales and Service tax, VAT, Octroi, GST(Cases)
Recent Trends for a Troubled Tax, professional tax slab
8 Hours
Unit IV
Government Support
Industrial policy of Central and State Government, National Institute and Agencies, State Level Institutions,
Financial Institution
Global Entrepreneurship Monitor, Excise Exemption Scheme
7 Hours
Unit V
Business Plan Preparation
Purpose of writing a business plan, Capital outlay, Technical feasibility, Production plan, HR plan, Market survey
and Marketing plan, Financial plan and Viability, Government approvals, SWOT analysis.
Small Industry Cluster Development Programme, National Equity Fund Scheme
10 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. S. S. Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S. Chand & Co, New Delhi, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005

2. Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003
3. K. Aswathappa, Human Resource and Personnel Management – Text and Cases, Tata McGrawHill, 2007
4. P. C. Jain, Handbook for New Entrepreneurs, EDII, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2002
5. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006
6. http://niesbud.nic.in/agencies.htm
7. http://www.planware.org/businessplan.htm
8. http://www.nenonline.org
9. www.forbes.com/managing
10. www.bizplanprep.com
11. http://business.gov.in/enterprises/govt_support.php
11C0XA AIR POLLUTION
- - - 1.0
 To impart knowledge on sources and types of air pollutants

 To enhance the knowledge of students on control of air pollution measures
 At the end of the course, students acquire comprehensive knowledge on sources and effects of air pollutants
and also learn the control measures of air pollution
sustainability
Sources and classification of air pollutants – Natural contaminants – Nitrogen Oxides – Carbon Monoxide –
Hydrocarbons – Sulfur Oxides – Air quality standards – Metrology and air pollution. Metrology and air pollution
– Atmospheric stability – Inversions-mixing height-plume behavior. Aerosols and particles – General facts –
Aerosol dynamics – Aerosols and clouds. Saturation vapour pressure of water – Relative Humidity – Wet point –
Acid rains – Wet scavenging. Adsorption – Principal adsorbents – Principles – Description of equipment-packed
and plate columns – PSA– Adsorption cycle-solvent recovery system – Continuous rotary bed-fluidized bed
Total: 20 Hours
Textbooks
1. R. W. Boubel, D. L. Fox, B. Turner and A. C. Stern, Fundamentals of Air Pollution, Academic Press, New
York, 1994
2. M. N. Rao and V. H. N. Rao, Air Pollution, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1989
References
1. Noel De Nevers, Air Pollution Control Engineering, McGraw Hill, New York, 1995
2. B. S. N. Raju, Fundamentals of Air Pollution, Oxford, New Delhi, 1997
11C0XB E- WASTE MANAGEMENT

- - - 1.0
 To provide basic knowledge on the management practices of e-waste

 To emphasize the need for e- waste management
 To create awareness among the students about the effects of e-waste

Introduction - E-waste pathways - composition of E-waste - Need for E-waste Management - E-waste generation in
developing and developed countries - Current practices on collection - Storage - Segregation - Transportation system
- Treatment system - Reduce - Recycle – Reuse - Legislation in India- restriction on import of e-waste under
hazardous waste management rule - Green Electronics and Green Computing practices - Life cycle assessment.
Total: 20 Hours
Textbook
References

2. K. Sasiikumar and Sanoop Gopi Krishna , Solid Waste Management, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2009
11C0XC BUILDING INFORMATION MODELING

- - - 1.0
 To understand the history of Building Information Modeling (BIM)

 To understand the workflow in developing BIM
 To understand the importance of sustainable BIM for various stakeholders
sustainability
Building Information Modeling (BIM): Introduction - Definition - History of Building Information Modeling –
Inefficiencies in documentation of Traditional approaches – History of Building Modeling Technology – Parametric
Modelers – Overview of Major BIM Model – Interoperability – BIM for owners and facility Mangers – BIM for
Architects and Engineers – BIM for Construction Industry – BIM for Subcontractors and Fabricators – Case Studies
Total: 20 Hours
Textbook
1. Chuck Eastman, Paul Teicholz, Rafael Sacks and Kathleen Liston, BIM Handbook: A Guide to Building
Information Modeling for Owners, Managers, Designers, Engineers and Contractors, Wiley 2008
References
1. Dana K. Smith and Michael Tardif, Building Information Modeling: A Strategic Guide for Architects,
Engineers, Constructors, and Real Estate Asset Managers, John Wiley & Sons, 2009
2. Willem Kymmell, Building Information Modeling: Planning and Managing Construction Projects with 4D
CAD and Simulations, McGraw Hill Professional, 2007
3. Brad Hardin, BIM and Construction Management: Proven Tools, Methods, and Workflows, Wiley, 2009
11COXD COMPUTER AIDED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN - I

- - - 3.0
COURSE OBJECTIVE (CO)
 To impart knowledge on the analysis and design of structural components using Civil Engineering
software packages

Introduction to structural design-Behaviour of flexural and axial members –Types of loads-Load distribution and
analysis of members-Load application for 2-D model-member property assignment and orientation- Member
property assignment and orientation-Member release for beams-Floor load applications-Model of a multi-storey
residential building-Model of a industrial truss structure-Meshing of flat slab dsign-Creation of shear walls- Design
of concrete and steel members- Introduction to seismic design.
References
1. Manual of civil engineering softwares.
11C0XE INTERIOR DESIGN

- - - 1.0
 To understand the history of Building Information Modeling (BIM)

 To understand the workflow in developing BIM
 To understand the importance of sustainable BIM for various stakeholders
sustainability
Plywoods , block boards & particle boards-Types of plywood-Grades of plywood-Woods used in plywood-
Thickness & sizes of plywood-Woods-Varieties of wood-Woods used for joineries-Woods used for interiors-
Seasoning of woods-Sizes, planks and allowances for processing-Painting & polishing-Types of priemer paints &
putty-Types of polishing-Life of polish-Hardwares-Hinges, glass, tower bolts - sizes & thickness-Stoppers, closers,
magnetic catchers and ball catchers,-Types of locks and keys-Floorings, screens & curtains-Types of flooring-Size
& thickness of materials-Types of screens-Types of curtains
Total: 20 Hours
Textbook
1. Chuck Eastman, Paul Teicholz, Rafael Sacks and Kathleen Liston, BIM Handbook: A Guide to Building
Information Modeling for Owners, Managers, Designers, Engineers and Contractors, Wiley 2008
References
1. Dana K. Smith and Michael Tardif, Building Information Modeling: A Strategic Guide for Architects,
Engineers, Constructors, and Real Estate Asset Managers, John Wiley & Sons, 2009
2. Willem Kymmell, Building Information Modeling: Planning and Managing Construction Projects with 4D
CAD and Simulations, McGraw Hill Professional, 2007
3. Brad Hardin, BIM and Construction Management: Proven Tools, Methods, and Workflows, Wiley, 2009
11CORA INNOVATIVE PRACTICES IN EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DESIGN OF STRUCTURES

- - - 3.0
 To impart knowledge on earthquake resistant design

 To emphasize the importance of usage of codes in earthquake resistant design of structures
 At the end of the course, the students will be able to analyze and design various structures by employing
codes pertaining to earthquake resistant design
sustainability
Engineering Seismology - Elastic rebound theory - Theory of plate tectonics and movement of Indian plate - Seismic
waves - Seismic intensity - Richter scale – Tsunami - Seismic zoning maps of India and comparison study -
Response spectra - Strong motion characteristics
Earthquake effects on the structures - classification of loads - Seismic methods of analysis - seismic design methods
- Seismic damages during past earthquakes and effect of irregularities and building architecture on the performance
of RC structures - Mathematical modelling of multistoreyed RC buildings with modelling of floor diaphragms and
soil-foundation - Winkler model.
Design of multi-story RC structure with foundation as per latest IS: 1893 by Equivalent static lateral load method
and Response Spectrum Method - Introduction to Time history method - Capacity based design of soft story RC
building - Design of Shear Walls - Ductile detailing as per latest IS:13920.
Seismic design of multi-storeyed steel structures with various bracing systems - Lateral load analysis and design of
two- storied masonry buildings - P-delta analysis - Seismic design of Elevated RC Circular Water Tanks - Ductility
requirements, types of ductility, factors affecting ductility - IS code provisions
Seismic retrofitting - Sources of weakness in RC framed buildings - Classification of retrofitting techniques -
Conventional and non-conventional methods - Comparative study of various methods and case studies - Introduction
to Base Isolation systems - IS code provisions for retrofitting of masonry structures - Failure modes of masonry
structures and repairing techniques.
References
1. Bulletin of Earthquake Engineering

2. Earthquake Science
3. Geotechnical, Geological and Earthquake Engineering
4. Journal of Seismology
5. Natural Hazards
6. Resonance
7. Journal of Volcano logy and Seismology
8. Pure and applied Geophysics
9. Seismic Risk Mitigation
10. Journal of Earth System Science
11. Geotechnical Engineering and for disaster Mitigation and Rehabilitation

12. Geo Journal
13. Acta Seismologica Sinica
14. Chinese Science Bulletin
11C0RB ADVANCED CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY

- - - 3.0
 To impart knowledge on high quality concrete and high strength concrete

 To introduce the concept of high quality materials
 At the end of the course, students will able to design and assess the performance of various cement-based
materials
sustainability
Introduction to concrete – Review of cements including blended cements – Manufacture - Chemical composition -
Chemical and physical processes of hydration - Modern methods of analysis
Admixtures - Review of types and classification - Chemical composition - Origin and manufacture – Usage - Effects
on properties of concretes, mortars and grouts - Methods of test – Applications - Aggregates – Review of types -
Production of artificial aggregates - Sampling and testing - Effects on properties of concretes - Mortars and grouts
Portland cement – Water – Hydration – Supplementary cements – Chemical admixtures – Microstructure of cement
paste – Properties – Proportioning of Mix – Mix design – Construction, curing and maturity – Fracture – Shrinkage
– Viscoelastic behavior
Durability concept - Reinforcement corrosion - Fire resistance - Frost damage - Sulfate attack - Alkali silica reaction
- Delayed ettringite formation - Methods of providing durable concrete - Short-term tests to assess long-term
behavior - Durability tests – Non destructive testing – Recycling practices
Lightweight concrete - Autoclaved aerated concrete - No-fines concrete - Lightweight aggregate - Concrete and
foamed concrete - High strength concrete - Refractory concrete - High density and radiation-shielding concrete -
Polymer concrete - Fibre-reinforced concrete – Mortars – Renders - Recycling practices.
References
1. Journal of Advanced Concrete Technology

2. Indian Concrete Journal
3. American Concrete Institute
4. Journal of Composites for Construction
5. ACI Materials Journal
6. Journal of Materials in Civil Engineering
11C0RC COMPOSITE STRUCUTRES

- - - 3.0
 To introduce the concept of composite materials

 To emphasize the importance of composite structures
 At the end of the course, the students will be able to design the composite structures
sustainability
Introduction - Advantages and application of composite materials - reinforcements and matrices – Generalised
Hooke‘s Law – Elastic constants for anisotropic, orthotropic and isotropic materials
Micro mechanics – Mechanics of materials approach - Elasticity approach to determine material properties – Macro
Mechanics – Stress-strain relations with respect to natural axis, arbitrary axis – Determination of material properties
- Experimental characterization of lamina
Governing differential equation for a general laminate, angle ply and cross ply laminates - Failure criteria for
composites
Basic design concepts of sandwich construction - Materials used for sandwich construction - Failure modes of
sandwich panels
Various Open and closed mould processes - Manufacture of fibers – Types of resins and properties and applications
– Netting analysis
References
1. Applied Composite Materials

2. Composite Structures
3. Steel and Composite Structures
4. Journal of Composites for Construction
11C0RD SPACE STRUCTURES

- - - 3.0
 To introduce the various methods and technologies employed in space structures

 To impart knowledge on fundamental equations of linear elasticity
 At the end of the course, students will be able to design and analysis space structures
sustainability
Review of statics - Deformable body mechanics - Beam buckling and Failure criteria - Elastic trusses - Matrix
methods and design - Energy methods - Introduction to linear elasticity - Torsion of solid sections - Bending of
beams with asymmetric cross sections - Torsion of thin-walled beams - Shear centers - Vibrations of beams
References
1. International Journal of Space Structures

2. Large Space Structures
3. Journal of the Japan Society for Aeronautical and Space Sciences
11CORE CASE STUDIES ON FAILURE OF STRUCTURES

- - - 3.0
1. To impart knowledge on failure of structures

2. To emphasize the importance of proper design process
3. At the end of the course, the students will be able to understand the reasons for failure of various structures
and the remedial measures to avoid such fauilures
sustainability
Analysis of determinate structures - Different methods including graphical methods - Analysis of indeterminate
skeletal frames - Moment distribution - Slope-deflection - Stiffness and force methods, energy methods - Muller-
Breslau principle and application - Plastic analysis of indeterminate beams and simple frames - Shape factors – Case
studies – Reasons for failure – Remedial measures
References
1. Journal of Structural Engineering

2. The structural Engineer
3. Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering
11CORF ADVANCED TRANSPORTATION SYSTEM

- - - 3.0
 To expose the recent developments in transport systems

 To introduce the concept of modeling and simulation techniques
 At the end of the course, the students will be able to design interchanges and rotaries
sustainability
Characteristics of Information, Constituents of Computer Based Information Systems, Element and functions of
Management Information Systems in Urban Transportation Sectors – Development of Database and Management
Information System – Concept of Database – Development of Transportation Database
Wireless Communication – Computational Technologies – Floating Car Data / Floating Cellular Data – Sensing
Technologies – Inductive Loop Detection – Video Vehicle Detection – Advanced Traffic Sensors and Surveillance
Systems – Dynamic Message Sign (DMS) Positioning Systems – Maps – Maps Matching – Path Finding and Route
Guidance, Information Dissemination and Display Technologies
Capacity and LOS, Design of Rotary and Signalised Intersections, Vehicle Actuated Signals, Signal Co-ordination,
Area Traffic Control System (ATCS), Pedestrian Planning at Grade Intersections
Basics of simulation – Simulation Model and Classification – Simulation o Urban Traffic Flow Characteristics -
Application of Computer Simulation in Traffic Flow Studies – Future Traffic Simulation Model
System – Concepts, Theories – Classification – Models – Phases in model building process – System Approach –
System Dynamics(S.D) View Points – Physical Flow – Information Flow – Flow Diagram.
References
1. ASCE – Journal of Transportation Engineering

2. Transportation Research Record, Washington D.C
3. European Journal of Transport and Infrastructure Research
4. International journal of Transport Management
5. Transport Reviews
6. Transportation Quarterly
7. Journal of Advanced Transportation
11C0RG URBAN TRANSPORTATION PLANNING

- - - 3.0
 To impart knowledge on the transit systems

 To introduce the concept of route planning and scheduling for transit systems
 At the end of the course, the students will be able to plan and design mass rapid transit systems and parking
facilities
sustainability
Introduction to Mass Transport – Role of various modes of Mass Transport – Problems and their Impact – Transport
System Performance at National, State, Local and International levels – Evaluation of existing system – Transit
Oriented Land Use Development - Case Studies
Urban Transport System – Public Transport System Re-genesis and Technology – Public Transport Demand and
Supply – Physical performance of Public Transport System – Public Transport and Urban Development Strategies
Route Planning and Scheduling – Bus Transport System – Performance and Evaluation – Scheduling – Conceptual
patterns of bus service – Network Planning and Analysis – Bus Transport System Pricing – Bus Transit System
Integration – Analytical Tools and Techniques for Operation and Management – Bus Rapid Transit Systems – Case
Studies
Urban Form, Land Use, Compact Development, Transport Integrated Urban Planning, Housing, and Household,
Services and Industry, Guidelines for Environmentally sound Transportation
Parking – Demand – Characteristics – Space Inventory – Accumulation – Duration – Turn over – Index – Design of
Multi Storeyed and Surface Parking facility
References
1. Transportation Research Part B

2. ASCE – Journal of Transportation Engineering
3. ASCE – Journal of Urban Planning and Development
4. Transportation Research Record, Journal of Transportation Research Board
5. Journal of Public Transportation
6. Mass Transit
7. Urban Studies
11CORH APPLICATION OF AI IN CIVIL ENGINEERING

- - - 3.0
 To introduce the concept of fuzzy logic

 To impart knowledge on neural networks
 At the end of the course, the students will be able to understand the use of various computer applications in
civil engineering

AI programming languages and systems tools - Object-oriented programming - Fuzzy logic - Knowledge elicitation
- Knowledge representation - Interfacing techniques - Pattern recognition - Intelligent databases - Natural language
processing - Machine learning - Reasoning under uncertainty - Heuristic procedures - Distributed architectures -
Genetic algorithms - Risk analysis - Neural networks - Integration of KBS and hypermedia - Case based design and
reasoning - Agent technologies - Agent-based design - Neural networks - Reasoning - Integrated design - Conflict
management - Soft computing - Virtual reality - Decision support systems - Java programming - Barriers to the
introduction of Knowledge Based Systems and Artificial Intelligence to Practice - Information needs of designers
References
1. Applied Artificial Intelligence

2. Artificial Intelligence Review
3. Computational Optimization and Applications
4. IEEE Transactions on Fuzzy Systems

Civilbe PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Civilbe PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Civilbe PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Department of Civil Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech.

| Regulation 2011| Revision 2013 1

Code Objectives & Outcomes

Code Objectives & Outcomes

Code Objectives & Outcomes

Water Resources & Transportation Engineering

ONE CREDIT COURSES*

€ Pre-requisite for this course is Entrepreneurship Development Elective I

11O101 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS I

PROGRAMME OUTCOME (PO)

(a) an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering

COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)

1. Acquire more knowledge in basic concepts of engineering mathematics

Model Semester End

1. State Cayley Hamilton theorem

6. Use Laplace transform solve ( D2 + 4D + 13) = e-t sint Y = 0 and DY = 0 at t = 0

1. B S Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publications , New Delhi 2000 .

1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume I, S. Chand and

11O102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS

PROGRAMME OUTCOME (PO)

(a) an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering

COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)

1. Making to learn modern techniques in sound.

1. Give the classifications of sound.

14. Write a note on holography.

1. How Weber-Fechner law is formulated?

1. Discuss the factors affecting the acoustics of buildings.

1. Compare magnetostriction and piezo-electric method in the production of ultrasonic waves.

The phenomenon of cavitation.

1. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011.

11O103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

PROGRAMME OUTCOME (PO)

(a) an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering

COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)

Model Semester End

1. Distinguish between alkaline and non alkaline hardness.

14. What is pitting corrosion?

1. Distinguish between hardness and alkalinity.

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

(a) an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering

COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)

Model Semester End

1. What are the sources of Energy Generation?

14. Name two nuclear fuels.

1. How Solar Energy is generated?

29. What is the difference between impulse and reaction turbine?

1. S. R. J. Shantha Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Hi-tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai, 2000

11C106 / 11F106 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

 To impart basic knowledge on computer programming using ‗C‘ programming

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

(a) an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering

COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)

Model Semester End

1. Compare while loop with do – while Loop.

1. Write a recursive function to calculate the factorial of number.

1. Explain the difference between while and do-while statements

1. Herbert Schidt, C- The Complete Reference, McGraw Hill, 2002

1. Yashavant Kanetkar, Let us C, BPB Publications, 2007

11C107 BUILDING MATERIALS